Home

SL1100 Programming Manual - Comm

1. ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 2 Set Time 01 S 0000 E 0800 M2 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 2 Set Time 02 S 0800 E 1200 M1 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 2 Set Time 03 S 1200 E 1300 M3 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 2 Set Time 04 S 1300 E 1600 M1 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 2 Set Time 05 S 1600 E 0000 M2 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 3 Set Time 01 S 0000 E 0000 M2 ModeGrp 1 12 03 01 Weekly Night Service Switching 01 Sunday 3 ModeGrp 1 12 07 01 Text Data for Night Mode Day Night Mode 1 Dia Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 2 Noite Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 3 Almogo Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 4 Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 5 Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 6 Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 7 Mode Grp 1 Day Night Mode 8 Mode Grp 1 14 01 01 Trunk Name Linha 01 51 14 01 13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1 All Trunk 14 01 14 Long Conversation Cut Off 1 All Trunk 14 01 15 Long Conversation Alarm before Cut Off 1 All Trunk 14 01 17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone For Long Conversa 1 tion Alarm All Trunk 14 01 18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1 All Trunk 14 02 04 Flash
2. ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 DISA Internal 0 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an In 30 seconds 20 31 21 Paging Time ternal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system terminates the DISA call 10 DISA External 0 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an 30 seconds 20 31 22 Paging Time External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system termi nates the DISA call 11 VRS DISA An 0 64800 seconds Sets up the time the system waits 0 second swer Delay Time after receiving an incoming VRS DISA call before the system auto matically answers the call 13 VRS DISA Busy 0 64800 seconds If a DISA caller dials a busy exten 5 seconds Tone Interval sion and Program 25 04 0 the system plays busy tone for this time before disconnecting 14 Delayed VRS An 0 64800 seconds Assign the delay time from switching 10 seconds swer Time from a normal incoming status to DID mode If this time is set to 0 the call switches to DID mode immedi ately Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 297 Program 25 Program 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 08 DISA User ID Setup Level SA Description Use Program 25 08 DISA
3. SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 For COIU Unit Setup Physical Port Number 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 1 36 0 For PRIU PKG Setup ISDN Line Number 01 24 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 01 ISDN Line Mode 0 No setting 1 1 T Point 2 S Point 6 S Point Leased Line 02 Logical Port Number 0 No setting 0 The start port num 0 1 T Point 1 84 ber of a PRI line is 2 S Point 1 84 displayed 6 S Point Leased Line 1 84 03 CRC Multi frame CRC4 0 off 1 Only for 2M 30ch Mode 1 on 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1 5 Each timer value of 1 Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program 81 06 T Bus 05 CLIP Information 0 No Based on this setting the 1 1 Yes system includes a Pre sentation Allowed 1 or Presentation Restricted 0 in the Setup message to allow or deny the Call ing Party Number Pro gram 15 01 04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled 06 Length of Cable 0 Level 1 2 1 Level 2 2 Level 3 3 Level 4 4 Level 5 07 S point DDI digits 0 4 0 08 Dial Sending Mode 0 Enbloc Sending ISDN Protocol definition 0 1 Overlap Sending 09 Dial Information Element 0 Keypad Facility ISDN Protocol definition 0 1 Called Party Number Only when Dial Sending Mode 10 03 08 is set for 1 Overlap Sending 13 Loss Of Signal Detection 0 Level 0 lowest sensitivity If the transmit receive 2 Limit 1 Level 1
4. SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 24 Trunk to Trunk 0 Disable Caller ID Enable 1 or Disable 0 the ability 0 Outgoing Caller not forwarded out to send the original Caller ID ID through Mode 1 Enable Caller ID is through when the call is Forward forwarded out Off Premise 25 Continued 0 Disable No Enable 1 or Disable 0 the ability 0 20 28 01 Discontinued 1 Enable Yes to dial a service code to continue or 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk disconnect the Trunk to Trunk con 20 28 03 Conversation versation after the alert tone is 24 02 07 heard 24 02 10 25 07 07 25 07 08 26 Automatic Trunk 0 Normal Transfer 0 24 02 11 to Trunk Trans Normal 24 02 12 fer Mode 1 Step Transfer Step 27 Caller ID Refuse 0 Disable CID refuse Per trunk enable or disable the abili 0 Setup will not function ty to use the caller ID refuse feature 1 Enable 28 Effectively of 0 No Effect No 1 15 12 Conversation 1 Available Yes Recording Desti nation for Exten sion 30 Flexible Ringing 0 Disable No 1 13 04 by Caller ID 1 Enable Yes 32 Anti trombone 0 No Effect No 0 Function 1 Available Yes 33 APSU VMO00 1 63 Additional PAD when a trunk call 32 0 dB Trunk Receive 15 5 dB 15 5dB_ connects to APSU Voice Mail Gain in 0 5 dB intervals 36 Calling Party 0 Off when set to Off This program enab
5. ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default Dial Analysis Table number 196 1 26 02 03 Additional Data Dial Analysis Table number 151 10 Dial Analysis Table number 152 10 Dial Analysis Table number 153 10 Dial Analysis Table number 154 10 Dial Analysis Table number 155 10 Dial Analysis Table number 156 10 Dial Analysis Table number 157 10 Dial Analysis Table number 158 10 Dial Analysis Table number 159 10 Dial Analysis Table number 160 10 Dial Analysis Table number 161 10 Dial Analysis Table number 162 10 Dial Analysis Table number 163 10 Dial Analysis Table number 164 10 Dial Analysis Table number 165 10 Dial Analysis Table number 166 10 Dial Analysis Table number 167 10 Dial Analysis Table number 168 10 Dial Analysis Table number 169 10 Dial Analysis Table number 170 10 Dial Analysis Table number 171 10 Dial Analysis Table number 172 10 Dial Analysis Table number 173 10 Dial Analysis Table number 174 10 Dial Analysis Table number 175 10 Dial Analysis Table number 176 10 Dial Analysis Table number 177 10 Dial Analysis Table number 178 10 Dial Analysis Table number 179 10 Dial Analysis Table number 180 10 Dial Analysis Table number 181 10 Dial Analysis Table number 182 10 Dial Analysis Table number 183 10 Dial Analysis Table number 184 10 Dial Analysis Table number 185 10 Dial Analysis Table number 186 10 Dial Analysis Table number 187 10 Dial Analysis Table number 188 10 Dial Analysis Table number
6. Input Data Extension Up to 8 digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Call Forward 0 Call Forwarding off Read Only No Setting 11 11 01 All No Answer 1 Call Forwarding Indicates Call Forward All No An 11 11 03 BothRing with Both Ringing swer BothRing setting statsus per 11 11 04 2 Call Forwarding extension 11 11 05 when No Answer 24 09 01 3 Call Forwarding All Call 02 Call Forwarding 0 9 P R Read Only No Setting 11 11 01 Destination for Up to 36 digits Indicates Call Forward All No An 11 11 03 Both Ring All swer BothRing destination number 11 11 04 Call No Answer set per extension 11 11 05 24 09 02 03 Call Forward 0 Call Forward Off Read Only No Setting 11 11 02 Busy 1 Call Forward Busy Indicates Call Forward Busy setting 11 11 04 or No answer status per extension 24 09 01 2 Call Forward Busy 04 Call Forwarding 0 9 P R Read Only No Setting 11 11 02 Busy destination Up to 36 digits Indicates Call Forward Busy desti 11 11 04 nation number set per extension 24 09 04 05 Call Forwarding 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 07 Follow Me 1 Enable Indicates Call Forward Follow Me setting status per extension 06 Call Forwarding Extension Number Up Read Only No Setting 11 11 07 Follow Me desti to 8 digits Indicates Call forwarding follow me nation extension number set per extension 07 Do Not Disturb 0 No
7. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Route Table Number 00 25 1 0 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 338 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 04 E amp M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Level IN Description Use Program 34 04 E amp M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each Program Tie Line There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21 05 and 21 06 For each Tie Line you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode Input Data 34 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Toll Restriction Class 1 15 2 21 05 14 01 08 Conditions Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 339 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 05 Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Level IN Description Program Use Program 34 05 Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk e g dialed from a Tie Line For each inbound trunk group enable or disable access to each CO trunk group 34 Input Data
8. Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 SMTP Enabled 0 No 0 1 Yes 02 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 03 SMTP Port 0 65535 25 04 Encryption 0 No 0 1 Yes 05 Authentication 0 No 0 1 Yes 2 POP3 06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting 08 E mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 440 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 19 POP3 Setup Level Description Use Program 47 19 POP3 Setup to set the InMail e mail notification Program Input Data f 7 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 02 POP3 Port 0 65535 110 03 Encryption 0 No 0 1 Yes 04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 441 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 20 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options Level IN Description Program Use Program 47 20 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Station Mailbox Message Notification Options 47 Input Data Station Mailbox Number 001 128 V3 5 Changed Index Number 1 5 Item It
9. Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Fractional 0 Disable when disa This program is used to enable disable the 0 bled the system will as system s ability to use a fractional PRI or sign the PRI as a full PRI T1 trunks 1 Enable when ena bled the system will not assign any trunks to the PRI the trunks must be manually configured Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 38 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 40 IP Trunk Availability Level IN Description Use Program 10 40 IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled Input Data Slot Number 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 IP Trunk Availability 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 02 Number of Ports 0 32 Port 0 SIP trunks are assigned in increments of two Please note that if odd port number is set it will use extra port V2 0 Changed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 39 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 42 Virtual Loop Back Port Setting Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 42 Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port 4 0 Input Data
10. Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Speed Dial Group 0 32 This program is used to assign a speed di 0 Number 0 No Group Assigned al group 1 32 to be used for the caller Caller ID refuse will not ID refuse number matching storage function Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Group 2 274 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA 22 17 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Description SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup Use Program 22 17 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone and Dial In Conversion Table Program 22 11 for Time Pattern Input Data Conversion Table Number 001 500 V2 0 Changed Time Pattern Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Received Dial Up to eight digits No Setting 02 Start of Time 0000 2359 Time Define the Starting Time for each DID 0000 Translation table in PRG 22 17 01 03 End of Time 0000 2359 Time Define the Ending Time for each DID 0000 Translation table in PRG 22 17 01 04 Dial In Conversion 1 800 These are the 0 Table Number table entries in PRG 22 11 05 Day of week V2 0 1 Sun Assign Day of Week for each DID conver 1 Added 2 Mon sion table 3 Tue 4 Wed 5 Thu 6 Fri 8 Sun 9 Holiday 0 Off 1 On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference
11. Input Data a Item Input Data Description Default 01 ACD Log In Log Out 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to Login 5 for KTS digit MLT SLT and Logout MLT SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 02 ACD Log Out for 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to Logout 655 SLT digit SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 03 Set ACD Wrap Up 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to set Wrap 656 Time for SLT digit Up on SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 04 Cancel ACD Wrap Up 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to cancel 657 Time for SLT digit Wrap Up on SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 05 Set ACD Off Duty for 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to set Off 658 SLT digit Duty on SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 06 Cancel ACD Off Duty 0 9 Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to cancel Off 659 for SLT digit Duty on SLT ACD Agents The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 2 MLT Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Single Line Telephone Programming Manual 2 81 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross
12. O1 O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 OF GO CO CO OF W OGOGO GOl Oal 0 0 OF Of OF CO OO GO Gl GOG O 0 7 0 Of W ojoj olol oj ojojo Programming Manual 2 61 Program 11 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Default New Default New 79 0 0 70 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 Olla Gal Gl 0 0 OF OO CO OO Oo Ole Gj Oal GOl 0 0 OF OO CO CO Oo O O0O10 O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OoO O 1 o o o o o o o o yo o w O GO GOG GOGL 0 0 olojo olo oj o Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Default New Default New 07 0 0 08 0 0 09 0 0 00 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 So G OGG Gl OF GOG OF O
13. Description Use Program 45 04 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add Program Input Data f 5 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Remote Logon Internal Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 02 Direct Logon Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 03 Transfer Message Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 04 Forward All Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 05 Forward Busy Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 06 Forward RNA Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 07 Remote Logon Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 09 Clear Down String Up to four digits No Setting 45 01 15 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 405 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 05 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Level IN Description Program Use Program 45 05 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is left 45 blank and 45 01 15 is set to Program Input Data Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Remote Log On Internal 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 01 02 Direct Log On 0 Off 0 45 01 15 4 On 45 04 02 03 Transfer Message QVM 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 0
14. Programming Manual 2 191 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 10 Call Forward Setting 0 Off Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to COS 01 15 0 by Remote via DISA 1 0n use the Call Forward service codes Pro grams 11 11 01 11 11 05 11 DISA Tie Trunk 0 Off This option enables or disables aDISA or COS 01 15 0 Barge In 1 0n tie trunk caller ability to use the Barge In 12 Retrieve Park Hold 0 Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 15 1 1 On tie trunk caller ability to retrieve a Park Hold call Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service e Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 192 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 15 Ring Cycle Setup Level IN Description Use Program 20 15 Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type Program Input Data 2 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Incoming Signal Type Normal In Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 2 coming Call on Trunk 02 Incoming Signal Type PBX CES Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 8 Incoming Call 03 Incoming Signal Type Incoming Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 12 Internal Call 04 Incoming Signal Type DID Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 8 DISA VRS 05 Incoming Signal Type DID DDI Ringing Cycle Numbe
15. Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 25 Trunk Group Number 01 25 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Outgoing Trunk Group Number 0 Enable Y Tandem 0 1 Restricted N Tandem Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 340 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 06 Add Delete Digit for E amp M Tie Line Level IN Description Use Program 34 06 Add Delete Digit for E amp M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or Program delete for Tie Lines e Delete Digit Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call 34 If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call they could delete all digits including the extension number Add Digit If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location the digits for the location can be added to the received digits Input Data Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 25 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Delete Digit 0 255 255 delete all digits 0 02 Additional Dial Digits Up to four digits 0 9 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 341 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 07 E amp M Tie Line Timer Level IN Descr
16. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01 24 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Ringing 0 Immediate Ring 0 20 04 03 1 Delayed Ring 15 09 01 Conditions e Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming e Program 15 09 01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the VE key to Delay Ring Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 151 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions Level IN Description Program Use Program 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversation 15 Recording destination for each extension If both Programs 14 09 and 15 12 define a destination the destination in Program 15 12 is followed Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Recording Destina Maximum eight digits Enter the extension number to which the No Setting tion Extension Num trunk calls should be recorded ber 02 Automatic Recording 0 Off Determine if an extension incoming calls 0 for Incoming Calls 1 On should be automatically recorded 03 Recording Contents 0 Save to dialed Mail 0 Storing Method Box 1 Save to own Mail Box 04 Automatic Recording 0 Off Determine
17. ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 55 Extension Name None Change 56 General Purpose 001 100 001 100 Red One Off LED Operation Red On amp Off 57 General Purpose 001 100 001 100 Red On amp Off LED Indication Red On amp Off 58 Automatic Trans Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set fer at Department Number Off Cancel Group Call 01 32 59 Delayed Transfer Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set at Department Number Off Cancel Group Call 01 32 60 DND at Depart Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set ment Group Call Number Off Cancel 01 32 62 Flash Key None 63 Outgoing Call On Red Mode enabled Without Caller ID ISDN 66 CTI V3 0 De On Red CTI active leted 72 Keypad Facility Key 73 Keypad Hold Key 74 Keypad RE TRIEVE Key 75 Keypad Confer ence Key 76 Application Key Any dial data 8 dig None it 77 Voice Mail In Extension Number lt InMail gt Skin or Pilot Number Fast Blink Green New Message s in own Mail box Slow Blink Red New Message s in other Mail box lt External VM gt On Red Access to Voice Mail Fast Blink Green New Message s in own Mail box Slow Blink Red New Message s in other Mail box 78 Conversation Re Fast Blink Recording cording Voice Mail 79 Automated At Extension Number On Red Setup All calls tendant In Skin or Pilot Number
18. ccceeee 2 508 84 20 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 511 84 22 DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup 2 512 84 23 DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setuf cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 513 84 24 DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup 08 2 515 64 25 VolP Basie Setup DSP lisisiesamidapiciaeicisiesicieiemerevinaaisigieneiwiguaes 2 518 84 27 VolP Basic Setup cceccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeeeaaeeaaeaaaeeeneees 2 519 84 28 DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup eeeseeeeeeseeeteeenee 2 521 84 29 SIP MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup eee 2 522 64 31 VOIPFDB Echo Canceller Set Piscissasisosarsissaiarciasieiaivieisidisistaiareiaiens 2 523 84 32 FAX Over IP CODEC S tup wns cccccctessceccssccontncansenasacaeneaneteanconsncnante 2 527 84 39 SIP Trunk message Custom Ze iccisciiiciissssescsesssiasacicusesussiavsdeuianuniae 2 528 gies lees Cea Mamtenance Progra asina 2 529 90 01 3 ME Veet ARNO Dae scarii eaS 2 529 90 02 Programming Password SU cisi cas cictecte te ccacassnnteccancterdeteeerecaniciende 2 530 EUS 5 Save WGA nicciieiucckinbaa naman a RMAanS 2 532 MR Load AU sce secaceeatase ice iaaratnena seins uated Sacre gabue E erat eee acreeaels 2 533 RL oe E Ep e PEE TT AT TEET IEAA A 2 534 90 06 ST PURO iia aaea Aa a a E Ra 2 535 90 07 5 Stalon COMTO siioni aA Eo ER
19. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Incoming Ring Pat 0 Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension 0 tern 1 Tone Pattern 2 is assigned to the function key on the key 2 Tone Pattern 3 telephone select the ring tone when re 3 Tone Pattern 4 ceiving a call on that key 4 Incoming Ring Tone Extension 5 Tone pattern 5 V3 0 Added 6 Tone pattern 6 V3 0 Added 7 Tone pattern 7 V3 0 Added 8 Tone pattern 8 V3 0 Added Table 2 4 Program 15 08 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Frequency Pattern Pattern 1 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Pattern 2 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Pattern 3 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz Pattern 4 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz Internal Incoming Sig High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz nal Frequency Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Programming Manual 2 147 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 2 148 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Level SA Description U
20. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 04 Time Pattern Number 01 10 Set Time Number 01 20 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Start Time 0000 2359 Per Night Service Group Per Time Pat Refer below tern assign a starting time pattern The first time pattern must start at 00 00 mid night 02 End Time 0000 2359 Per Night Service Group Per Time Pat Refer below tern assign an ending time pattern Each used time pattern must have a starting and ending time assigned 03 Operation Mode 1 8 Night Modes 1 Refer below 8 Example Time Pattern 1 0 00 9 00 12 00 13 00 17 00 18 00 22 00 0 00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode4 Mode 1 Mode4 Mode 2 Mode 3 midnight day rest day rest night midnight To make the above schedule it is necessary to set the data as follows Time setting 01 00 00 to 09 00 Mode 3 midnight Time setting 02 09 00 to 12 00 Mode 1 day Time setting 03 12 00 to 13 00 Mode 4 rest Time setting 04 13 00 to 17 00 Mode 1 day Time setting 05 17 00 to 18 00 Mode 4 rest Time setting 06 18 00 to 22 00 Mode 2 night Time setting 07 22 00 to 00 00 Mode 3 midnight 2 92 Program 12 Night Mode Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Time Pattern 2 00 00 00 00 Mode 2 night Time setting 01 00 00 to 00 00 Mode 2 night Defaul
21. Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Audio Capability 1 G 711 A law 2 2 G 711 p law 3 G 729 5 G 722 02 Number of Audio Frames 1 4 V2 0 Changed 2 1 10 ms G 711 G 722 G 729 2 20 ms G 711 G 722 G 729 3 30 ms G 711 G 722 G 729 4 40 ms G 711 G 722 G 729 5 50 ms G 729 V2 0 Deleted 6 60 ms G 729 V2 0 Deleted 03 RTP Filter 0 Disable 1 1 Enable Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 522 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 31 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 31 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup to sets VoIPDB echo canceller value Input Data Type 1 H 323 Trunk 2 6 Not Used V1 5 Changed 7 Networking V1 5 Changed 8 SIP Trunk 9 SIP Extension 10 Not used 11 DR700 Type 1 12 DR700 Type 2 13 DR700 Type 3 14 DR700 Type 4 15 DR700 Type 5 16 Not used Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 TDM Echo Can 0 Disable 1 celler mode 1 Enable 02 TDM Echo Can 0 Disable 1 celler NLP 1 Enable mode 2W 2 Echo Path Mode 3 Echo Path Auto De tect Mode 03 TDM Echo Can 0 Disable Do not change the setting unless 1 84 31 01 celler Com 1 Enable asked to change by engineer Select fortNoise mode comfort noise as background noise V2 0 Added Effecti
22. Input Data Night Mode Service Group No 1 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Day Night mode 1 Mode 1 Read Only No Setting 12 XX 2 Mode 2 Indicates current day night mode 3 Mode 3 per night mode service group 4 Mode 4 5 Mode 5 6 Mode 6 7 Mode 7 8 Mode 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance Programming Manual 2 619 Program 93 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 93 System Information 93 02 Trunk Information Level SA This Program is available for V3 0 or higher Description Use Program 93 02 Trunk Information to display the setting of each trunk Input Data Trunk Port Number 1 84 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Set Automatic 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 10 06 Transfer to 1 Enable Indicates Automatic Trunk Trasfer Transfer setting status 02 Trunk Port Disa 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 10 27 ble by Service 1 Enable Indicates Trunk Port Disable Busy code out status Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance 2 620 Program 93 System Information ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 93 System Information 93 03 Extension Information Level SA This Program is available for V3 0 or higher Description Use Program 93 03 Extension Information to display the settings of each extension
23. cesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 245 21 17 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 2 246 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 2 247 21 20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension eee 2 248 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting 2 249 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back Settings 2 250 2120 gt Home NPA GaU erosen aea iiaa iinis anisi 2 251 21 27 HNPA Exceptions Setup ssesssssereeerrrretrrtteertennrenrrnnnrnnnrnn nnne ennen 2 252 21 28 Foreign NPA Locals Seti iacsdccccesiscuatisasdineediesvisesntasnouabixesinnasneauceaun 2 253 Program 22 ineoming Call SeH eren i 2 254 22 01 Systemi Options for Incoming GANG ists iicisisisisasirarsinassinarzieseinarmisansine 2 254 22 02 Incoming Call Trunk Setup sesssessessesorerssnrnrnorenrnrrnrennenrnnnnrereseeeeenss 2 256 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Rang risane 2 257 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment 2 259 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment 2 260 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring MOG 6 coos oc ccsentse cesses e 2 261 22 07 DIL ASSIS ccnn Aa 2 262 22 08 DILARG No Answer Des tiation cnc cccas crs ccccccescecrccctcieccsseineauceauseauctveds 2 263 22 08 DID Basie Data SetuP eneren a EEEE 2 264 22 10 DID Translation Table Setup ccccccccececcceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenes 2 266 22 11 D
24. off off LED Pattern 6 IW On 625ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 125ms On Off LED Pattern 7 ON On Off LED Indication Reference ON LED pattern 7 OFF LED pattern 0 Rapid Blink LED pattern 3 Slow Blink General Function Level LED pattern 5 Slow Blink Appearance Function Level LED pattern 1 Fast Blink LED pattern 3 Stutter Blink LED pattern 4 Conditions e When a key is programmed using service code 752 it cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined 000 For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 04 must be undefined by dialing 752 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 48 Feature Cross Reference None 2 146 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Level IN Description Use Program 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range 0 4 to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key Program 15 07 If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15 09 the key rings with the tone you set in this program Also see Program 22 03 The chart below shows the available tones There are 084 available extension ports
25. Description Prodam Use Program 41 09 ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call is transferred when overflow occurs i 4 Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 1 3 0 3 Define the ACD group to which a call is 0 0 No Setting transferred when overflow occurs 3 In Skin Voice Mail Integration Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Programming Manual 2 371 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 11 VRS Delay Announcement Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 11 VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to use as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages Refer to Program 41 08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41 08 03 Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delay Message Start 0 64800 seconds Input the time before the 1st Delay Mes 0 Timer sage Starts 02 1st Delay Message 0 101 Input the VRS Message to be played as 0 Number 0 No Message the ist Delay Message 101 Fixed Message 03 1st Delay Message 0 255 Input the number of times the 1st Delay 0 Sending Count Message is
26. 2 420 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Table 2 11 47 07 03 Default Table Item Name Input Data 47 07 03 Voice Prompt Language 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 4 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian V3 0 Added Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 421 Program 47 SL1100 Level IN Program 47 ISSUE 4 0 InMail 47 08 Call Routing Mailbox Options Description Use Program 47 08 Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call Routing Mailboxes in 47 07 02 Routing Mailbox Type Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01 32 Item Item No Input Data Description Default 01 Dial Action Table 1 32 Dial Action Table 1 32 V3 0 Changed Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox 1 Dial Action Table 1 Timeout 02 Screened Transfer 0
27. 2 362 Program 40 Voice Recording System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 01 System Options for ACD Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Program In Program 41 01 System Options for ACD define the system options for the ACD feature Input Data 4 1 Item Item Input Data Default No 03 ACD MIS Connection Ports 0 None 0 3 LAN CPU Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Programming Manual 2 363 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 02 ACD Group and Agent Assignments Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description In Program 41 02 ACD Group and Agent Assignments to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group Name for each ACD extension number assign an ACD Group 01 02 An ACD Group number is assigned to each Work Period number 1 8 The assigned extension works as an ACD agent extension in the following cases e The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is logged in e An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number e An incoming call is received with a DID DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot number Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits ACD Work Period Mode Number 01 08 Item Item Input Data Descript
28. Item Item Input Data Default No 30 Z Filter Coefficients 13 0 255 84 31 Z Filter Coefficients 14 0 255 31 32 Z Filter Coefficients 15 0 255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 170 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 192 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 187 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 203 Program e 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 42 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 171 8 1 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 165 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 42 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 35 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 67 44 R Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 91 45 R Filter Coefficients 13 0 255 43 46 R Filter Coefficients 14 0 255 37 47 X Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 202 48 X Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 48 49 X Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 37 50 X Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 187 51 X Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 170 52 X Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 189 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 162 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 163 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 165 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 204 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 164 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 165 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 202 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 160 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 58 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 178 Conditions e This is used if Progra
29. The Call Routing or Announce ment Mailbox used to answer the calls 2 432 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default Description No 02 Answering Mailbox Catego 0 Undefined Answer Table 1 Category 0 Skip Mailbox No set ry 1 Subscriber Mailbox Schedule 1 3 ting Entryxx MB Ctg STA All Other Schedules Category 1 Mailbox No should Use this option to specify the 2 Master Mailbox 0 be 1 128 V3 5 Changed refer category of mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when the sched ule is in effect If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox the out side caller hears the mailbox greeting if recorded and can leave a message If the Answering Mailbox is a Master Mailbox the outside caller hears the recorded an nouncement Depending on how the Announcement Mail box is programmed InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional di aling options If the Answering Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table 3 Routing Mailbox to lt 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt Category 2 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2 415 gt Category 3 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2 420 gt
30. 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 16 Lock out Tone 0 2 17 Clock alarm tone 0 4 Program 8 0 18 BGM 0 0 19 Doorphone chime 1 3 6 20 Doorphone chime 2 3 6 21 Doorphone chime 3 3 6 ADARWNNI AOAR ONNI AOR ONNI O NAA 22 Doorphone chime 4 3 6 NONN 23 Doorphone chime 5 3 6 NONN 24 Doorphone chime 6 3 6 NWNDN 25 Service Set Tone 3 2 26 Service Clear Tone 3 2 27 Talk Back Tone 2 2 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 2 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 29 Door Relay Tone 1 2 DO DO DO ooj ooj OAAAAA ONAAAINN ONMNNAHA LOMDAANAAWAA OCUNAUINN ONDNDNAAJ J OJ OHDOH NO 2 450 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Serv Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level dB ice Count No Tone No 30 Doorphone Call Tone 1 2 0 1 32 0 dB 6 1 32 0 dB 31 Paging Tone 2 2 0 1 32 0 dB 6 1 32 0 dB 32 Splash Tone 1 1 2 0 1 32 0 dB 6 1 32 0 dB 33 Splash Tone 2 2 2 0 1 32 0 dB 6 1 32 0 dB 34 Splash Tone 3 3 2 0 1 32 0 dB Program 6 1 32 0 dB 35 1 Sec S
31. Cutting the tel Package Number On Red Set ephone power 2 9 13 15 V3 5 Off Cancel Changed 03 Remote Moni Slow Blink Red Remote Monitor Permit tor Permit Off Remote Monitor Deny 07 Fix Operation Night Mode Service Mode V3 0 Add Group No 1 4 ed Table 2 3 Function Number List 2 Appearance Function Level 00 99 Service Code 752 Func Function Additional Da LED Indication Note tion ta Number x00 ICM Key None x01 Trunk Key Trunk Number Fast Blink Green Incoming own Recall own 001 084 Fast Blink Red Incoming other On Green Speaking own On Red Speaking other Slow Blink Green Holding own Transferring own Slow Blink Red Holding other Transferring other Recall other x02 Trunk Group Trunk Group Fast Blink Red Incoming own other Number 001 025 x03 Virtual Extension Extension Num Fast Blink Red Incoming own other Recall own Key ber or Depart On Green Speaking own ment Group Num On Red Speaking other ber Slow Blink Green Holding own Transferring own Slow Blink Red Holding other Transferring other Recall other 2 144 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Func Function Additional Da LED Indication Note tion ta Number x04 Park Key Park Number 01 Slow Blink Green Holding own 64 Fast Blink Green Recall own Slow Blink Red Holding other 05 L
32. Input Data Department Extension Group Number 01 32 Received Dial 1 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Co Destination Number No Setting des Up to eight digits Conditions e The one digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Programming Manual 2 385 Program 42 Program 42 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 05 Hotel Room Status Printer Level IN Description Use Program 42 05 Hotel Room Status Printer to set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data Check Out sheet Room Status etc and the output options for the Hotel Motel feature Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Output Port Type 0 No Setting 0 3 LAN 03 Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0 Not Output 0 1 Output 04 Check Out Sheet 0 Not Output 0 1 Output Conditions e Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port Feature Cross Reference e Hotel Motel 2 386 Program 42 Hotel Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 09 Flexible Setup for Room Status Level IN This Program is available for V2 0 or higher Description progam Use Program 42 09 Flexible Setup for Room Status to enable dial room status codes Note the code definiti
33. 0 255 ms Set the maximum G 722 Jitter Buffer 120 Maximum 38 G 726 Audio Frame 1 10ms Maximum number of G 726 Audio Frames 3 2 20ms G 726 assumes the audio signal made by 3 30 ms a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 4 40 ms ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method 39 G 726 Silence Com 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0 pression VAD Mode 1 Enable G 726 When there is silence the RTP packet is not sent 40 G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30 Minimum of G 726 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 41 G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average G 726 Jitter Buffer 60 Standard Programming Manual 2 509 Program 84 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 42 G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum G 726 Jitter Buffer 120 Maximum 43 iLBC Audio Frame 2 20ms Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames 3 3 30 ms iLBC assumes the frame of 10ms is a unit 4 40 ms 45 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30 Minimum of iLBC is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 46 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the avera
34. 08 T308 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second of the timer to be started when REL is sent 09 T309 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 90 second upon data link disconnection 10 T310 0 180 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 180 second of the timer to be started when CALL PROC is sent Programming Manual 2 469 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 11 T312 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 6 second of the timer to be started when SETUP is sent or re sent on broadcast da ta link This timer is only valid for Network side use only 12 T313 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second of the timer to be started when connection request is sent Valid range 1 4 seconds in 1 second increments Value of 0 indicates timer not used 13 T314 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 Program second of the timer to be started when message segment is received 14 T316 T317 1 254 sec Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 120 onds second of the timer to be started when RE 81 START is sent 15 T317 1 T316 1 Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 60 second of the timer to be started when RE START is received 16 T318 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second of the timer to be started
35. 1 255 70 700 ms mum 10 2550 ms 09 Time Ringing Signal Stop Detec 1 255 60 6000 ms tion Time 100 25500 ms 10 Continuous Ringing Minimum 0 255 30 300 ms Time 0 10 2550 ms 11 Continuous Ringing Maximum 0 255 70 700 ms Time 0 10 2550 ms 14 Hook Flash 1 Time 1 255 80 800 ms 10 2550 ms 15 Hook Flash 2 Time 1 255 25 2500 ms 100 25500 ms 16 Pause Time 1 255 10 1000 ms 100 25500 ms 17 PFT Idle Detection Time 1 255 30 3000 ms 100 25500 ms 20 Loop Reverse Detect Minimum 1 255 10 100 ms Time 10 2550 ms 21 Loop Reverse Detect Maximum 1 255 86 860 ms Time 10 2550 ms 22 Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum 1 255 40 400 ms Time 10 2550 ms 2 466 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk Level IN ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default No 23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum 1 255 64 640 ms Time 10 2550 ms 27 Dial Pulse Break Time 10pps 1 255 12 60 ms 5 1275 ms 28 Dial Pulse Make Time 10pps 1 255 8 40 ms 5 1275 ms 29 DP Inter digit Time 10pps 1 255 80 800 ms 10 2550 ms 36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum 1 255 24 2400 ms Time 100 25500 ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 467 Program 81 Program 81 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 81
36. 15 21 01 06 Dial pause at first digit 1 21 08 01 Time of Repeat Dial 5 21 08 02 Interval of Repeat Dial 15 21 08 03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer 10 24 02 01 Transfer to busy extension 1 24 02 03 No answer time for call forward 30 25 07 07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time 0 25 07 08 DISA Conversation Disconnect Timer 0 40 10 01 VRS Fixed Message 0 14 01 06 SMDR print out 1 All Trunk 14 01 13 Trunk to Trunk transfer 1 All Trunk 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 1 All Trunk 11 12 16 Trunk access via Networking 715 11 12 29 Direct extension call pickup 866 20 17 01 Operator s Extension number 101 Operator 1 101 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment 101 DSS Console No 1 101 10 02 01 Country Code 56 15 02 01 Display Language Selection 12 2 564 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System 7 based 47 02 16 Voice Prompt Language 7 47 06 14 Voice Prompt Language 7 47 07 03 Prompt Language 7 47 10 03 Voice Prompt Language 7 Taiwan Program No Name Default 15 01 01 Extension Name Delete all station name 20 02 12 Forced Intercom Ringing 1 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 1 Class 1 EXT 200 295 mode 1 4 21 05 07 Permit code table Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 21 05 08 Restriction table Class
37. 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup 22 05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk 22 08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL IRG 31 05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker 81 07 Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port Trunk Group Base Program No Program Name 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Extension Base Program No Program Name 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup include Virtual Extension Copy all data except extension name item 01 15 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extension 15 07 Programmable Function Key 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 15 17 CO Message Waiting Indication 15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options 20 06 Class of Service for Extension 20 29 Timer Class for Extension 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 21 11 Hotline Assignment 23 02 Call Pickup Groups 23 03 Ringing Line Preference 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 24 03 Park Group Assignment 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 82 14 Handset Headset Gain
38. 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 06 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Level IN Description Use Program 25 06 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through the VRS This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions the company operator Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail For each VRS message set to answer outside calls refer to Programs 25 04 and 25 05 you specify e The digit the VRS caller dials 0 9 x Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits outside callers cannot dial system extensions e The destination reached Maximum eight digits when the caller dials the specified digit The destination can be an extension a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number A one digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message Example Message Number 01 Destination 2 Next Message Number 0 Dial 399 In this example when 2 is dialed by an outside caller the system transfers the call to 399 This means that extension 200 299 cannot receive calls from VRS DISA users during after VRS Message 01 Input Data Attendant Message Number 01 100 Received Dial 1 9 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Next Attendant Mes 0 100 0 No Setting Defines the next attendant message num 0 sage Number 101 Voice Mail an ber or destination number for each
39. 255 seconds 9 03 H 225 Setup Timer 0 255 seconds 4 04 H 225 Info Ack Timer 0 255 seconds 9 05 H 225 Call Proceeding Timer 0 255 seconds 10 07 H 245 Master Slave Determination 0 255 seconds 5 Timer 08 H 245 Master Slave Determination 0 255 seconds 3 Retry Count 09 H 245 Capability Exchange Timer 0 255 seconds 5 10 H 245 Logical Channel Establish 0 255 seconds 50 ment Timer 11 H 245 Mode Request Procedures 0 255 seconds 50 Timer 12 H 245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0 255 seconds 50 13 H 245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0 255 seconds 50 14 H 245 Maintenance Loop 0 255 seconds 50 15 RAS GRQ Timer 0 255 seconds 5 16 GRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 17 RAS RRQ Timer 0 255 seconds 5 18 RRQ Retry Count 0 255 3 19 RAS URQ Timer 0 255 seconds 3 20 URQ Retry Count 0 255 1 21 RAS ARQ Timer 0 255 seconds 5 22 ARQ Retry Count 0 255 2 23 RAS BRQ Timer 0 255 seconds 5 24 BRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 25 RAS IRR Timer 0 255 seconds 5 26 IRR Retry Count 0 255 2 27 RAS DRQ Timer 0 255 seconds 8 28 DRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 2 492 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB IN Description Use Program 84 02 H 225 and H 245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information of H 225 and H 245 ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default No 29 RAS LRQ Time
40. 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 84 2 517 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 26 VoIP Basic Setup DSP Level IN Description Program Use Program 84 26 VoIP Basic Setup to set the IP address and the port of VoIP 84 Input Data Slot Number 0 VoIPDB GW Number 1 GW Number will not be shown in Telephone Programming mode Item Item Input Data Default No 01 IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 172 16 0 20 02 RTP Port Number 0 65534 VolP GW 1 10020 10051 03 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 VoIPDB GW1 10021 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 518 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 27 VoIP Basic Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 27 VoIP Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the VoIPDB Program Input Data 8 4 Slot Number 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 DTMF Relay Setup 0 DTMF Relay disa 2 bled 1 In Band DTMF Relay Do not report to host processor 2 Out Band Relay Do not pass tones as voice 02 Setup CODEC Mode 0 Default Default means the system uses another 0 1 Mode 1 G 723 CODEC except G 723 iLBC Mode 1 means the system uses all CO DECs but
41. 5 LOGON e LOGON Action Log Onto Voice Mail 5 LOGON 6 Hang Up Hang Up Action 6 HNGUP 7 GOTO GOTO Action Go to Mailbox 7 GOTO e UND Action Undefined Routing 0 UND Data Up to 8 digits Digits 0 9 x Entry 0 9 and 8 digits max X Caller Dialed Digits Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attend Ignore Digits ant call to a specific location such as an extension For N No Routing example to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305 P Pause for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the correspond ing Number e Caller Dialed Digits Entry X Entered by pressing LK2 Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials Each X entry represents one caller dialed digit For example to set up a TRF Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301 399 range for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corre sponding Number Ignore Digits Entry I Entered by pressing LK3 Use the option to represent any digit dialed by the Auto mated Attendant caller that PZ VM21 InMail ignores for routing An example of this is REC action assigned to the key in Dial Action Table 1 by default The Action is REC2 and the Number is IXXX This means that a caller can dial any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in that mailbox InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller and routes according to the next 3 digits dial
42. 82 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 28 Z Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 43 29 Z Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 169 30 Z Filter Coefficients 13 0 255 166 31 Z Filter Coefficients 14 0 255 159 32 Z Filter Coefficients 15 0 255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 220 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 58 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 35 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 202 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 195 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 174 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 74 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 51 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 170 44 R Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 171 45 R Filter Coefficients 13 0 255 74 46 R Filter Coefficients 14 0 255 197 47 X Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 48 X Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 49 X Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 1 50 X Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 144 51 X Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 1 52 X Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 144 59 GR Filter Coeffic
43. Enable 1 Disable 0 the agent s ability to 0 nal call receive internal calls in ACD Off Duty 1 Can receive internal Mode call 09 Automatic Wrap Up 0 64800 seconds Input the time the agent is in Automatic 0 End Time Wrap Up End Time when Wrap key is pressed or automatically put into Wrap mode 10 ACD No Answer Skip 0 64800 seconds Set the time a call to the ACD Group rings 10 Time an idle extension before routing to the next agent 12 Start Headset Ear 0 64800 seconds Set the ringing start time for the headset 0 Piece Ringing for ear piece on a single line telephone SLT 2 376 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 17 CTI Operation mode 0 Transfer to ACD This program allows CTI Server transfers 0 when transfer no log group a trunk call to ACD Pilot number which in ACD groups 1 Error notice group has no login agent in 3rd Party CTI Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Programming Manual Program 41 2 377 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 16 ACD Threshold Overflow Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 41 16 ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call 4 4 overflow and the mode for each ACD group Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Ite
44. External Paging Zone Group Level IN Description Use Program 31 04 External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone To simplify programming and troubleshooting always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone i e 1 1 2 2 etc Input Data External Speaker Number 1 3 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Paging Group Number 0 3 0 No setting 1 3 Group number Speaker 1 Basic 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 Expan sion1 2 Group 2 Speaker 3 Expan sion2 3 Group 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External 2 326 Program 31 Paging Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 05 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page Level IN Description Use Program 31 05 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer Program ringing to each External Paging zone For each trunk port make a separate entry for each External Paging zone For UNA ringing make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data 3 1 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 External Speaker Number 13 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Universal Night Answer Ring 0 No Ringing No 0 1 Ringing Yes Conditions
45. Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0 30 0 No Setting 0 02 Logical Trunk Port Number Read Only 0 1 84 03 Logical Station Port Number Read Only 0 1 84 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 15 1 05 Calling Party Number 0 No 1 1 Yes 06 S point DDI digits 0 4 0 07 Call Busy Mode for S point 0 Alerting Message 0 1 Disconnect Message Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 40 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 45 IP Routing Table Setup Level SA Description Use Program 10 45 IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table Program Input Data 1 0 Routing Table Number 001 100 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Network Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 0 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 0 223 255 255 254 02 Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 03 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191
46. Level SA Description Use Program 10 23 SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected and define the IP address of another system call control port number and alias address for SL1100 system interconnection Input Data System Number 001 1000 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 System Interconnection 0 No Disable 0 1 Yes Enable 02 IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 03 Call Control Port Read Only 1720 1 65535 04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits 0 9 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 25 Program 10 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 24 Daylight Savings Setup Level SA Description Use Program 10 24 Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings As the telephone system is used globally these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Daylight Savings 0 Disable Enable 1 or disable 0 the system ability 1 Mode 1 Enable to adjust the time for daylight savings standard time 02 Time for Daylight 00 00 23 59 Enter the time of day when the system 02 00 Sa
47. None 2 44 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 48 License Activation Level IN Description Use Program 10 48 License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server Program Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Software Key Code 20 digit character No Setting 02 Activation Code 8 digit hexadecimal number No Setting 03 Feature Code 7 digit number No Setting Conditions The Key Operation for input item 03 is as follows Hold Key Edit next feature code Up to 10 feature code is possible to input at once e Register the license when 10th feature code is edited Soft Key2 Back Edit previous feature code Soft Key3 Submit Register the license Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 45 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 49 License File Activation Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 49 License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via CF Card which is issued from the license server 1 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Save License File on CF Card Dial 1 Hold Press Hold to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 46 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration
48. None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 471 Program 81 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 08 T1 Trunk Timer Setup Level IN Description Use Program 81 08 T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms Loop 02 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms Ground 03 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms DID 04 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms E amp M 05 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms OPX 06 Clear Signal Detection Time Loop 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 07 Clear Signal Detection Time 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms Ground 08 Clear Signal Detection Time DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 09 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms E amp M 10 Clear Signal Detection Time OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 11 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 10 80 ms Loop 12 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 10 80 ms Ground 13 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 10 80 ms DID 14 Ringing Signal Detection
49. Programming Manual 2 559 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 28 User Programming Password Setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 28 User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the user programming mode Input Data Extension Numbers Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Password Fixed four digits 1111 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 560 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 31 DIM Access over Ethernet Level IN Description Use Program 90 31 DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM Diagnostic Information Program Maintenance access over the LAN and to define the user name and password DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level information Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Access Enabling 0 Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 02 Username 20 characters SL1100 alphanumeric 03 Password 20 characters 12345678 alphanumeric Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 561 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 33 Preselected Data Setup Level IN Description Program Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use 9
50. ble this option 0 incoming calls do not print 09 Extension Number or 0 Name Set this option 1 to have the SMDR re 1 Name 1 Number port include extension numbers Set this option 0 to have the SMDR report include extension names 10 All Lines Busy ALB 0 Not Displayed Determine if the All Lines Busy ALB indi 0 Output 1 Displayed cation should be displayed 11 Walking Toll Restric 0 Not Output 1 tion Table Number 1 Output 12 DID Table Name Out 0 Not Displayed Determine if the DID table name should be 0 put 1 Displayed displayed 2 350 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 13 CLI Output When DID 0 Not Displayed Determine if the CLI output should be dis 0 to Trunk 1 Displayed played for DID 14 Date 0 Not Displayed Determine whether or not the date should 0 1 Displayed be displayed on SMDR reports This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program 35 02 03 15 CLI DID Number 0 CLI CLIP Determine whether or not the CLI DID 0 Switching 1 DID Calling Number Number Switching should be displayed 2 Calling Party Name 16 Trunk Name or Re 0 Trunk Port Name Determine how the SMDR should print in 0 ceived Dialed Number 1 Received Dialed coming calls on ANI DNIS or DID trunks If Number set to 1 ANI DNIS trunks can print DNIS 2 Bot
51. ex UserID Host it would not know where the call originated Name DomainName from 05 Domain Assignment 0 IP Address If the information from Telco was a domain 0 1 Domain Name name siptrunk sip com then set to do main If the information for Telco was a IP address then set to IP Address 06 IP Trunk Port Binding 0 Disable Trunk port binding is only used for SIP 0 1 Enable trunks to the provider in Non Registration Mode only When this is disabled an in bound call comes in and follows your DID routing but it comes in on the first available trunk When enabled the inbound call comes in and follows your normal DID routing but maps to that specified trunk If that trunk is busy it sends back a busy un less you build a hunt group To build the hunt group it references command 14 12 02 pilot register ID This then points you to command 10 36 02 All the numbers with the same pilot are in the same hunt group Conditions None Programming Manual 2 29 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 2 30 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 29 SIP Server Information Setup Description Use Program 10 29 SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound inbound The 10 29 commands are not used in non registration mode A If entries are made in Program 10 29 xx f
52. 1 On Conditions None 2 182 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 Programming Manual 2 183 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Level IN Description Use Program 20 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service to define the Hold and Program 0 Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Call Forward All 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini COS 01 15 1 1 0n tiate Call Forwarding All 02 Call Forward When 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 1 Busy 1 On Call Forward when Busy 03 Call Forwarding 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 1 When Unanswered 1 On Call Forward when Unanswered 04 Call Forwarding Both 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to acti COS 01 15 1 Ringing 1 On vate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing 05 Call Forwarding with 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini COS 01 15 1 Follow Me 1 0n tiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me 06 Unscreened Transfer 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 1 Ring Inward Trans 1 On Unscreened Transfer fer 07 Transfer Without 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 0 Holding 1 0n Transfer Without Holding 08 Transfer Inf
53. 234 means the user can enter 0234 9234 as valid ac count codes The digit cannot be used in the account code because this digit is used to start and end the account code entry Item Input Data Description Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Account Codes Forced Verified Unverified Programming Manual 2 357 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 40 Voice Recording System 40 01 Voice Mail Basic Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 40 01 Voice Mail Basic Setup to set the Basic setting of Voice Mail 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Fixed Channel for Voice Mail 0 16 0 02 Time Stamp 0 Disable 1 1 Enable 03 Conversation recording mode after 0 Stop 1 Transfer 1 Continue 04 Automated Attendant 0 Disable 1 1 Enable 05 Maintenance Time 0000 2359 0000 0000 No setting 06 Automatic Erase Mail 0 180 Day 0 07 Escape from DSPDB VM while At 0 Disable 0 tendant Message 1 Enable 08 Display caller ID while recording 0 Disable 1 message playing 1 Enable 10 Department group call when the 0 Disable 0 automated attendant is activate 1 Enable Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 358 Program 40 Voice Recording System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 40 Voice Recording System 40 07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Level IN Description Us
54. 255 seconds Entering 0 causes imme diate recall Scrn Trf Timeout Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer TRF from the Automated At tendant rings an unanswered extension before recalling This option has a similar function as Cus tomize Mailbox Options Call Routing Call Handling Options Delay Rings Be fore Redirect Transfer in InMail 15 seconds Commands 03 Time Limit for Dialing 0 99 seconds Entering 0 causes the Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to the Timeout destina tion programmed in the active Dial Action Table Dialing Timeout This option determines how long InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action programmed If the caller waits too long to dial When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed the caller routes to that destination When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action program med the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then InMail hangs up 5 seconds 04 Fax Detection 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox In enabled the InMail Automated Attendant when using this Call Routing Mailbox de tects incoming fax CNG tone The fax call then routes to the company fax machine according to the
55. 62 620 Hz Frequency Table No 5 0 Frequency Table No 6 0 Frequency Table No 7 0 Frequency Table No 8 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 459 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 08 MFC Tone Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 80 08 MFC Tone Setup to define the duration On time and pause Off time for MFC dialing This option affects all trunk line calls system wide And also it is possible to adjust the level of tone 8 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Duration On time 1 255 20 ms 5100 ms 5 100 ms 02 Pause Off time 1 255 20 ms 5100 ms 5 100 ms 03 Tone Level 1 97 45 dB 3 dB 77 7 dB Duration Pause Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 460 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 09 Short Ring Setup Level IN Description Use Program 80 09 Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SL1100 multiline terminals Input Data Short Ring Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Frequency 1 00 No setting 01 15 Refer to Table 2 14 Frequency 1 2 Table Refer below on page 2 461 02 Frequency 2 00 No setting 01 15 Refer to Tab
56. 9 dBm 21 dBm 30 10dBm 20dBm 28 Priority Codec Setting 0 G711 PT The option selected here determines what 0 2 G729 PT other codec options are applied by priority 3 G 722 PT 30 EchoAuto Gain Con 0 5 Define the Auto Gain Control 0 trol 31 DTMF Payload Num 96 127 96 ber 32 G 722 Audio Frame 1 10 ms Maximum number of G 722 Audio Frames 3 2 20 ms G 722 assumes the audio signal made by 3 30 ms a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 4 40 ms 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the encoding compressed method The Audio frame size setting is only from IP phone to IP phone When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will al ways use a 20 ms frame size Softphone SP310 only supports 20 ms 34 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30 Minimum of G 722 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 35 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average G 722 Jitter Buffer 60 Standard 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum G 722 Jitter Buffer 120 Maximum 37 RTP Filter 0 Disable 1 1 Enable 2 516 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 38 DTMF Level mode 0 Use the Default of 0 VoIPDB Unit 1 Use the Main Sys tem 39 DTMF Level High 1 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm 40 DTMF Level Low 1
57. Answering Mailbox Number Entryxx MB Num Use this option to set the num ber of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect This mailbox is de fined in 47 12 02 Answering Mailbox Category Up to 3 digits using 0 9 Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 1 All Other Answer Schedules No set ting Category 0 Skip Mailbox No set ting Category 1 Mailbox No should be 1 128 V3 5 Changed refer to lt 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt Category 2 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2 415 gt Category 3 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2 420 gt 03 Day of the Week 1 Sunday All Schedules 1 Entryxx Day 2 Monday For Day of the Week Type 1 3 Tuesday Answer Schedules use this 4 Wednesday option to select the day of the 5 Thursday week the Answer Schedule 6 Friday should be active 7 Saturday 04 Start Day 1 Sunday Answer Table 1 Entryxx Start Day 2 Monday Schedule 1 2 For Range of Days Type 2 3 Tuesday All Other Schedules Answer Schedules use this 4 Wednesday 1 option to select the day of the 5 Thursday week the Answer Schedule 6 Friday should start 7 Saturday 05 End Day 1 Sunday Answer Table 1 Entryxx End Day 2 Monday Schedule 1 6 For Range of Days Type 2 3 Tuesda
58. Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 05 ISDN PRI Layer 2 T Point Initial Data Setup Level MF Description Use Program 81 05 ISDN PRI Layer 2 T Point Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN PRI Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Timer T200 1 255 100 25500 Specify the timer value in 1 100ths of a 10 1 sec ms second at the end of which transmission of a frame may be initiated 02 Timer T201 1 255 100 25500 Specify the minimum time in 1 100ths of a 10 1 sec ms second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages 03 Timer T202 1 255 100 25500 Specify the minimum time in 1 100ths of a 20 2 sec ms second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages 04 Timer T203 1 255 100 25500 Specify the maximum time in 1 100ths of a 250 25 sec ms second allowed without exchanging frames 05 N200 1 255 Specify the retransmission count 3 06 N201 1 65535 Byte Specify the frame lengths in ocelots 260 07 N202 1 255 Specify the maximum number of transmis 3 sions from a TEI identity request message when the user requests a TEI Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 468 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 06 ISDN PRI Layer 3 T Point Timer Setup Level IN Description Us
59. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82 01 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Ring Tone Pat 0 Ring Tone Pattern Use this program to select the ring 0 15 02 tern 1 tone range for the trunk The trunk 1 Ring Tone Pattern uses a ring tone in the range selec 2 ted when it rings an extension Four 2 Ring Tone Pattern Ring Tones are available V2 0 or 3 lower 3 Ring Tone Pattern Eight Ring Tones are available 4 V3 0 or higher 4 Melody 1 5 Melody 2 6 Melody 3 7 Melody 4 8 Melody 5 9 Ring Tone Pattern 5 V3 0 Added 10 Ring Tone Pattern 6 V3 0 Added 11 Ring Tone Pattern 7 V3 0 Added 12 Ring Tone Pattern 8 V3 0 Added Table 2 6 Program 22 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 16Hz Middle 660Hz 760Hz 16Hz Low 520Hz 660Hz 16Hz Pattern 2 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz Pattern 3 High 2000Hz 760Hz 16Hz Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 16Hz Low 1100Hz 540Hz 16Hz Pattern 4 High 2000Hz 760Hz 8Hz Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 8Hz Low 1100Hz 540Hz 8Hz Programming Manual 2 257 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 5 V3 0 Added High 1400Hz 5
60. DTMF Tone 3 25 dBm 0 to 40 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 4 30 dBm 0 to 45 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 5 35 dBm 0 to 50 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 6 40 dBm 0 to 55 dBm 15 2 454 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 04 Max Detect Level 0 15 Refer below DTMF Tone 0 0 dBm 0 to 15 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 1 5 dBm 0 to 20 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 2 10 dBm 0 to 25 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 3 15 dBm 0 to 30 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 4 20 dBm 0 to 35 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 5 25 dBm 0 to 40 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 6 30 Program dBm 0 to 45 dBm 15 05 Forward Twist Level 0 9 1 dB 10 dB Refer below 06 Backward Twist Level 0 9 1 dB 10 dB Refer below 8 0 07 ON Detect Time 1 255 15 15 ms Refer below 3825 ms 08 OFF Detect Time 1 255 15 15 ms Refer below 3825 ms 09 Area Type 0 Other Refer below 1 Aust Default Item Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 No 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min detect level 10 20 dBm 15 25 dBm 15 25 dBm 10 20 dBm 10 20 dBm 04 Max detect level 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 05 Forward twist level 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 06 Backward twist level 0 1 dBm 0
61. Extension Group Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 1st Delayed Message 0 64800 seconds Time before the VRS Delay Message is 0 Start Time played for Department Group 02 1st Delayed Message 0 101 VRS message that is used for the 1st De 0 Number 0 No Message layed Message 101 Fixed Message 03 1st Delayed Message 0 255 time This is the number of times the 1st Delay 0 Sending Count Message is played If set to 0 the 1st De lay Message is not played 04 2d Delayed Message 0 101 VRS message that is used for the 2nd De 0 Number 0 No Message layed Message 101 Fixed Message 05 2nd Delayed Message 0 255 time This is the number of times the 2nd Delay 0 Sending Count Message is played If set to 0 the 2nd De lay Message is not played 06 Tone Kind at Mes 0 Ring Back Tone What is heard between the Delay Mes 0 sage Interval 1 MOH Tone sage 2 BGM Source 07 Disconnect Time Af 0 64800 seconds Time after all 2nd Delay Messages are 60 ter the End of VRS 0 No Disconnect played before the caller is disconnected Delayed Message Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Group Programming Manual 2 273 22 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 16 Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup Level IN Description Use Program 22 16 Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for Private Call Refuse
62. Feature Cross Reference e Background Music e Paging External 2 330 Program 31 Paging Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 10 External Paging Group Basic Setting Level IN Description Use Program 31 10 External Paging Group Basic Setting assigns the name of external paging Program group and defines the splash tone for external paging Input Data 3 1 External Speaker Number 01 03 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 External Speaker Name Up to 12 Characters External Speaker Num ber 01 Group 1 External Speaker Num ber 02 Group 2 External Speaker Num ber 03 Group 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 331 Program 32 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 01 Door Box Timers Setup Level IN Description Use Program 32 01 Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Door Box Answer 0 64800 seconds A user can answer the door box during the 30 seconds Time time specified in this program 02 Door Lock Cancel 0 64800 seconds When a user activates the door lock re 10 seconds Time lease relay this program specifies the amount of time the door strike remai
63. Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 14 POP3 Server Code number 0 255 70 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 16 SIP Server IP Address Code number 0 255 120 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 eNO 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 17 SIP Server Domain Name Code number 0 255 If there is setting in 120 Fixed z 10 16 16 this setting will r Maximum 20 character strings be ignored No setting 18 FTP Server Code number 0 255 141 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 b 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 19 Config File Name Code number 0 255 151 Fixed Maximum 15 character strings No setting 20 LDS Server 1 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 ay 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 21 LDS Server 2 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 ate 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 22 LDS Server 3 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 2 20 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Descripti
64. Input Data Service Tone Number 01 64 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Repeat Count 0 255 0 Endless Refer below Unit Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 02 Basic Tone Number 0 33 Refer below 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 03 Duration Count 0 255 0 100 25500 ms Refer below 04 Gain Level dB 0 63 15 5 15 5 Refer below Table 2 13 Basic Tones Basic Tone No Frequency Hz Level dB 01 400 13 02 520 13 03 580 13 04 660 13 05 700 13 06 800 13 07 880 13 08 1050 13 09 350 440 16 16 10 440 480 16 16 11 480 620 21 21 12 440 16 13 Reserve 14 520 650 19 13 2 448 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Basic Tone No Frequency Hz Level dB 15 650 780 19 13 16 780 1040 19 13 17 520 650 13 19 18 650 780 13 19 19 780 1040 13 19 20 1040 13 21 450 13 22 950 13 23 1800 13 24 400 450 13 13 25 Reserve 26 Reserve 27 Reserve 28 Reserve 29 Reserve 30 Reserve 31 Reserve 32 Reserve Default Serv Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level dB ice Count No Tone No 1 No tone 0 1 0 10 32 0 dB 2 Internal Dial Tone 0 1 9 10 32 0 dB 3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 6 0
65. Pattern 6 Trunk Incoming V3 0 Added 9 Pattern 7 Trunk Incoming V3 0 Added 10 Pattern 8 Trunk Incoming V3 0 Added Ringing Tone Type Number 1 High 2 Mid 3 Low Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Frequency 1 1 520 Hz Refer below 2 540 Hz 3 660 Hz 4 760 Hz 5 1100 Hz 6 1400 Hz 7 2000 Hz 02 Frequency 2 1 520 Hz Refer below 2 540 Hz 3 660 Hz 4 760 Hz 5 1100 Hz 6 1400 Hz 7 2000 Hz Programming Manual 2 477 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 03 Modulation 0 No Modulation Refer below 1 8 Hz Modulation 2 16 Hz Modulation 3 Envelope Default Table 2 17 82 01 Default Table Program gn act Tone Type Frequency 1 Hz Frequency 2 Hz Modulation Pattern 1 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz Modulation Trunk Incomin Mid 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Modulation g 8 2 Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Modulation Pattern 2 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Modulation Trunk Incomin Mid 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation g Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Modulation Pattern 3 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Modulation Trunk Incomin Mid 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Modulation g Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz Modulation Pattern 4 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation runk Incomin i z z z Modulation Trunk I ing Mid 1400 H 660 H 8 Hz Modulati Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz Modulation Pattern 5 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Modulation Intercom Incoming Pat M
66. Physical Ports 01 08 Telephone Extension Number Range 1 89999999 Extension cannot start with 0 or 9 Speed Dialing Virtual Extension Ports 50 11 04 Virtual Extension Number Range 1 89999999 11 04 Extension cannot start with 0 or 9 Door Boxes 6 32 02 Door Box Numbers 1 6 32 02 DSS Consoles Numbers 12 30 01 60 Button DSS Console Operator Access Number 0 Default Operator Extension 15 Automated Attendant VRS Message Numbers Conference 1 100 Speed Dialing Groups 32 13 02 Speed Dialing Bins 0 999 13 02 Speed Dialing Table Common 900 13 01 03 25 06 Introduction ISSUE 4 0 System Number Plan Capacities System Type Number Plan Capacities Related Pro gram Note Conference Circuits Department and Pickup Groups 32 maximum 16 Parties Per Conference Internal Hotline 128 Department Extension Group 1 32 16 01 Numbers Call Pickup Group Numbers 1 32 23 02 External Hotline Paging and Park 128 Internal Page Group Numbers 0 01 32 31 02 External Page Group Numbers 1 3 31 04 External Speakers 1 3 31 04 Park Group Numbers 1 64 24 03 Park Orbits 1 64 24 03 Passwords Programming Passwords SMDR Ports 1 2 35 03 VRS VM InMail 1 VRS VM Ports 16 Need license and MEMDB VRS Port 16 Need MEMDB VRS Attendant Messages 3 VRS Recordab
67. Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 07 DIL Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 22 07 DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk A DIL rings an extension directly without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming If an extension has a line key the DIL rings the line key Use Program 22 02 to designate a trunk as a DIL You can make eight DIL assignments one for each Night Service mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of Transfer Maximum of 8 digits 0 Assign extension or department group No Setting ring Destination 9 number for DIL trunk Conditions e Program 22 02 must be set to four for the trunk Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Line DIL 2 262 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 08 DIL IRG No Answer Destination Level IN Description For DIL Delayed Ringing use Program 22 08 DIL IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL Program No Answer Ring Group An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires Program 22 01 04 DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group Make eight assignments one for each Night Service mode 2 2 Input Data Trunk Port Number
68. Red Mic On OFF Off Mic Off 03 DND Key On Red DND Setup 04 BGM ON OFF On Red Active 05 Headset On Red Headset Operation 06 Transfer Key None Programming Manual 2 313 Program 30 Program 30 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 07 Conference Key On Red Conference Operation 08 Incoming Call ID List Fast Blink Red Existing New CID On Red Existing Checked CID Off No CID 09 Day Night Mode Switch Mode Number 1 8 On While each mode 10 Call Forward Immedi On Red Setup ate 11 Call Forward Busy On Red Setup 12 Call Forward No An On Red Setup swer 13 Call Forward Busy No On Red Setup Answer 14 Call Forward Both On Red Setup Ring 15 Follow Me Fast Blink Red Setup Slow Blink Red To be setup 18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers On Red Setup 01 20 19 External Group Paging External Paging Num On Red Active ber 1 6 20 External All Call Paging On Red Active 21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Num On Red Active ber 01 32 22 Internal All Call Paging None 23 Meet Me Answer to In None ternal Paging 24 Call Pickup None 25 Call Pickup for Another None Group 26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group None Group Number 1 32 27 Speed Dial S
69. SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 26 ARS Service 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Level IN Description Use Program 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS to set pre transaction tables for selecting Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route e Service Type 1 Route to Trunk Group Number The number routes to a trunk group e Service Type 2 F Route Selected The number is controlled by the F Route table Input Data Dial Analysis Table Number 1 400 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Dial Maximum of 16 digits 0 9 No Setting 02 ARS Service Type 0 No Service Call Restricted 0 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access 03 Additional Data Service If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Select Trunk Group 0 44 04 Number Number 44 05 0 25 Trunk Group Number 0 No Route 101 104 Networking ID V1 5 Added If Service Type 2 in 26 02 F Route Time Schedule Not Used 0 100 F Route Table Number Refer to Program 44 05 ARS F Route Table on page 2 394 F Route Time Schedule Used 0 100 F Route Selection Number Refer to Program 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule on page 2 393 04 ARS Class of Service 0 16 0 0 No ARS Class Call Restricted 05 Dial Treatment for ARS 0 15 0 07 Network Specified Parameter 0 16 0 26 12 Table Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route 2 306 Prog
70. The pattern number is defined in Program 44 08 01 Input Data 44 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Date 0101 1231 Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting Date 0101 1231 Pattern 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual 2 401 Program 45 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 01 Voice Mail Integration Options Level IN Description Use Program 45 01 Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Voice Mail De 0 32 Assign which Extension Depart 0 partment Group 0 No Voice Mail ment Group number is to be as Number signed as the voice mail group 02 Voice Mail Mas Up to 12 Characters Enter the Voice Mail Master Name VOICE MAIL ter Name 03 Voice Mail Call 0 Off Enable disable the ability to process 0 45 01 11 Screening 1 On the Call Screening commands 1 extension number sent from the Voice Mail You should normally en able this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening Disable this op tion if your system has been modi fied so that extensions begin with the digit 1 e g 101 102 etc Also see the Flexible System Number ing feature 04 Park and Page 0 Off Enable disable the system ability
71. Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox If enabled after the subscriber listens to a message InMail announces the time and date the message was left Auto Time Stamp also announces the message send er if known A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox 10 System Administrator 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled System Admin Use this option to designate the Subscrib er Mailbox as a System Administrator This allows the subscriber to use the options af ter logging onto their mailbox Programming Manual 2 417 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 11 Dialing Option 0 No Disabled Dialing Option provides additional dialing 0 1 Yes Enabled options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls see Next Call Routing Mailbox below If enabled a caller who accesses the Sub scriber Mailbox to leave a message can di al any option in the Next Call Routing Mail box Dial Action Table If disabled the call er can dial only 0 to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action 12 Next Call Routing 0 32 Next CR Mbox 1 Mailbox 0 Undefined Use this option to assign a Next Call Rout Call Routing ing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox Mailbox 01 This provides callers with additional dialing By default Cal
72. When DSP of VoIPDB Defective 1 Possibility of WAR trouble in VoIPDB notifies defective hard formation Error ware 2 Check with maker on un certain points 66 2 0 SIP ex More than the e Wrong number 1 Confirm the When the WAR tension number of licen of licenses number of li number of License ses to which the censes for SIP registration of Error SIP extension extension ter SIP extension terminal was minals terminals falls turned on at 2 Check with below the REGISTER maker on un number of li certain points censes 67 0 0 SIP illegal The system re A client or network Check with maker INF Packet ceived illegal was illegal state on uncertain point received packet when happening frequently when operating it 68 2 0 VoIPDB 1 Provides Not enough DSP Install VMDB with DSP All alert when resources in sys more DSP resour Busy all DSP re tem ces Alarm sources are being used 2 Used to trouble shoot or alerting when up grade is needed 76 0 0 SIP Op No Response Network Error or Check PRG tion Keep from SIP Option Set the wrong IP 10 23 02 PRG Alive Keep Alive Address of Sender 10 29 03 06 V4 0 Added Conditions e The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at Program 90 50 01 2 544 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 e System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90 10 01 If multiple Alarm Display Setting is set only
73. e Programs that may be affected with the changing the code Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Bypass Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 707 8 digit Activating Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override This code is avail able only if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Pro gram 11 16 09 02 Conference 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 1 8 digit 03 Override Off 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 709 Hook Signaling 8 digit 04 Set Camp On 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 750 8 digit 05 Cancel Camp On 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 770 8 digit 06 Switching of 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 712 Voice Call and 8 digit Signal Call 07 Step Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 708 8 digit 08 Barge In 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 710 8 digit 09 Change to STG 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT No Setting 16 02 Department 8 digit Group All Ring 10 Station Speed Di 0 9 x Maximum of Assign the service code used for ac 2 aling 8 digit cessing common speed dialing sys tem speed dialing bins The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG Programming Manual 2 77 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 11 Group Speed
74. quest Change Yes 1 Conditions e This Program is activated when the Program 10 46 07 set to 1 Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 591 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 50 System Alarm Display Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 50 System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display 9 0 Input Data Index Number 01 50 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 System Alarm Display Telephone Up to eight digits No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 592 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 51 Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange Level IN Description Use Program 90 51 Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance Input Data 9 0 Program Index 1 10 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Display Name Up to 16 characters Refer below 02 Year 00 99 00 03 Month 01 12 00 04 Day 01 31 00 Index Default 01 No setting 02 Backup battery 03 No setting 04 10 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 593 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 52 System Alarm Save Level IN Description Note
75. sage InMail announces the time and date the message was left Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender if known A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox 12 System Administrator 0 No Disabled Use this option to designate the Subscrib Mailbox 1 101 1 Yes Enabled er Mailbox as a System Administrator This 1 allows the subscriber to use the SA op Mailbox 2 0 tions after logging onto their mailbox 13 Dialing Option 0 No Disabled Dialing Option provides additional dialing 0 1 Yes Enabled options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls see Next Call Routing Mailbox below If enabled a caller who accesses the Sub scriber Mailbox to leave a message can di al any of the options in the Next Call Rout ing Mailbox Dial Action Table If disabled the caller can dial only 0 to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action 14 Next Call Routing Call Routing Mailbox Next CR Mbox 1 Mailbox Number 1 3 digits 00 Use this option to assign a Next Call Rout 32 ing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox 00 Undefined This provides callers with additional dialing No entry Entered by options while listening to a Subscriber pressing CLEAR Mailbox recorded or default greeting The digits the caller can dial depend on the set ting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox op tions 15 Directory List Number 0 None 0 1 8 List Number All 16 Voice Promp
76. upgrading software from prior ver sions the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed man ually 03 Terminal Type 0 Normal Enter 1 for this option to allow a sin 0 15 03 01 1 Special gle line port to receive DTMF tones 45 01 01 after the initial call setup Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones af ter the initial call setup For Voice Mail always enter 1 e g receive DTMF tones 04 Flashing 0 No Enables disables Flash for single 1 1 Yes line telephones 05 Trunk Polarity 0 Off Do Not Change Default Entry as 0 Reverse 1 On DTMF issues may arise with voice mail 06 Extension Polari 0 Disable Off Do Not Change Default Entry as 0 ty Reverse 1 Enable On DTMF issues may arise with voice mail 07 Enabled On 0 No 1 11 12 45 Hook When 1 Yes Holding SLT 08 Answer On Hook 0 Disable No 1 11 12 46 when Holding 1 Yes Enable SLT Programming Manual 2 133 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Caller ID Func 0 Disable Caller ID Enable 1 or disable 0 the Caller 0 tion For Exter not displayed ID FSK signal for an external Caller nal Module 1 Enable Caller ID is ID module or a 3rd party vendor tel displayed ephone with Caller ID display Important If voice mail is used this setting must be disabled f
77. 0 64800 seconds A VRS DISA caller can ring an ex 0 25 07 02 swer Time Dis tension for this time before the sys connect or IRG tem sets the call as a Ring No An or VM swer After this time expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing set in Program 25 03 and 25 04 18 Disconnect after 0 64800 seconds 60 25 07 03 Re transfer to IRG 19 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds Determine the time a DISA caller or 3600 25 07 07 tion Warning any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Tone Time Trunking conversation can last be Trunk to Trunk fore the Long Conversation tone is heard 20 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds This time determines how long the 10 25 07 08 tion Disconnect system waits before disconnecting a Trunk to Trunk DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conver sation call after the Long Conversa tion tone is heard 21 DISA Internal 0 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an In 30 25 07 09 Paging Time ternal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system terminates the DISA call 2 210 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 22 DISA External 0 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an 30 25 07 10 Paging Time External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system termi nates the D
78. 0 13 0 bound threshold manual setting 66 Dial Button 0 Off 1 Backlight 1 On 67 Caller ID shared 0 Personal 0 20 49 01 groups 1 8 Shared Group 68 Mode setting for Read Only This program can only be il incoming call 0 Voice change by using PC Program from extension 1 Signal ming 69 Mute Operation 0 Do not change 0 on Handsfree Mute status 3 0 Added 1 Start with enabled Mute 2 Start with muted Mute 70 Mute Key Opera 0 Enabled Active This program determines whether 0 tion V2 0 Added 1 Disabled the Mute key is operational during a 71 Disable Softkey 0 Off When set to 1 On disable Softkey 0 V3 0 Added 1 On and cursor key operation at the ter Lamp Cycle On Off Timing Pattern Program 15 02 35 36 38 Programs 15 02 35 36 and 38 Input Cycle 1 Cycle 1 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF 2 Cycle 2 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF 3 Cycle 3 125 ms ON 125 ms OFF 4 Cycle 4 125 ms ON 125 ms OFF 125 ms ON 625 ms OFF 5 Cycle 5 875 ms ON 125 ms OFF 6 Cycle 6 625 ms ON 125 ms OFF 125 ms ON 125 ms OFF 7 Cycle 7 1000 ms ON Programming Manual 2 131 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 02 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Fre Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation quency Pattern External Incoming Signal High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz Frequency Pattern 1 Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16
79. 05 Local Code Digits 0 15 0 No Local Only Overlap Receiving Mode 0 Code 06 Local Code Dial maximum 16 digits Only Overlap Receiving Mode No Setting 07 Pilot Code Dial 1 digit 0 9 Only Overlap Receiving Mode No Setting 08 T302 Time out Opera 0 Disconnect Cut Only Overlap Receiving Mode 0 tion 1 Transfer Refer to Program 22 12 DID In tercept Ring Group Conditions None 2 264 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup IN Description Use Program 22 09 DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial In incoming calls for each trunk group ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Dialing DID Program 22 Programming Manual 2 265 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 10 DID Translation Table Setup Level IN Description Use Program 22 10 DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables There are 800 V1 5 or higher Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables Input Data Conversion Table Area Number 01 20 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 1st Area Setup Start Address 0 800 Refer below 0 No Setting 1st Area Setup End Address 2nd Area Setup Start Address 2nd Area Setup End Address Default Conversion
80. 084 1 084 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Groups 2 116 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 06 Trunk Group Routing Level IN Description Use Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14 05 When a user dial 9 the system routes their calls in the order priority specified For example if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy the system may route the call to another group Trunk Access Map programming Programs 14 07 may limit this option The system contains 25 routing tables for trunk access Each table has four priority orders for trunk access There are 25 available Trunk Group Numbers Example for setting With less than four trunk groups Route Number 1 Order 1 Trunk Group 1 Order 2 Trunk Group 2 For the above setting if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2 With more than four trunk groups Route Number 1 Order 1 Trunk Group 1 Order 2 Trunk Group 2 Order 3 Trunk Group 3 Order 4 1002 Jump To Route Number 2 Route Number 2 Order 1 Trunk Group 4 Order 2 Trunk Group 5 For the above setting if all the lines in the trunk groups 1 2 and 3 are busy the system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5 Input Data Route T
81. 1 ADA 2 BHA 3 WHA 26 DR700 Terminal 0 Not Set 0 Type 2 ITL D 1D ITL 24BT 1D ITL 24PA 1D without 8LKI LCD L 5 Softphone 6 CTI 9 IPAWW 24TIXH 27 Personal ID In 0 128 V3 5 When the SIP Multiline telephone is 0 84 22 dex Changed using manual auto registration as sign each phone a unique personal index Then go to command 84 22 to assign the user name and pass word 28 Addition Infor 0 Do not inform Select whether to inform of addition 0 15 01 01 mation Setup 1 Inform al information or not 15 02 13 15 02 15 15 02 34 29 Terminal WAN Read Only 0 0 0 0 side IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 30 DTMF Play dur 0 Do Not Play 0 ing Conversation 1 Play at Receive Exten sion 31 Alarm Tone dur 0 Off 1 ing Conversation 1 On RTP packet loss alarm 33 LAN Side IP Ad Read Only 0 0 0 0 dress of Termi 0 0 0 0 nal 255 255 255 255 35 Encryption Mode Read Only 0 On Off 0 Off 1 On 36 DR700 Firmware Read Only Indicate a current firmware Version 00 00 00 00 Version 00 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff 38 Paging Protocol 0 Multicast Sets the protocol mode for the Pag 0 Mode 1 Unicast ing function 2 Auto 39 CTI Override 0 Disable 0 Mode 1 Enable Programming Manual 2 137 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 40 Calling name dis 0 Both nam
82. 1 digit swers access code in Automated Attendant serv 104 Refer to 25 04 ice VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy on page 2 292 105 Dial the other ex tension 106 record VRS 02 Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting Must be a valid ex tension number that is programmed in command 11 02 or 11 04 2 294 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Conditions e Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Voice Response System VRS Program 25 Programming Manual 2 295 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Level Description Program Use Program 25 07 System Timers for VRS DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect DID and DISA Refer to the following chart for a description of each option its range and default setting 2 5 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 VRS DISA Dial 0 64800 seconds After answering a DISA trunk the 10 seconds 25 04 Tone Time system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password If the caller fails to dial during this time the system drops the call 02 VRS DISA No An 0 64800 seconds A VRS DISA caller can ring an ex 0 25 04 swer Time tension for this time before the
83. 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 21 06 06 Permit code table PmitTBL 1 None PmitTBL 2 None PmitTBL 3 080 081 PmitTBL 4 110 119 21 06 07 Restriction table TollRes 1 0204 TollRes 2 00 01 0204 100 108 TollRes 3 0 100 18 108 TollRes 4 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment 1 All stations 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 1 All stations 14 02 10 Caller ID 1 Trunks 1 27 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Set to 101 108 IRG1 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code 0 11 01 01 System Numbering 0 for Type 3 Trunk access code 9 for Type 5 operator 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment SMDR DEVICE 5 set to 1 35 01 01 SMDR Output Port Type 1 Port 1 only 35 01 04 SMDR Omit Digits 0 Port 1 only 35 02 09 SMDR Extension Number or Name 1 Port 1 only 35 02 14 SMDR Date 1 Port 1 only 20 02 07 Time and Date Display Mode 5 15 03 03 Terminal Type 1 All stations 21 01 06 Dial pause at first digit 1 Programming Manual 2 565 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 20 13 01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 Class 1 only 20 13 22 Called Party Status 1 Class 1 only 20 09 04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0 Class 1 only 14 02 18 Busy tone detection on talking 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 19 Busy t
84. 10 ms 04 Maximum Break Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 20 100 ms 05 Minimum Make Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 2 10 ms 06 Maximum Make Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 20 100 ms 07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 21 105 ms 08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 200 1000 ms 09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 21 105 ms 10 Minimum Off Hook Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 21 105 ms 11 No Detection Time after Off Hook 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 60 300 ms 12 No Detection Time after Pulse Dial 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 70 350 ms Detection 13 Loop Disconnect Time Reversal 1 255 10 ms 2550 ms 60 600 ms Time 14 Ring Message Wait Period Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 150 750 ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 479 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 05 ISDN PRI Layer2 S Point Initial Data Setup Level MF Program Description Use Program 82 05 ISDN PRI Layer2 S Point Initial Data Setup to set the basic data for the 8 2 Layer 2 of ISDN PRI S Point Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Timer T200 1 255 100 25500 ms 10 1 sec 02 Timer T201 1 255 100 25500 ms 10 1 sec 03 Timer T202 1 255 100 25500 ms 20 2 sec 04 Timer T203 1 255 100 25500 ms 30 3 sec 05 N200 1 255 3 06 N201 1 65535 Byte 260 07 N202 1
85. 11 02 gt lt Program 11 04 gt However the extension number of the first port is not deleted Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Extension Number Delete Yes 1 Dial 1 Hold key Only press Hold key is canceled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 612 Program 92 Copy Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 92 Copy Program 92 03 Copy Program by Port Number Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 92 03 Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside line Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data Description 01 Source Number For Trunk Base Trunk Port Number Enter the port number from where 001 084 the data is to be copied D For Trunk Group Base Trunk Group 02 Destination Number From Number 01 25 Enter the first port number to For Extension Number 001 128 Where the information is to be V3 5 Changed copied 03 Destination Number To Including Virtual Extension 01 178 Enter the last port number to V3 5 Changed where the information is to be For Department Group Base De copied If the information is to be partment Group Number 01 32 copied only to one port enter the For DSS DSS Console Number 01 information entered in the Desti 1
86. 13 05 1 1 Intercom Outgoing Mode Follow the sys tem routing for the trunk access code en tered 02 Private Speed Di 0 Do not use Define use additional 20 Private 1 13 06 al 1 Use speed dial bin beside 1000 Com mon speed dial bin or not 03 Number of Com 0 1000 Assign the number of Speed Dial 900 13 04 mon Speed Dial 0 No Common Speed bins that are used for System Speed ing Bins Dialing No System Dials Speed Dial 04 Trunk Access 0 Trunk Group 0 PRG13 05 defines a trunk group 0 Routing V3 0 1 Trunk Route in PRG14 05 to select a trunk from Added 1 PRG13 05 refers to a trunk ac cess route in PRG14 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial 2 100 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 02 Group Speed Dialing Bins Level IN Description Use Program 13 02 Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by Program 13 each Speed Dialing group Refer to 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions on page 2 102 Input Data Speed Dialing Group Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin 0 990 Refer below End Address of Speed Dialing Bin 0 9 999 Default Abbreviated dial group No Start address of ABB Bin End address of ABB Bin 1 0
87. 15 03 S N Ratio 0 4 0 dB 20 dB Refer below 04 No Tone Time 0 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer below 0 not detect 1 255 60 7680 ms The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 05 Pulse Count 1 255 Refer below 06 ON Minimum Time 1 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer below 07 ON Maximum Time 0 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer below 2 456 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default No 08 OFF Minimum Time 1 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer below 09 OFF Maximum Time 0 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer below 12 Frequency No 1 1 8 Refer below Frequency Table No set by 80 07 13 Frequency No 2 0 8 0 Not Used Refer below Frequency Table No set by 80 07 14 Twist Level 0 10 1 dB 10 dB Refer below 0 Not Used Program Default Item Name Type 1 DT Type 2 BT Type 3 RBT Type 4 Type 5 8 0 1 Detect Level 0 25 dBm 0 25 dBm 0 25 dBm 0 0 2 Min detect level 15 25 dBm 15 25 dBm 15 25 dBm 0 0 3 S N ratio 4 20 dB 4 20 dB 4 20 dB 0 0 4 No tone time 132 3990 ms 132 3990 ms 132 3990 ms 0 0 5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0 6 ON min time 9 300 ms 12 390 ms 25 780 ms 0 0 7 ON max time 0 20 630 ms 40 1230 ms 0 0 8 OFF min time 1 60 ms 12 3
88. 15 1 Mode Off on hold by an extension 1 Exclusive Hold On 25 Transfer Park Call 0 Off Turn off or on an extension ability to trans COS 01 15 1 1 0n fer a parked call 26 Station Park Hold 0 Off COS 01 15 0 mode 1 On 27 Call Park Automati 0 Off COS 01 15 1 cally Search 1 On 28 Both Ring Enhance 0 Normal COS 01 15 0 ment 1 Enhanced 30 Disable Call FWD In 0 Off When set to 1 Call FWD setting is not COS 01 15 1 dication on LCD V3 0 1 On shown on the terminal LCD Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service Programming Manual 2 185 Program 20 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service Level IN Description Use Program 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service to define the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service class Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Default No 02 Advice of Charge ISDN AOC 0 Off COS 01 15 0 1 On 03 Cost Display TTU 0 Off COS 01 15 1 1 On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service 2 186 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN Description SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Use Program 20 13 Class of Service Options Supp
89. 19 1 On 08 Call Attendant 0 100 0 11 11 59 Busy Message 0 No Setting 40 10 08 09 Call Attendant 0 100 0 11 11 60 Answer Message 0 No Setting 40 10 09 Programming Manual 2 125 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 10 Extension Num 0 Off when set to Off This program enables disables the 0 ber the system will not ability to send calling party name in send any outbound formation on a per station basis calling party informa tion 1 On when set to ON the system will send calling party informa tion 13 Special ringtone 0 Incoming extension When an incoming call is received 0 15 02 03 choice V2 0 Add ring tone from the extension defined in this ed 1 Tone pattern 1 PRG this item defines the ringtone 2 Tone pattern 2 presented 3 Tone pattern 3 4 Tone pattern 4 5 Tone pattern 5 V3 0 Added 6 Tone pattern 6 V3 0 Added 7 Tone pattern 7 V3 0 Added 8 Tone pattern 8 V3 0 Added 14 SMDR output of 0 Disable When set 0 it will not record the in 0 15 01 49 made intercom 1 Enable ternal calls that been made calls V2 0 Add ed 15 SMDR output of 0 Disable When set 0 it will not record the in 0 15 01 49 answered inter 1 Enable ternal calls that been received com calls V2 0 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 126 Program
90. 2 32 0 dB Special Dial Tone 9 1 32 0 dB 0 1 32 0 dB 9 1 32 0 dB 0 1 32 0 dB 9 77 32 0 dB 4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 2 2 9 1 32 0 dB Transfer Dial Tone 0 1 32 0 dB 5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 1 9 10 32 0 dB 6 Internal Busy Tone 0 2 0 5 20 6 dB Busy Tone 11 5 20 6 dB 7 DND Busy Tone 0 2 0 2 32 0 dB 1 2 32 0 dB 8 B busy Tone 0 2 0 5 20 6 dB 11 5 20 6 dB 9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 2 11 3 20 6 dB Congestion Tone 0 2 20 6 dB 10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 2 11 3 20 6 dB Warning Tone 0 2 20 6 dB 11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 2 0 32 0 dB Confirmation Tone 9 32 0 dB 12 Internal Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 0 dB Programming Manual 2 449 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Serv Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level dB ice Count No Tone No 13 External Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 0 dB 14 Internal Ring back Tone 0 2 10 10 20 6 dB Internal Audible Ring 0 30 20 6 dB Ring Back Tone i N oa 15 Override Tone 1 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 1 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 38 3 dB 26 3 dB 14 9 dB 32 0 dB 38 3 dB 26
91. 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 46 DR700 Server Information Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 46 DR700 Server Information Setup to set up the information of DR700 Server 4 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Register Mode 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Auto When the phone boots up it reports 2 Manual the ext assigned in the phone or chooses the next available exten sion in the system Password is not required Auto If set to Auto the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone These settings must match 84 22 15 05 27 or the phone does not come on line Manual When the phone boots up it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in It checks this user ID password against 84 22 15 05 27 If there is no match the phone does not come online 04 Server Name Up to 32 characters Assign the Server name to be used sipphd in the SIP URL 06 Register Port 0 65535 Assign the port number in which the 5080 SIP messages are sent to on the VoIPDB This same port number must be as signed in the SIP Multiline terminals If this command is changed it re quires a CPU reset 07 Encryption Mode 0 Off 0 1
92. 26 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Group Call Pickup 2 278 Program 23 Answer Features Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 03 Universal Answer Auto Answer Level IN Description Use Program 23 03 Universal Answer Auto Answer to assign trunk routes set in Program 14 06 Program to extensions for Universal Answer If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned route the user can dial the Universal Answer code 0 to pick up the call You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other 2 3 extensions not their own When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 The extension user ringing calls however always have priority over calls ringing other co worker extensions Refer to the Line Preference feature in the SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information Make one entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Route Table 0 25 Use this program to let an extension 0 14 06 Number user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ring ing calls based on T
93. 31 Paging Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 07 Combined Paging Assignments Level IN Description Use Program 31 07 Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group 0 3 to Program an Internal Paging Zone 0 32 for Combined Paging When an extension user makes a Combined Page they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone Use Program 31 04 01 to assign an External Paging Zone 1 3 to an External Page Group 0 3 3 1 Input Data External Paging Group Number 0 3 0 All External Paging Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Internal Paging Group Number 0 32 0 All Internal Paging 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External e Paging Internal Programming Manual 2 329 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 08 BGM on External Paging Level IN Description Program Use Program 31 08 BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External Paging zone If enabled the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle 3 1 Input Data External Speaker Number 1 3 Item ae No Item Input Data Description Default 01 BGM 0 BGM Prevented No Use this option to allow or prevent the Ex 0 1 BGM allowed Yes ternal Paging zone you select from broad casting Background Music when it is idle Conditions None
94. 4 Enter characters G l g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 amp acs B Enter characters x lt gt TLIGOQ E Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right ar row soft key instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Input Data Conversion Table Number 001 800 Programming Manual 2 267 Program 22 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 py Item Input Data Description Default 01 Received Number Maximum eight digits This is the received DID digits No Setting 0 9 x 02 Target Number Maximum 36 digits Enter the destination number to which the No Setting 0 9 x DID number is sent 03 DID Name Maximum 12 characters This is the name that is assigned to the No Setting DID digits when it rings the extension 04 Transfer Operation 0 No Transfer The transfer operation mode allows DID 0 Mode 1 Busy calls to have more routing options than just 2 No Answer the target number If the transfer operation 3 Busy No A
95. 53 Language Selec 0 Disable COS 01 15 0 11 11 68 tion for specific 1 Enable 15 02 01 extension 47 02 16 54 Call waiting for 0 Disable COS 01 15 0 20 13 05 standard SIP ter 1 Enable 20 13 06 minal 20 09 01 20 09 07 55 Intercom Call to 0 Off COS 01 15 1 Room Monitor 1 On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service 2 190 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 14 Class of Service Options for DISA E amp M Level IN Description Use Program 20 14 Class of Service Options for DISA E amp M to enable disable DISA and tie line Program Class of Service options You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25 09 Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34 02 Up to 15 DISA E amp M Classes of Service can be defined Analog trunk to analog trunk and ISDN trunk to ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program However analog trunk to ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk to analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this program Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 First Digit Absorption 0 Off For tie lines enable or disable the ability to COS 01 15 0 Delete First Digit Di 1 On absorb ignore the first incoming digit aled Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit tie line service This op tion does not apply
96. 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 8 10 Department STG All Ring 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 16 01 05 Mode 11 Station Park Hold 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 87 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering 11 17 ACD Group Pilot Number Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 11 17 ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD Group This is the number a user dials to transfer calls to the ACD Group Normally you should use unassigned extension numbers for the master number If you want to use an extension number which by default has a port number assigned first remove the default assignment Input Data ACD Group Number 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 ACD Group Pilot Dial Up to eight digits Assign the ACD Master Number for each No Setting Number ACD Group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 88 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 19 Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup Level IN Description Use Program 11 19 Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be Program used for the Remote Conference This is the number that outside parties will call in order to con
97. ARS Dial Treatments siinse Saa 2 307 260 04 ARS Class Of cst scsi cetceuscheanciiebaciinrss En rene Eia 2 308 26 11 Transit Network ID Table eisissinrcismatsteripimmasiaisissidisiacieaismmiiqnaigies 2 309 26 12 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS 0eeeeeeeeeees 2 310 Program 20 7 DSS DLS Console tp ra accctscstasccatieaniinabbscssaicaaticasandssrorseadaatucgeauat 2 311 30 01 DSS Console Operating Mode esssssssrrsererorrnrrenrnnenrnrrannenenrneeennese 2 311 30 02 DSS Console Extension ASSIQNMent cccccccssesssecccsseceteeeesessiee 2 312 30 03 DSS Console Key Assignimenit cceececeeeenenerteneneneneneneeee 2 313 30 04 DSS Console Alternate ANSWET ssssssssrrrrrsrensrinrrraninnninenndeniesereasennsae 2 318 20 05 DSS Console Lamp Tabl n oinean 2 319 Progam 3i PN Se ineeie aa EEE E 2 321 31 01 System Options for Internal External Paging eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 321 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment wiiciciccsxiasaiisssussssusncsaticcassxvatenzsisice 2 323 31 034 Internal Paging Group Settings sneonen 2 324 31 04 External Paging Zone CS is tassiicissiccicveieiacisiaieinibareisidisisiieigainieiane 2 326 31 05 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page 2 327 21 06 External Speaker Conith scssi E EE 2 328 31 07 Combined Paging Assignments seserrrrrrrurinrenenrnrrnnnrrensueersrresnase 2 329 dUe BGN ON Exiemal Pagi iniasanennrriin aa 2 330 31 1
98. Added 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 25 IRG Number P Pause R Recall Additional Digits when using ISDN func tionality 3 Remote Monitor Dial Up to 8 digits 05 Incoming Ring 0 Normal System When set 1 or 2 at PRG13 04 03 0 13 04 03 Pattern Ring Pattern this program is used to assign a ring 1 4 Tone Pattern 1 pattern for the caller ID routed call 4 5 9 Scale Pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone Pattern 5 8 V3 0 Added 07 VRS Message 0 100 2 If the VRS can not be played it 0 Number will use a Program 13 04 05 Ringing Pattern V1 5 Added 08 Memot1 V1 5 De Maximum 28 digit 2 Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15 02 58 leted or PCPro 09 Memo2 V1 5 De Maximum 28 digit 2 Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15 02 58 leted or PCPro 10 Memo3 V1 5 De Maximum 28 digit 2 Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15 02 58 leted or PCPro 11 Mailbox Number 0 544 2 This setting only works when 0 40 02 Program 13 04 01 Speed Dial and Incoming Trunk Call match V1 5 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial 2 104 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 05 Speed Dial Trunk Group Level SB Description Use Program 13 05 Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each Program Speed Dialing number If this program has an entry o
99. Alarm Tone for long 4 4 14 conversation call 4 Not defined 0 0 0 32 Not defined 0 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 462 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 10 MF Tone Receiver Setup Level MF Description Use Program 80 10 MF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various level and time for MF Tone Receiver Input Data MF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 MF Receiver for Extension 2 MF Receiver for Trunk 3 Reserve 4 Reserve 5 Reserve Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Detect Level 0 0 dBm 25 dBm Refer below 1 5 dBm 30 dBm 2 10 dBm 35 dBm 3 15 dBm 40 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 25 dBm 50 dBm 6 30 dBm 55 dBm 02 Start delay time 0 255 0 25 step 0 ms 64 ms Refer below 03 Min detect level 0 15 Refer below detect level 0 10 dBm 0 25 dBm 15 detect level 1 15 dBm 0 30 dBm 15 detect level 2 20 dBm 0 35 dBm 15 detect level 3 25 dBm 0 40 dBm 15 detect level 4 30 dBm 0 45 dBm 15 detect level 5 35 dBm 0 50 dBm 15 detect level 6 40 dBm 0 55 dBm 15 04 Max detect level 0 15 Refer below detect level 0 0 dBm 0 15 dBm 15 detect level 1 5 dBm 0 20 dBm 15 detect level 2 10 dBm 0 25 dBm 15 detect level 3 15 d
100. Basic Data Setup ccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 224 20 55 Delay Timer Tor Security SONBOl sevice ck ic ee 2 225 Frogram 21 Outgoing Call SO siscicainrsssanantvansiusniciguticieisendidedianaigeereeleesouiaeis 2 226 21 01 System Options for Outgoing Cals sccscccsecscsaveccestecereeserensavesecssesdieneneee 2 226 21 02 Tr nk Group Routing for EXtenSiONnS sssessissisisisirinissisiisisssssisssss 2 229 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks esesesseseeeseeeeerrrrrnressssssssrrrerreeees 2 230 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions cccceccceeeeeeeeeneesneeeneee 2 231 20a he B ci gle to CaS eee ee er ee er en 2 232 21 06 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeees 2 234 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setuf ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 236 21 08 Repeat Dial Ses saisrstssssasariaeisieaisimialianiinneuiandsamaeanannan 2 237 2109 A Ee UN cs cesses E 2 238 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension 2 239 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 2 240 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks 2 241 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions ceeee 2 242 21 14 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 243 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 2 244 21 16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking
101. Call Restriction 11 Change Toll Restric 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 637 tion Class for Other digit Determine what the service code should Extension be for an internal party to change the toll restriction class for another extension 12 Check In 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 638 digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to check in another extension 13 Check Out 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 639 digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to check out anoth er extension 14 Room Status Change 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 640 for Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to change room status on their extension 15 Room Status Change 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 641 for Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to change room status on another extension 16 Room Status Output 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT 642 digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to output the status of hotel rooms via a printer 17 Hotel Room Monitor 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 675 digit Determine what the service code should be for initiating Hotel Room Monitor 19 Hotel Room Data Set 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT No Setting digit MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Condition
102. Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 579 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 35 Wizard Programming Level Setup Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 35 Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard Programming Input Data Wizard Number 1 250 iy Item Input Data Default 01 Maintenance Level 0 All Display Data 0 3 SB System Administrator B Display Data 4 SA System Administrator A Display Data 5 IN Installer Level Display Data 6 MF Manufacture Level Display Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 580 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 36 Firmware Update Time Setting Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 36 Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update feature This data is available to set from the PC Programming FW update feature The following firmware is available to update with this feature e main bin e Dspdbu bin e dsp bin e intradbu bin is not supported Input Data Item Item Input Data Default Description No 01 Firmware Update Sched Read Only 0 Set the time
103. Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten Calling Exten 3 Cycle 3 sion has set Message Waiting sion 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 Programming Manual 2 129 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 36 Message Waiting 1 Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 2 Lamp Cycle for 2 Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten Called Extension 3 Cycle 3 sion has Message Waiting set to the 4 Cycle 4 extension 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 37 Voice Mail Mes 0 Green Select the color of the Large LED 1 sage Wait Lamp 1 Red when a voice mail message is wait Color ing at the extension 38 Voice Mail Mes 1 Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 2 sage Wait Lamp 2 Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten Cycle 3 Cycle 3 sion has a VM Message Waiting set 4 Cycle 4 to the extension 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 40 Additional Dial Up to four digits 0 1 Enter the digits to be dialed in front No Setting for Caller ID Call 9 of the Caller ID when using the Call Return er ID Return function 41 Incoming Ring 0 Speaker Normal 0 11 11 37 Setup Ring 11 11 62 1 Headset Ring 15 02 12 15 02 42 20 13 06 42 Incoming Off 0 Speaker Off Hook 0 11 11 37 Hook Ring Setup Ring 11 11 62 1 Headset Off Hook 15 02 12 Ring 15 02 41 43 Headset Ri
104. Dial 0 SPD Table Program 13 03 1 DID Table Program 22 11 The option sets how the system uses the route data gathered in Item 3 to route incoming ANI DNIS calls If option 2 is selected and the call is to be routed using the DID table 1 up to eight digits can be matched The number of expected digits set in Program 22 09 01 must match the ANI digits defined in Program 22 11 01 For example if an ANI DNIS number received was x2035551234 x3001 and Program 22 09 01 4 the entry in 22 11 01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension If the call is to be routed using the ABB table 0 up to 36 digits can be matched Define the range of the ABB table to be used in Program 34 09 06 The data is compared to the entries in Program 13 04 01 and then routed according to Program 13 04 03 COS 01 0 COS 02 15 0 13 04 22 11 03 34 09 05 05 ANI DNIS Display as Target Dial Name 0 Display Off 1 Display On Use this option to set whether or not ANI data should appear on tele phone displays as part of Caller ID display COS 01 1 COS 02 15 0 13 04 20 09 02 22 11 03 23 09 04 06 Routing SPD Ta ble Setup Start 0 100 900 End 0 99 999 Use this option to define which part of the ABB Table set up in Program 13 04 the system uses for ANI DNIS Caller ID look ups and ANI DNIS routing This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 Caller ID on When you speci
105. Dial Setting 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 619 for Remote In 8 digit Service Code setting for destination spection number when remote inspection de tects no answer 50 Night mode Skip 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 787 Own Group 8 digit MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 72 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Level IN Description Use Program 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation to customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 and 11 12 11 16 The following chart shows The number of each code 01 73 V1 5 or higher e The function of the Service Code e What type of telephones can use the Service Code e The default entry For example users to turn on or turn off Background Music by dialing the number set at item 18 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Call Forward All 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 741 8 digit 02 Call Forward 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 742 Busy 8 digit 03 Call Forward No 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 743 Answer 8 digit 04 Call Forward 0 9 x Maximum of Ter
106. Enabled 1 for the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work 19 Do Not Call Set 0 No service 0 15 01 07 up 1 Extented common restriction 20 Caller ID Call 0 Disable 0 Disable same as before R3 0 21 01 21 back with Home 1 Manual Call Back 1 CID Call Back is manual 21 01 22 Area Code Mode 2 Automatic Call 2 Call Back is automatic based on 21 26 01 V4 0 Added Back the entries of the Home NPA HNPA 21 27 01 Exceptions and Foreign NPA Lo 21 28 01 cals Programming Manual 2 227 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 21 HNPA Exception 0 Toll Sets the exception of HNPA list 0 21 01 20 Type V4 0 Add 1 Local 21 01 22 ed 21 26 01 21 27 01 21 28 01 22 10 Digit Local 0 7 digits without Decide if the local call needs to dial 0 21 01 20 Calls V4 0 Add Area code with Area Code or not 21 01 21 ed 1 10 digits with Area 21 26 01 Code 21 27 01 21 28 01 Program Conditions 2 1 None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Placing 2 228 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14 06 routes to extensions Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight dig
107. Fast Blink Red Setup No answer calls 125msec on 125msec off 125msec on 625msec off Red Setup busy calls Slow Blink Red Setup busy noans calls 80 Tandem Ringing 1 Set On Red Master Side 0 Cancel Exten Slow Blink Slave Side sion Number to Tan dem Ring 81 Automatic Trans Trunk Line No Off Cancel fer to Transfer 001 084 Slow Blink Red Set Key Programming Manual 2 143 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 83 Conversation Re 0 Pause cording Function 1 Re recording VMSU 2 Address 3 Erase 4 Urgent Page 84 Drop Key None 86 Private Call Re None Off Cancel fuse Slow Blink Red Set 87 Caller ID Refuse None Off Cancel Slow Blink Red Set 88 Dial In Mode Program 22 17 Ta Off Pattern 1 Pattern 5 8 Switching ble No On Red Pattern 2 1 500 Slow Blink Red Pattern 3 125msec on 125msec off 125msec on 625msec off Red Pattern 4 91 Live Recording Slow Blink Green Set Key 94 Call Attendant Fast Blink Red Setup No answer calls 125 ms On 125 ms Off 125 ms On 625 ms Off Red Setup Busy calls On Red Setup Busy No answer calls 97 Door Box Access Door Box Number On Red Doorphone Busy Key 1 6 Off Doorphone Idle Fast Blink Red Doorphone Incoming 02
108. Frequency 2 3 80 07 01 Busy Tone Frequency table 2 48 table 3 62 81 01 09 Signal Stop Dtct 80 81 01 14 Flash Hooking 1 20 81 01 15 Flash Hooking 2 30 81 07 01 CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Ports 0 Trunks 1 27 82 04 04 Max Break TM 14 82 04 07 Min Flash TM 17 82 04 08 Max Flash TM 120 Hong Kong Program No Name Default 14 01 13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 02 Ring Detect Type 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 04 Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect 0 Trunks 1 27 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 10 Caller ID 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 1 Trunks 1 27 14 02 19 Busy Tone Detention Frequency 3 Trunks 1 27 14 02 20 Busy Tone Detention Interval 10 Trunks 1 27 20 02 12 Forced Intercom Ringing 1 20 03 03 SLT DTMF Dial 1 20 03 04 Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT 1 20 07 01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1 Class 1 only Programming Manual 2 569 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 20 13 01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 Class 1 only 20 13 22 Called Party Status 1 Class 1 only 20 17 01 Operator Extension Number 101 20 19 02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0 21 01 06 Dial pause at first digit of dialing 1 22 01 11 VRS Waiting Message Interval Time 10 24 02 03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 15 Program 31 02 0
109. Hotline Exten 0 Off Turns off or on Ringdown Extension COS 01 15 1 sion Ringdown 1 On for extensions with this COS 10 Signal Voice Call 0 Off Turns off or on an extension allow COS 01 15 1 1 On ing it to force Handsfree Answer back or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 11 Protect for the 0 Off Internal Call COS 01 15 0 Call Mode 1 On Switching from Caller 12 Department 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 15 1 Group Step Call 1 On Department Group Step Calling ing 2 178 Program 20 System Option Setup IN Description Use Program 20 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service to define the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 13 ISDN CLIP 0 Off when set to Off Determines if the ISDN calling line COS 01 15 0 10 03 05 the system will not identity presentation and screening 15 01 04 send any outbound indicators are allowed calling party informa tion 1 On when set to ON the system will send calling party informa tion for the station or trunk 14 Call Address In 0 Off COS 01 15 0 formation 1 On 15 Block Outgoing 0 Off Turns off or on the system ability to COS 01 15 0 14 01 20
110. Hz External Incoming Signal High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Frequency Pattern 2 Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz External Incoming Signal High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Frequency Pattern 3 Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz Program External Incoming Signal High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Frequency Pattern 4 Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz Internal Incoming Signal Fre High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz quency Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 132 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Description Use Program 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line telephone options Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 SLT Signaling 0 DP Use this option to tell the system the 1 15 03 03 Type 1 DTMF type of dialing the connected tele 45 01 01 phone uses For Analog Wireless telephones to function correctly this must be set to 0 dial pulse If this option is set for DTMF after an outside call is placed the system cannot dial any additional digits This program change is automatical ly performed when the Analog Wire less telephone is registered When
111. ID Setup for IP Trunk Level IN Description Use Program 14 11 ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk This program refers to Program incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call This program is used only for H 323 Input Data 1 4 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 IP Trunk ID 0 65535 0 0 No Setting Conditions e This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call or IP trunk incoming call e This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call e It is not notified when ID is 0 e Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 123 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 12 SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk Level IN Description Use Program 14 12 SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Register ID 0 31 0 02 Pilot Register ID 0 31 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 124 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Description Use Program 15 01 Basic Extension Data Setup to define the bas
112. Manual 2 505 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 16 VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 84 16 VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the Limiter Control Gain configuration of VoIPDB 84 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 RX Limiter Control 0 30 15dBm 15 Gain setting to control limiter in the direc 15 0 dBm Gain dBm tion of IP gt PCM 15dBm This option adds gain to the voice input 1 14 dBm from the LAN and removes it from the voice output to highway 15 0dBm 29 14 dBm 30 15 dBm 02 TX Limiter Control 0 30 15dBm 15 Gain setting to control limiter in the direc 15 0 dBm Gain dBm tion of PCM gt IP 0 15dBm This option adds the gain to the voice input 1 14dBm from highway and removes it from the i voice output to the LAN 15 0 dBm 29 14 dBm 30 15 dBm 03 RX Limiter Control 0 30 15 dBm 15 This option controls the limiter gain for a 15 0 dBm Gain COIU dBm COIU call in the IP to PCM direction 15 dBm 1 14 dBm 15 0 dBm 29 14 dBm 30 15 dBm 04 TX Limiter Control 0 30 15 dBm 15 This option controls the limiter gain for a 15 0 dBm Gain COIU dBm COIU call in the PCM to IP direction 0 15 dBm 1 14 dBm 15 0 dBm 29 14 dBm 30 15 dBm Conditions None 2 506 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 S
113. No 01 Number of Calls in 0 84 Set the number of calls that can accumu 0 Queue 0 No Display late in the ACD queue before the Queue Status Display and optional queue alarm occurs 02 Queue Status Display 0 64800 seconds Set the time the Queue Status display re 5 seconds Time mains on the telephone display 03 Queue Status Display 0 64800 seconds Determine whether or not an incoming call 60 seconds Interval to a trunk ring group should follow a priori ty assignment Set the time that refreshes the Queue Status Alarm time in queue dis play and causes the optional queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call logged out or in wrap up 04 ACD Call Waiting 0 Disable Off Enable Disable the queue alarm 0 Alarm 1 Enable On 05 ACD Call Waiting 0 64800 seconds Set the time the Call Waiting Alarm should 0 Alarm Hold Time sound Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 380 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 01 System Options for Hotel Motel Level IN Description Use Program 42 01 System Options for Hotel Motel to assign the system options for Hotel Motel Service Input Data 42 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Answering Message 0 MOH Hold Time 0 Mode for Wake Up 1 VAU Message Call Hotel Mode 2 VAU Message Time 02 Wake Up Call Mes 0 100 VAU Mess
114. None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Station Selection DSS Console e Hotel Motel Programming Manual 2 311 Program 30 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 02 DSS Console Extension Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 30 02 DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Consoles connected e Up to 12 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up A single extension can have up to four 60 button DSS Consoles 12 is the maximum allowed per system When programming each extension DSS Console s combination is called a Console Number There are 12 Console Numbers 01 12 Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions When entering data the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first Input Data 60 button DSS Console Number 01 12 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Extension Number Up to eight digits The extension number for the multiline ter No Setting minal connected with the DSS console Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Station Selection DSS Console 2 312 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 03 DSS Console Key Assignment Level SA Description Use Program 30 03 DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60 button DSS Consoles A DSS Console key can have any function with up to
115. None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Paging External Programming Manual 2 327 Program 31 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 06 External Speaker Control Level Description Use Program 31 06 External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an amplifier Input Data External Speaker Number 1 3 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Broadcast Splash 0 No Tone None Use this option to enable or disable splash 2 Tone Before Paging 1 Splash Tone tone before Paging over an external zone Paging Start Tone 2 Chime Tone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging an nouncement 02 Broadcast Splash 0 No Tone None Use this option to enable or disable splash 2 Tone After Paging 1 Splash Tone tone after Paging over an external zone If Paging End Time 2 Chime Tone enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging an nouncement 03 Speech Path 0 Both Way Duplex Determine if the external speaker will be 1 1 One Way Simplex used for talkback As this option is not available with the CPU external page zone speaker 9 should be left at 1 04 CODEC Transmit 1 63 15 5 15 5 32 Gain Setup dB 05 CODEC Receive Gain 1 63 15 5 15 5 32 Setup dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External 2 328 Program
116. None Programming Manual 2 233 Program 21 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 06 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Level IN Description Use Program 21 06 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data Dial 1 9 0 x can be entered in each table Input Data Item Item Table Input Data Default No 01 International Call Restriction Table caption table Dial Up to four Tables 1 10 No Set This option lets you program the Restrict Ta ble for international calls The system has 10 International Call Restrict Tables Each entry can have up to four digits 1 10 digits ting 02 International Call Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Ta ble for international calls The system has 20 International Call Permit Tables Each entry can have up to six digits caption table 1 20 Dial Up to six dig its Tables 1 20 No Set ting 03 Maximum Number Digits Table Assign ment This option selects the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each ta caption table 1 4 Tables 1 4 30 This table contains up to 10 codes you com monly prevent users from dialing ble 04 Common Permit Code Table caption table Dial Up to four Table 1 911 This option lets you program the Common 1 10 digits Table 2 1800 Permit Code Table Table 3 1888 This table
117. None Programming Manual 2 275 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 18 Private Call Assignment Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 22 18 Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern for Private Calls 2 2 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Transfer Mode 0 Not Defined Pri Leave this program set to 0 Not 0 14 01 27 vate call will not trans Defined to route the Private caller to 15 02 02 fer to a user in the sys a VRS message to refuse the call 40 10 06 tem can be routed to This program can also be used to VRS message in PRG route the Private caller to an internal 40 10 06 destination PRG 22 18 02 or a 1 Internal Dial Speci Ring Group PRG 22 04 fied in PRG 22 18 02 2 Incoming Ring Group Specified in PRG 22 04 02 Destination Num 1 Internal Dial up to No Setting 14 01 27 ber 36 digits 15 02 02 0 9 P R 40 10 06 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 25 03 Incoming Ring Incoming Ring Pattern 0 14 01 27 Pattern 0 13 V3 0 15 02 02 Changed 40 10 06 0 Normal pattern 1 4 Tone pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone pattern 5 8 V3 0 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 276 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Se
118. Off Use this option to select between 1 Preference for 1 Ringing On Idle and Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls trunk calls 11 Callback Auto 0 Off Use this option to enable or disable 1 matic Answer 1 On automatic answer of calls recalling to a station For example if a Trans fer Recall or Hold Recall is ringing back to a station the following hap pens If Program 15 02 11 is enabled the station will automatically answer the recall when it goes off hook If Pro gram 15 02 11 is disabled a station does not automatically answer the recall when it goes off hook The user must first press the line ap pearance of the recalling call or press the answer key 12 Off Hook Ringing 0 Muted Off Hook Use this option to set the telephone 5 Ringing Off hook signaling Off hook signal 1 No Off Hook Ring ing occurs when a telephone user ing receives a second call while busy on 3 Beep in Speaker a handset call To enable disable SP Off hook signaling for an extension 4 Beep in Handset Class of Service use Program HS 20 13 06 5 Speaker and Hand set Beep 13 Redial List Mode 0 ICM Trunk Exten Select whether the Redial List fea 0 sion Trunk Mode ture should store internal and exter 1 Trunk Mode nal numbers 0 or only external numbers 1 15 Storage of Call 0 Disable Off 1 er ID for an 1 Enable On swered call 16 Handsfree Oper 0 Disable Off Enable or disable an extension abili 1 ati
119. On 08 Encryption Type Read Only 0 0 Mode 1 09 One Time Pass Up to 10 characters 0 No Setting 10 46 07 word 9 10 Start Port 1 128 V3 5 1 10 46 01 Changed 11 Multicast IP Ad 224 0 0 0 This sets the Multicast IP address 224 0 0 10 dress 239 255 255 255 so that two or more main devices don t overlap on the same network or if Multicast is used by other IP services 12 Multicast Port 0 65535 30000 2 42 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 13 Subscribe Ses 0 65535 5081 sion Port 14 NAT Mode 0 Off When the system controls the SIP 0 1 On multiline terminal via the NAT router this system data is set to On Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 1 0 None Programming Manual 2 43 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 47 Terminal License Server Information Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 47 Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of Terminal License Server 1 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Register Port of TCP 0 65535 This set the register port number of TCP 6080 VF I F 02 TCP Keep Alive Time 1 255 seconds This set the TCP keep alive time 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference
120. On COS15 0 1 33 Caller ID Check 0 Off This program sets the Caller ID COS 1 5 0 ing V4 0 Added 1 On Checking Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service Programming Manual 2 177 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Level Program 0 Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Intercom Calls 0 Off Turns off or on Intercom calling for COS 01 15 1 1 On the extension 02 Trunk Outgoing 0 Off Turns off or on outgoing trunk call COS 01 15 1 Calls 1 On ing for the extension 03 System Speed 0 Off Deny Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 1 Dialing 1 On to make outbound calls using sys tem speed dial numbers 04 Group Speed Di 0 Off Deny Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 1 aling 1 On to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers 05 Dial Number Pre 0 Off Turns off or on an extension for us COS 01 15 1 view Preset Dial 1 On ing Dial Number Preview 06 Toll Restriction 0 Off Turns off or on Toll Restricting Over COS 01 15 0 21 01 07 Override 1 On ride Service Code 663 21 07 07 Repeat Redial 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 15 1 1 On Repeat Redial 08 Toll Restriction 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 15 1 Dial Block 1 On Dial Block 09
121. Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports For PRI T1 PKG Setup Physical Port Number 01 24 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 01 Logical Port Number 1 84 The start port number of a T1 line is displayed and 24 logic ports are auto matically assigned to a DTI T1 line 02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 D4 12 Multi Frame 1 ESF 24 Multi Frame 03 Zero Code Suppression 0 B8ZS 1 AMI ZCS 04 Line Length Selection 0 0 feet 133 feet 1 133 feet 266 feet 2 266 feet 399 feet 3 399 feet 533 feet 4 533 feet 655 feet 05 T1 Clock Source 0 Internal 1 External Programming Manual Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 06 Number of Ports 0 Auto 0 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports For VoIPDB PKG Setup Program Physical Port Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 1 0 01 Trunk Logical Port Number 1 84 0 02 Trunk Type 1 SIP 1 Conditions e When changing a defined terminal type first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or redefine the type manually e The system must have a unit installed to view change the options for that type of unit Feature Cross Reference No
122. Program 01 Restriction Class 1 15 Toll Class 1 15 2 14 01 08 21 05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 231 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 05 Toll Restriction Class Level Description Program Use Program 21 05 Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes 1 15 2 4 Input Data Toll Restriction Class Number 1 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 International Call 0 Unassign No inter This option assigns unassigns the Class No1 6 21 06 01 Restriction Table national restrict table International Call Restrict Table for 15 0 applied the Toll Restriction Class you are Class No2 5 1 1 Assign Table in programming Enter International PRG 21 06 01 is ap Call Restrict Table data in Program plied 21 06 01 02 International Call 0 Unassign No inter This option assigns unassigns the Class No1 3 21 06 02 Permit Code Ta national permit table International Call Permit Table for 15 0 ble applied the Toll Restriction Class you are Class No2 1 1 Assign Table in programming Enter International PRG 21 06 02 is ap Call Permit Table data in Program plied 21 06 02 04 Maximum Num 0 No Table Applied Select the table defined in Class No1 2 6 21 06 03 ber of Digits Ta 1 4 Tables1 4 21 06 03 to be used to determine 15 0 ble Assignment Defined in PRG the maximum number of digits
123. Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 14 ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups When you set an option for an ACD Group the setting is in force if applicable for all agents in the group The chart below shows each of the ACD options the entries available and the default entry Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 Automatic Wrap Up 0 After wrap up the Enable Disable Automatic Wrap Up mode 0 Mode mode key is pressed Manual 1 After call is finished automatically Auto 03 ACD Priority for Over 0 Own group priority Determines whether the ACD group 0 flow Calls 1 Priority order by Pro should use its own priority assignment or if gram 41 03 03 it should follow the priority assigned in Pro gram 41 03 03 04 Automatic Answer at 0 Off Enable 1 Disable 0 Automatic Answer 0 Headset 1 0n for agents using headsets 06 Call Queuing after 0 Enable Yes Determine whether the caller should hear 0 2nd Announcement 1 Disable No the 2nd Delay Announcement and then be taken out of queue 1 or be placed back into queue 0 07 Automatic Off Duty 0 No change to Off Enable 1 Disable 0 Automatic Off Duty 0 for SLT Duty mode rest mode for agents with single line tele 1 Change to Off Duty phones mode automatically Skip 08 ACD Off Duty Mode 0 Cannot receive inter
124. Ring Tone Setup eeeeeseeeeeees 2 147 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignmenit 2 cccceseseeseeeenereeeeeees 2 149 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 00 6 2 150 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 2 151 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions 06 2 152 Tota eR aaa cg acm es ee ej ete 2 153 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys 1 cccccnciecenneeeeseeeneeeeeeenenee 2 154 15 16 SIP Register ID Setup for Extension 2 ccccccreceesesseeeseereeeeeeees 2 155 15 17 CO Message Waiting ING ANON sci siciisiiviccsssisinoisemiiniaaienareidueusiane 2 156 15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 2 157 15 22 Mobile Extension SglUP crsa R a 2 159 15 24 Registration of Standard SIP Terminal cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 2 160 15 28 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup cceeeeeeeeees 2 161 Program 16 Department Group Setup cece ccecccceccceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenaes 2 162 16 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup ccccccccceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 2 162 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions eeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 164 16 03 Secondary Department Group icniusiccsscisisessersascsssrsveervesvsversivernies 2 165 16 04 Call Restriction Between Department GroupS cecceeeeeeeeeees 2 166 Pr
125. SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension Level SB Description Use Program 21 20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension to set the SIP Trunk Call Discernment Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Discernment Tone 0 Off 1 1 On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 248 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting Level IN Description Program Use Program 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting to define the toll restriction class to each trunk The details of toll restriction are defined by Programs 21 05 and 21 06 This program is compared to Station Restriction Class The higher class is applied 2 1 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 9 9 Power Failure mode Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Restriction Class 1 15 Toll Class 1 Per Day Night Mode assign a toll re 1 14 01 08 15 striction class to each trunk 21 05 It is recommended to not use class 2 because by default all stations are assigned in class 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 249 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indi
126. Setting Read Only No Setting 11 11 08 1 DND External Indicates DND setting status per ex 2 DND intercom tension 3 DND Transfer 4 DNDAIll 08 Message Waiting Extension Number Up Read Only No Setting 11 11 09 Set to 8 digits Indicates extension number which you set Message Waiting 09 Message Waiting Extension Number Up Read Only No Setting 11 11 09 Rec to 8 digits Indicates extension number when left Message Waiting Programming Manual 2 621 Program 93 Program 93 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 10 Alarm Clock 1 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 12 1 Enable Indicates Alarm Clock 1 setting sta tus 11 Preset time at Time set in Alarm Read Only No Setting 11 11 12 Alarm 1 Clock 1 Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock the When PRG93 03 11 is o 00 00 is indicated 12 Alarm Clock 2 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 12 1 Enable Indicates Alarm Clock 2 setting sta tus 13 Preset Time at Time set in Alarm Read Only No Setting 11 11 12 Alarm 2 Clock 2 Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock 2 When PRG93 03 11 is 0 00 00 is indicated 14 Forced Intercom 0 Disable Voice1 Read Only No Setting 11 11 15 Ring ICM Call 1 Enable Signal Indicates ICM Call Type per exten 11 11 16 Type sion 15 BGM 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 18 1 Enable Indicates
127. Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 08 Night Mode Service Range Level SA Description Use Program 12 08 Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each Program Day Night Mode Input Data 1 2 Night Mode Service Group Number 01 04 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Range 2 8 When a Night Mode Key PRG 15 07 key 2 09 is assigned as a toggle key PRG 20 01 17 this data determines how many night modes a user toggles through when the Night Mode key is pressed Each press of the Night Mode key toggles to the next mode Example When Program 12 08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed the following modes are switched e Press once Night e Press twice Mid night e Press third Day Default 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 99 Program 13 SL1100 Level IN ISSUE 4 0 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 01 Speed Dialing Option Setup Description Use Program 13 01 Speed Dialing Option Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Speed Dialing 0 Trunk Outgoing Set where the Speed Dial bins will 0 13 05 Auto Outgoing Mode Use trunk group use Trunk Routing 0 or dial the bin Call Mode assigned in PRG as though it is an Intercom number
128. Setup for Multi Line Telephone 2 610 Program 92 Copy Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Department Base Program No Program Name 16 01 Department Extension Group Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Group Name Item 01 35 04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group DSS Console Base Program No Program Name 30 01 DSS Console Operation Mode Program 30 03 DSS Key Assignment Door Box Base 9 2 Program No Program Name 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignment Conditions Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal displays as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommend to either clear these non existent keys or copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer numbers of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 611 Program 92 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 92 Copy Program 92 02 Delete All Extension Numbers Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 92 02 Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers lt Program
129. Signal Voice Call 0 Off Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 15 1 11 11 15 1 On enable Handsfree Answerback or 11 11 16 Forced Intercom Ringing for their in coming Intercom calls 06 Incoming Time 0 Off COS 01 15 0 Display 1 On 07 Call Queuing 0 Off Calls are not Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 queued have calls queued if a call rings the 1 On Calls are extension when it is busy queued 09 Deny Collect Call 0 Off COS 01 15 0 Receiving 1 On 13 DND Active 0 Immediate When set to 0 and if set DND dur COS 01 15 0 While Ringing 1 Next call ing an incoming call the call for the V3 0 Added terminal stops immediately When set to 1 and if set DND dur ing an incoming call the call for the terminal continues ringing and set for the next call 2 180 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service Programming Manual SL1100 2 181 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 10 Class of Service Options Answer Service Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 10 Class of Service Options Answer Service to define the answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS 2 0 Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 G
130. Ta 1st 2nd ble Area Start Table End Table Start Table End Table 1 1 200 0 o 2 201 400 0 o 3 401 600 0 o 4 601 800 0 o 5 0 0 0 o 20 0 0 o 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 266 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 11 DID Translation Number Conversion Level SA Description Use Program 22 11 DID Translation Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry 800 e The digits received by the system eight maximum e The extension the system dials after translation 36 digits maximum The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings 12 characters maximum The Transfer Target 1 and 2 If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination Program 22 10 e Operation Mode Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names Press the key once for the first character twice for the second character etc For example to enter a C press 2 three times Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can have up to 12 digits Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 1 gt lt AAAAAAGEEio0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3
131. The IP Address should be the IP Address of the peer CPU Program 10 12 09 02 Call Procedure Port 1 65535 The Port Number should be set with the 1730 same value as the H 225 setup port in Pro gram 84 02 33 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 28 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup Description 10 28 SIP System Information Setup Use Program 10 28 SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP URL No Setting ex UserID Host Name DomainName 02 Host Name Up to 48 Characters Set the host name of the SIP URL No Setting ex UserID Host Name DomainName 03 Transport Protocol 0 UDP Set the protocol for the connection 0 1 TCP 04 UserID Up to 32 Characters User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message No Setting When assigning the Use it for outbound caller ID information if User ID the ID may con no information is assigned in commands tain only alpha charac 21 17 21 19 15 16 14 12 and 10 36 A ters A space and or call cannot be completed across the span special characters are if there is no outbound CID info The rea not allowed in the User son for this is the from and display portion ID field of the invite message would be blank and
132. This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 52 System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All 1 Yes 02 Save New Alarm Reports Print New 1 Yes Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 594 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 53 System Alarm Clear Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 53 System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear 1 Yes Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 595 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 54 PC Web Programming Level Description Program Use Program 90 54 PC Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Web Pro TCP port 1 65535 The port number of TCP of the Web pro 80 number gramming is set The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro to the logout of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the
133. Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 10 80 ms E amp M 15 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 10 80 ms OPX 16 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 50 5000 ms Time Loop 17 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 50 5000 ms Time Ground 18 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 50 5000 ms Time DID 19 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 50 5000 ms Time E amp M 2 472 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default No 20 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 50 5000 ms Time OPX 21 Loop Current Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 40 160 ms Loop 22 Loop Current Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 40 160 ms Ground 23 Loop Current Detection Time DID 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 40 160 ms 24 Loop Current Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 40 160 ms E amp M 25 Loop Current Detection Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 40 160 ms OPX 26 DP Break Send Time ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 15 60 ms 27 DP Make Send Time ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 10 40 ms 28 DP InterDigit Send Time ALL 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 7 700 ms 29 HookFlash Send Time Loop 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms
134. Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone 5 04 Redial Speed Di 0 Common Abbrevi Use this option to control the func 0 al Control ated Dial tion of the extension Redial key 1 Group Speed Dial when used with Speed Dialing The ing Redial key can access either the Common Individual or Group Speed Dialing numbers Programming Manual 2 127 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 05 Transfer Key Op 0 Transfer Use this option to set the operating 0 eration Mode 1 Call back mode of the extension Transfer key 2 Hook The keys can be for Call Transfer Serial Calling or Flash When select ing the Flash option selection 2 refer also to Program 81 01 14 06 Hold Key Operat 0 Normal Common Use this option to set the function of 0 ing Mode 1 Exclusive Hold the Multiline Hold key The Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclu sive Hold 07 Automatic Hold 0 Hold When talking on a CO call and an 1 for CO Lines 1 Disconnect Cut other CO line key is pressed the original trunk is placed on Hold 0 or Disconnected 1 08 Automatic 0 Preselect Use this option to set whether 1 Handsfree 1 One Touch Auto pressing a key access a One Touch matic Handsfree Key or if it preselects the key 09 Auto answer to 0 Off 1 incoming call 1 On from Extension 10 Ringing Line 0 Idle
135. Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program 15 Use Program 15 28 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup to define the ringing tone for each trunk port of extension Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Trunk port number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Incoming 0 Trunk incoming ring Assign individual ring tones at ex 0 22 03 Ring Tone tone tension for each trunk and each 15 02 02 1 High Night mode 2 Middle When 0 Trunk incoming ring tone 3 Low is selected it follows the setting of 4 Melody 1 Program 15 02 02 5 Melody 2 6 Melody 3 7 Melody 4 8 Melody 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 161 Program 16 SL1100 Level IN ISSUE 4 0 Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Description Use Program 16 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group There are 32 available Department Groups Input Data Department Group Number 1 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Department Maximum 12 charac This program is used to assign a No Setting 11 07 Name ters name to the depa
136. Up to six digits No Setting 09 Calling party Name Maximum of 12 digits 0 When a name is programmed in this pro No Setting for ISDN Trunk 9 gram this will be the name sent out for all callers that have PRG 15 01 10 enabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Caller ID Programming Manual 2 199 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 20 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 20 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data to define the messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE 02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA 03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Caller ID 2 200 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 21 System Options for Long Conversation Level IN Description Use Program 20 21 System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the Long Conversation feature Program Input Data 2 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds The warning tone for long tol
137. Update MW Lamp Use this option to enable or disable Mes sage Waiting lamping at the extension as sociated with the Subscriber mailbox For Subscriber Mailboxes you should leave this option enabled For Guest Mailboxes you should leave this option disabled 09 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Auto ATT DND Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb When a sub scriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox hears the greeting and is asked to leave a message A subscriber can also enable Auto Attend ant Do Not Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting 2 412 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 10 Forced Unscreened 0 No Disabled Forced UTRF 0 Transfer 1 Yes Enabled Use this option to enable or disable Auto mated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox If ena bled each Screened Transfer TRF to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer UTRF If disabled Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally 11 Auto Time Stamp 0 No Disabled Use this option to enable or disable Auto 0 1 Yes Enabled Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox If ena bled after the subscriber listens to a mes
138. Use this option to set the Answer Ta Category 1 Mailbox No should Answer Ta ble Default Mailbox number InMail be 1 128 V3 5 Changed re ble2 8 uses the Default Mailbox when an An fer to lt 47 02 InMail Station No setting swer Schedule is not in effect By de Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt fault this occurs at all times other Category 2 Mailbox No should than Monday through Friday from be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 In 8 30 AM to 5 00 PM Mail Group Mailbox Options on page 2 415 gt Category 3 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 In Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2 420 gt 04 Next Answer Table Answer Table 0 16 V3 0 0 When 10 Answer Schedules in an An Changed swer Table are not sufficient use this 0 Undefined option to link two Answer Tables to gether InMail treats the two linked ta bles as a single 20 entry Answer Ta ble Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 430 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 12 InMail Answer Schedules Level IN Description Use Program 47 12 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the InMail Automated Attendant Answer Program 47 Schedules There are 16 V3 5 or higher Answer Tables with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table Input Data Answer Table Number 1 16 V3 0 Changed Schedule Entry Number 1 10 Programming Manual 2 43
139. additional Service Codes in Programs 11 11 11 16 The following chart shows e The number of each code 01 50 e The function of the Service Code The type of telephones that can use the Service Code The default entry For example dialing item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Night Mode 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 718 12 xx Switching 8 digit 20 07 01 03 Setting the Sys 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 728 tem Time 8 digit 04 Storing Common 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 753 Speed Dialing 8 digit Numbers 05 Storing Group 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 754 Speed Dialing 8 digit Numbers 06 Setting the Auto 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 733 24 04 01 matic Transfer 8 digit for Each Trunk Line 07 Canceling the 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 734 24 04 01 Automatic Trans 8 digit fer for Each Trunk Line 08 Setting the Desti 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 735 24 04 01 nation for Auto 8 digit matic Trunk Transfer 09 Charging Cost 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting Display by the 8 digit Supervisor 11 Entry Credit for 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting Toll Restriction 8 digit 12 Night Mode 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 618 12 xx Switching for 8 digit 20 07 01 Other Group 2 70 Program 11 S
140. can be in only one Internal Pag ing Group 02 Internal All Call Pag 0 Off Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for 0 ing Receiving 1 On each extension If allowed extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If prevented extensions can only make not receive All Call Inter nal Paging announcements If combined Paging zones should be restricted as well change the internal page zone group in Program 31 07 01 to 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Paging Internal Programming Manual 2 323 Program 31 Program 31 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 03 Internal Paging Group Settings Level IN Description Use Program 31 03 Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging The system shows the names you program on the telephone display Use the following chart when entering and editing text When using the keypad digits press the key once for the first character twice for the second character etc For example to enter a C press 2 three times Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can have up to 12 digits Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter char
141. contains up to 10 codes you com Table 4 1822 monly allow users to dial Table 5 1833 Table 6 1844 Table 7 1855 Table 8 1866 Table 9 1877 Table 10 No Setting 05 Common Restriction Table caption table Dial Up to 12 dig Table 1 900 This option lets you program the Common 1 10 its Table 2 1900 Restrict Code Table Table 3 976 Tables 4 10 No set ting 06 Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Code Tables If the system has Toll Restriction enabled users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table 21 06 04 There are four Permit Code Tables with up to 200 entries in each table The system permits calls exactly as you en ter the code caption table 1 4 table 001 200 Entry Dial Up to 12 dig its Tables 1 4 No Setting 2 234 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Table Input Data Default No 07 Deny Restriction Table caption table Dial Up to 12 dig Tables 1 4 No Setting This option lets you program the Restrict 1 4 table its Code Tables 1 60 Entry If the system has Toll Restriction enabled users cannot dial numbers listed in these ta bles There are four Restrict Code Tables with up to 60 entries in each table The system restricts calls exactly as you en ter the code 08 PBX Access Code caption table Dial Up
142. dB Level for Confer 15 5dB 15 5dB_ gain type used by the trunk when it ence and Trans in 0 5 dB intervals is part of an Unsupervised Confer fer Calls ence 05 Receive Gain 1 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 16 8 dB Level for Confer 15 5dB 15 5dB_ gain type used by the trunk when it ence and Trans in 0 5 dB intervals is part of an Unsupervised Confer fer Calls ence 06 SMDR Printout 0 No trunk will not be This option can include exclude 1 reported in the SMDR trunks from being reported in the print out SMDR printout 1 Yes trunk will be If a trunk is set to No Print Out set reported in the SMDR ting data of 0 any calls made or re print out ceived on this line will not be repor ted in the SMDR printout 07 Outgoing Calls 0 Deny No Use this option to allow prevent out 1 1 Allow Yes going calls on the trunk you are pro gramming 08 Toll Restriction 0 Restriction Disa Use this option to enable disabled 1 21 04 bled Toll restriction will Toll Restriction for the trunk If ena 21 05 not be applied to calls bled the trunk follows Toll Restric 21 06 on this trunk tion programming example Pro 1 Restriction Enabled grams 21 05 21 06 If disabled the Toll restriction will be trunk is a toll free line applied to calls on this trunk 2 108 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item It
143. determines if the DNS server 0 1 On is used 09 DNS Server IP Ad 0 0 0 0 If 10 29 08 is 1 this is effective This sets 0 0 0 0 dress 126 255 255 254 the IP address of the DNS server 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 10 DNS Port Number 0 65535 If 10 29 08 is 1 this is effective This sets 53 the port number of the DNS server 11 Registrar Domain Up to 128 Characters This sets the domain name of the registra No Setting Name tion server Programming Manual 2 31 Program 10 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 12 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters This specifies the domain name of the SIP No Setting server 13 Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters This specifies the host name of the SIP No Setting server 14 SIP Carrier Choice 0 26 This selects the carrier type of the SIP 0 V1 5 Changed 1 Carrier A server 2 Carrier B When Carrier A B or C is selected in PRG10 29 14 PRG10 29 16 Register Sub 7 Carrier G Mode is set On automatically 8 Carrier H 26 Carrier Z 15 Registration Expiry 120 65535 seconds This sets the expiration time when the SIP 3600 Expire Time trunk registers to the Sip server When half the time set here passes the registration update is automatically done 16 Register Sub Mode 0 Off Allow invalid In Prevents an invalid Invite message If the 0 vite message register information t
144. each Night Service Mode The details of classes are assigned by Program 20 31 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Timer Class for Trunks 1 15 0 0 Not assigned Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 208 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 31 Timer Class Timer Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 20 31 Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of service basis Program Input Data 2 0 Timer Class Number 0 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Queuing 0 64800 seconds Trunk Queuing Callback rings an 15 20 01 08 Callback Dura extension for this amount of time tion Time 02 Callback Trunk 0 64800 seconds The system cancels an extension 64800 20 01 09 Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queuing request Time after this amount of time 03 Virtual Extension 0 64800 seconds Virtual Extensions set for Delayed 10 20 04 03 Delay Interval Ringing refer to 15 11 Virtual Ex tension Delayed Ring Assignment ring the extension after this time 04 Intercom Interdi 0 64800 seconds When placing Intercom calls exten 10 21 01 02 gits Time Inter sion users must dial each digit in com I D Timer this time 05 Trunk Interdigit
145. etc notification IP address on network Keep Alive Programming Manual 2 541 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Alarm Re Content of Alarm No Type port Name Alarm Cause Action Recovery Status 17 1 0 Denial of The system re Service outage Confirm whether to WAR service ceived illegal Dos attack find abnormality on packet the net side 18 1 0 Connec Digital Station The wiring connec Check all wiring in MAJ tion Error Wiring Error tion between the between the Multi Multiline terminal line terminal and and the system the digital station has an issue card 30 2 0 SMDR The temporary 1 Problem of 1 Confirm When the ERR Buffer full buffer for SMDR wiring to con whether there output is re REC in main device nect main de is problem in started the overflowed and vice with PC wiring to con error is recov a part of output 2 PC Problem nect a main ered SMDR data dis device with However the appeared be PC SMDR data cause it could 2 Execute the after the error not output reactivation of occurs is not SMDR data PC recorded 31 1 0 Security Sensor detected Sensor detected Especially any INF Sensor abnormality abnormality thing need not be detected done 32 1 0 Automatic Remote watch Remote watch Especially any INF Transmis function did auto function did auto thing need not be sion from dialing dia
146. for Timed Flash or Disconnect 1 All Trunk 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 1 All Trunk 14 02 12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 1 All Trunk 15 01 01 Extension Name 101 101 184 184 15 02 12 Off Hook Signaling Type 4 All stations 15 02 33 Multi Language Calendar Display on LCD 1 All stations Programming Manual 2 571 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 15 02 34 Call Register Mode 1 All stations 15 03 12 Fixed Cadence 0 All stations 15 07 01 Programmable Function Key Key 21 00 Key 22 00 All stations 20 01 01 Operator Access Mode 1 20 02 07 Time and Date Display Mode 5 20 02 09 Disconnect Supervision 1 20 02 11 Default Setting Microphone of KTS 0 20 02 12 Forced Intercom Ringing 1 20 07 01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1 Class 1 Only 20 07 11 Forced Trunk Disconnect 1 Class 01 15 20 13 01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 Class 01 15 20 15 01 Normal Incoming Call of Trunk 11 20 15 03 Internal Incoming Call 10 20 15 05 DID 11 20 15 09 Call Back 10 20 16 01 Selectable Display Message Message Number 1 REUNIAO Message Number 2 SERVIGO_EXTERNO Message Number 3 RETORNA_ Message Number 4 LIGAR_ Message Number 5 LIGAR_APOS_ Message Number 6 ALMO O Message Number 7 VIAGEM _ AT Message Number 8 FERIAS_AT
147. in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in 2 1 Program 21 13 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Calling Party Number Maximum of 16 digits 0 This program is used to assign a calling No Setting Data 9 x party number per trunk Most Telco s will only ac If CPN information is programmed on both cept 10 digits the trunk and station when a call is made the CPN from the station will be sent to the Telco Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e ISDN Compatibility Programming Manual 2 241 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a Calling Party Number maximum 16 digits per entry The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial in number When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 12 Ifa Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Calling Party Number Maximum of 16 dig
148. is one item for each Night Service Mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Type 0 Normal Use this option to set the feature 0 14 04 1 VRS second dial type for the trunk you are program tone if no VRS instal ming led 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E amp M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching Conditions e When connecting to T1 trunks after changing Program 22 02 01 to match the Telco connected T1 service type the T1 cable or the T1 unit must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 unit to sync e When the trunk type is set to 3 DID the DID Transfer to Destination in 22 11 04 for each DID feature is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS e When the trunk type is set to 3 DID the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering 2 256 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Range Level IN Description Use Program 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension Eight ring tones are available
149. make in this option affects the tele phone in all Night Service modes Refer to Programs 21 05 and 21 06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing options When the extension is checked out it uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program 21 04 03 Room Status Refer Read Only This Program shows the hotel room status ence Only V2 0 Add 1 Room Clean Occu of each Hotel extension ed pied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Re quest 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Va cant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel 2 382 Program 42 Hotel Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 03 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Level IN Description Use Program 42 03 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel to set the Hotel Motel Class of Service Program COS options Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup There are 15 Classes of Service Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option its range and default setting For additional Class of Service options refer to Programs 20 06 2 Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Check In Operation 0 Off Class 01 15 1 On 1 02 Check Out
150. on page 2 448 3 2 The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Door Box Number 1 6 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Chime Pattern 0 None Per door box specify the chime pattern for Door Box 1 1 1 Door Box Ring 1 ringing Door Box 2 2 2 Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 3 3 Door Box Ring 3 Door Box 4 4 4 Door Box Ring 4 Door Box 5 5 5 Door Box Ring 5 Door Box 6 6 6 Door Box Ring 6 02 CODEC Transmit 1 63 15 5 dB This program controls the gain levels from 32 Gain Setup 15 5 dB the system to the door box 03 CODEC Receive Gain 1 63 15 5dB This program controls the gain levels from 32 Setup 15 5 dB the door box to the system Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box 2 334 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 04 Door Box Name Setup Level IN Description Use Program 32 04 Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box Program 32 The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Door Box Number 1 6 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Per door box assign a name up to 12 char Door Box Name acters long 1 DOOR 1 Door Box Name 2 D
151. sent If set to 0 the message is not played 04 2nd Delay Message 0 101 Input the VRS Message to be played as 0 Number 0 No Message the 2nd Delay Message 101 Fixed Message 05 2nd Waiting Message 0 255 Input the number of times the 2nd Delay 0 Sending Count Message is sent If set to 0 the message is not played 06 Tone Kind at Mes 0 Ring Back Tone Input what is heard between the Delay 0 sage Interval 1 MOH Tone messages 2 BGM Source 07 ACD Forced Discon 0 64800 seconds Set the time after the last 2nd Delay Mes 60 nect Time after the 0 No Disconnect sage is played before the call is discon 2nd DelayMessage nected 08 Queue Depth An 0 Disable Input when the Queue Depth Announce 0 nouncement 1 After 1st 1st ment is played 2 After 2nd 2nd 3 After 1st and 2nd 1st and 2nd Conditions None 2 372 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Program 41 Programming Manual 2 373 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 12 Night Announcement Setup Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 12 Night Announcement Setup to set Night Announce time for each ACD group Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41 03 02 The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number calls Inp
152. set up in this program Use Program 15 06 to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map Emergency calls will override Program 14 07 settings Input Data Access Map Number 001 084 ne Item Input Data Description Default 01 Access 0 No access Trunk Port Number Refer below Map 1 Outgoing access only 001 084 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Default Access map No Trunk Port No Default 1 1 7 T R H 2 7 T R H 084 7 T R H 2 1 7 T R H 2 7 T R H 084 7 T R H Programming Manual 2 119 Program 14 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Access map No Trunk Port No Default 1 7 T R H 2 7 T R H 084 7 T R H 084 1 7 T R H 2 7 T R H 084 7 T R H Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering e Central Office Calls Placing 2 120 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks Level Description Use Program 14 08 Music on Ho
153. should be sent 3 5 There are 32 available Department Groups Input Data Department Group Number 01 32 Item Input Data Default 01 SMDR Port No 1 2 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Station Message Detail Recording 2 354 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 05 Account Code Setup Level IN Description Use Program 35 05 Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension Program Class of Service Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20 06 Input Data 3 5 Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Account Code Mode 0 Account Codes Disa Use this option to select the Account Code 0 bled Mode 0 3 1 Account Codes Op tional This is for the ac count code entry fea ture 2 Account Code Re quired Not Verified Forced Account Codes enabled no verification with the system re quired 3 Account Code Re quired and Verified Forced Account Codes enabled verification with PRG 35 06 01 required 02 Forced Account Code 0 Account Codes for Use this option enable Account Codes for 0 Toll Call Setup ALL calls all calls or just toll calls for mode 2 or 3 in 1 Account Codes for Item 01 above TOLL calls 03 Account Codes for In 0 Disabled User can Use this option to allow users t
154. stored in the Compact Flash memory of the CPU 9 0 Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Delete Recovery Data Delete Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 601 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 60 TIAISDN Layer Status Information Level IN Description Use Program 90 60 T1 ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1 packages Input Data Slot No 00 15 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Link Status Read Only None No Link 0 Link N A No card seen in slot Conditions This program can be viewed in WebPro or PC Pro V3 0 or higher Feature Cross Reference None 2 602 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 62 Security ID Information Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 62 Security ID Information to view the information for Security ID Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Security ID Read Only 0 9 A F Maximum 32 characters Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 603 Program 90 SL
155. sys 20 31 17 tem sets the call as a Ring No An swer After this time expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing set in Programs 25 03 and 25 04 03 Disconnect after 0 64800 seconds From DISA trunk when the call may 60 seconds 20 31 18 VRS DISA re go to Incoming Ring Group of Pro transfer to IRG grams 25 03 and 25 04 This setting determines how long the call is ring ing in the IRG 04 Calling Time to 0 64800 seconds Set the answering waiting time of 10 seconds Automatic An the automatic answering extension swering Tele when an incoming DID trunk call is phone Set received 05 Duration Time 0 64800 seconds Set the announcement time of the 10 seconds for Guidance automatic answering extension after Message by Au which an incoming DID trunk caller tomatic Answer is disconnected ing Telephone Set 07 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds Determine the time a DISA caller or 3600 14 01 25 tion Warning any trunk to trunk such as Tandem 20 28 01 Tone Time Trunking conversation can talk be 20 28 02 fore the Long Conversation tone is 20 28 03 heard 20 31 19 08 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds This time determines how long the 10 14 01 25 tion Disconnect system waits before disconnecting a 20 28 01 Time DISA caller or any trunk to trunk 20 28 02 such as Tandem Trunking conver 20 28 03 sation call after the Long Conversa tion tone is heard 2 296 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup IN
156. the ARS F Route table number for Program 44 05 If the ARS F Route Time Schedule is used assign the ARS F Route selection number for Program 44 04 e Service Type 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table The total length of the number exceeds more than 8 digits Additional Data Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Ta ble number to be used in Program 44 03 03 Additional Data 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 0 100 0 No Set ting 3 Dial Extension Ana lyze Table Number 0 4 0 No Setting For the Service Type selected in 44 02 02 enter the additional data required e 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 Program 44 01 0 ARS F Route Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting Refer to Program 44 05 Program 44 01 1 ARS F Route Select Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting Refer to Program 44 04 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Num ber 0 4 0 No Setting Refer to Program 44 03 Programming Manual 2 389 Program 44 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 04 Dial Tone Simulation 0 Off If enabled this option sends dial tone to 0 1 On the calling party after the routing is deter mined This may be required if the central office at the destination does not send dial tone Conditions None Program 4 4 Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F
157. the limitation of the total num ber of available DSP will be applied 03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 04 SRTP Mode Select 0 Mode1 0 06 H 245 Port Number 0 65535 10100 07 Preparation Comple 0 65535 4000 tion Response Port Number 08 DTMF Duration 0 Use RFC2833 0 25 2000 ms 09 DTMF Pause 0 Use RFC2833 0 25 2000 ms 10 DTMF Twist Positive 0 24 dB 5 Level 11 DTMF Twist Negative 0 24 dB 0 Level 12 DTMF Duration 30 2000 ms 100 13 DTMF Level 1 61 36 dB 24 25 12 dB dB 1 36 dB 2 35 dB 37 0 dB 60 23 dB 61 24 dB Programming Manual 2 519 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 14 ICMP REDIRECT 0 Enabled Voice 1 packets will follow ICMP redirect messages 1 Disabled Voice packets will NOT follow the ICMP redirect mes sage 15 DTMF Detect Mini 23 2000 ms This setting is the minimal time setting to 30 mum Duration distinguish DTMF tones for the IPLB If the signal is shorter than the value set the sig nal is deemed not a DTMF 16 DTMF Detect Mini 0 40dbm This setting is the minimal level setting to 2 38dbm mum Level 1 39dbm distinguish DTMF tones If the signal is 2 38dbm shorter than the value set the signal is deemed not a DTMF 31 9dbm 17 DTMF Detect Mini 0 9db This is a frequency ratio setting of the 6 3db mum S N Ratio 1 8db DTMF for the frequency other than the
158. to DISA 02 Trunk Group 0 Off This option enables or disables aDISA or COS 01 15 1 Routing ARS Access 1 On tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selec tion ARS F Route 03 Trunk Group Access _ 0 Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 15 1 1 0n tie trunk caller ability to access trunk groups for outside calls Service Code 704 04 Outgoing System 0 Off This option enables or disables DISA or tie COS 01 15 0 Speed Dial 1 On trunk caller ability to use the System Speed Dialing 05 Operator Calling 0 Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 15 1 1 On tie trunk caller ability to dial O for the tele phone system operator 06 Internal Paging 0 Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 15 1 On tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging 07 External Paging 0 Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 15 1 1 0n tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging 08 Direct Trunk Access 0 Off This option enables or disables aDISA or COS 01 15 0 1 On tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 9 09 Forced Trunk Discon 0 Off This option enables or disables a tie trunk COS 01 15 0 nect lt Not for ISDN T 1 On caller ability to use Forced Trunk Discon point gt nect Service Code 11 10 26 This option is not available to DISA callers
159. to a message 5 seconds 07 Digital Pager Callback Number Digits 12 maximum using 0 9 andx M Number of messages entered by pressing LK1 X Extension number entered by pressing LK2 InMail automatically re places the X command with the number of the extension that initially re ceived the message Pager CBack Use this option to set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number Normally this option should be X M where X is the number of the extension that generated the notification e x is a visual delimiter to make the pag er display easier to read M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox e is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect X M 08 Delay in Dialing Digi tal Pager Callback Number 0 99 seconds Pager Dial Delay Use this option to set the delay 0 99 seconds that occurs just before InMail di als the Digital Pager Callback Number por tion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this op tion 0 99 seconds By default th
160. to be effective Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 537 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 09 Automatic System Reset Time Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 09 Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to automatically reset 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Month 00 12 00 If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set the sys tem is automatically reset every month on the predefined day 02 Day 00 31 00 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time Hour and Minute is set the system automatically resets every day at the predefined time 03 Hour 00 23 00 04 Minute 00 59 00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 538 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 10 System Alarm Setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 10 System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms You can designate an alarm as Major or Minor This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to the pre defined destination Input Data Alarm Number 001 100 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Alarm Type 0 Not Set 1 Major Alarm 2 Minor Alarm 02 Report 0 Not Report No autodial 1 Report autodial Table 2 18 D
161. to two Tables 1 4 No Setting Use this option to enter the PBX Access 1 4 digits Code When the system is behind a PBX this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code For PBX trunks Program 14 04 the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the ac cess code Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX even if you don t want to use Toll Restriction PBX Access Codes can have up to two dig its using 0 9 and LINE KEY 1 don t care When using Account Codes do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code Otherwise after the the trunk stops sending digits to the central office Entries 1 4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access Codes Each code can have up to two digits 09 Specific Dial Outgoing Code caption table Dial Up to eight Tables 1 20 No Set 1 20 digits ting 10 Outgoing Call Code Setup caption table Dial Up to four Tables 1 20 No Set 1 20 digits ting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 235 Program 21 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Level SA Description Use Program 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extension ports Each code must have four digits using any combination of 0 9 and x Each extension can have a sepa
162. 0 External Paging Group Basic Setting cccccccesesceneseeeeeeeeteeee 2 331 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup isccsicscicsmiseicisrisaratinsccssuecadianlisusianenis 2 332 32 01 Door Box Timers SAUD erae eter cease ae 2 332 32 02 Door Box Ring ASSIgiMEN i ersissiriisrisissisisrinikntn sien Nn Eirik 2 333 32 03 Door Box Basic SetUp essseesseeessesererreeerteesrtesrtrsrtesrresnrnnnnnnnn eneee 2 334 Programming Manual V SL1100 vi ISSUE 4 0 22 04 Door Box Name SQUIB isis a E E aiaei 2 335 FPrograma4 Tie Line Setups Be a ks a cae aA 2 336 34 01 E amp M Tie Line Basic Setup isiiiscscccaccieatasnusineianisiseisaaaiendmesaue 2 336 34 02 7 E amp M Tie Line Class of Sper vie x cccccccscesecdccecctercccdeee cree i 2 337 34 03 Trunk Group Routing for E amp M Tie Lines 2 338 34 04 E amp M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class 2 339 34 05 Tie Line Outgoing Call ReStichOnicisiisicisiscrsesisvsnavcniisaascinaseaue 2 340 34 06 Add Delete Digit for E amp M Tie LiNne ssssssrrrrrrrirsnuersrererrerreerresesssensses 2 341 SAUT ESM Tie Line TINE crisisen a 2 342 34 08 Toll Restriction Data for E amp M Tie Lines 2 343 34 09 ANI DNIS Service Opto isaitsicisicsisisecimisicsindeiemseanimnaudiens 2 344 34 10 Digit Daet for TTAN sess Se eee 2 347 Program 35 SMDR Account Code SP asia icisissci dea vasciapisiorsiziciusicialeiviacisiainieieens 2 348 39 01 SMDR OPONE at ln eet eee a A ee rerrerer ren 2 348 20 02 7 SM
163. 0 32 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Programming Manual 2 101 Program 13 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing Group for each extension There are 32 available Speed Dialing groups Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Group Number 01 32 Assign each extension to a speed dialing 1 Assign group number for group extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial 2 102 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing ISSUE 4 0 Level SB Description SL1100 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 04 Speed Dialing Number and Name Use Program 13 04 Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed Dialing areas This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers Input Data Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 999 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Speed Dialing 1 9 0 x Pause Per speed dial bin 000 999 as No Setting Data Press line key 1 sign the telephone number that is to Recall Flash Press line be called when the bin is accesse
164. 0 33 Preselected Data Setup to setup the system to preselected setting 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 China Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 02 Chile Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 04 Taiwan Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 05 Korea Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 06 Hong Kong Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 07 Brazil Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 08 Malaysia Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 09 Thailand Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below 10 India Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Refer below Default China Program No Name Default 10 02 01 Country Code 86 For China 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 1 All trunks On 14 02 18 Busy Tone Detection on talking 1 All trunks On 15 03 15 Disconnect without dial after hooking hold 1 All stations Disconnect 20 01 09 Camp on cancel time 30 20 02 12 Mode setting for incoming call from extension 1 Signaling call 20 17 01 Operator s Extension number 101 Operator 1 101 20 31 02 Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 30 20 31 07 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 30 20 31 08 DIL Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 30 20 31 19 DISA Conversation Warning Tone T
165. 0 33 01 for Standard SIP Terminal are applied 49 Receiving SIP IN 0 Disable Enables to receive a SIP INFO mes 2 FO V4 0 Added 1 Allowed any time sage from a standard SIP phone as 2 Allowed while RTP a dial information is not available Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 138 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each extension An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access Use Program 14 07 to define the available access maps Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Access Map Number 001 084 1 14 07 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering e Central Office Calls Placing Programming Manual 2 139 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 07 Programmable Function Keys Level SA Description Use Program 15 07 Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line keys For certain functions you can append data to the key basic function For example the function 26 appended by data 1 makes
166. 00 0 00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Time Number 01 00 00 08 00 Mode 3 Time Number 02 08 00 18 00 Mode 1 Time Number 03 18 00 22 00 Mode 2 Time Number 04 22 00 00 00 Mode 3 Pattern 2 0 00 0 00 Mode 2 Time Number 01 00 00 00 00 Mode 2 Conditions None 2 398 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Program 44 Programming Manual 2 399 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 09 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Description Program Use Program 44 09 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS F Route The pattern number is defined in Program 44 08 01 44 Input Data Day Number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 Sunday Saturday 0 No Setting Pattern 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route 2 400 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 10 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Description Use Program 44 10 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS F Program Route This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays
167. 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Incoming Group Number V1 5 0 No Setting Group01 has 101 102 Changed 01 25 Incoming Ring group 103 104 105 106 102 VM 107 and 108 First 8 103 Centralized VM ports ringing Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Line DIL e Ring Group Programming Manual 2 263 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 09 DID Basic Data Setup Level Program Input Data Trunk Group Number 01 25 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Expected Number of 1 8 Enter the number of digits the table ex 4 Digits pects to receive from the Telco Use this program to make the system compatible with 3 and 4 digit DID service If ISDN trunks we analyze the last digits that are set here If it is T 1 or analog DID it ana lyzes the first digits that are assigned here 02 Received Vacant 0 Disconnect call de If the system receives a DID that is not 0 Number Operation nied routed this program sets what the system 1 Transfer call routed does with the call to PRG 22 12 If the setting data is a 0 Disconnect the system will deny the call If the setting data is a 1 Transfer the call will be routed to the ring group specified in PRG 22 12 01 03 Sub Addressing 0 Extension Specify 0 Mode Intercom 1 DID Conversion Ta ble 04 DID Receiving Mode 0 Enbloc Receiving 0 for ISDN 1 Overlap Receiving
168. 1 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Default Description No 01 Schedule Type 0 Undefined Answer Table 1 Entryxx Schedule Type 1 Day of the Week 2 Range of Days 3 Date Schedule 1 2 All other schedules 0 Use this option to assign a Sched ule Type to the selected Answer Schedule The Schedule Type de termines how the Answer Schedule answers Calls The schedule can be one of the fol lowing types 1 Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week For this type of schedule you se lect The day of the week the schedule should run The schedule start time The schedule end time The Call Routing or Announce ment Mailbox used to answer calls 2 Range of Days A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days For this type of schedule you select The day of the week the schedule should start The day of the week the schedule should stop The time on the start day the schedule should start The time on the stop day the schedule should stop The Call Routing or Announce ment Mailbox used to answer the calls 3 Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the year For this type of schedule you select The specific date the schedule should run On the selected date the time the schedule should start On the selected date the time the schedule should stop
169. 1 Abbreviated Dial Group Name to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group Name Input Data Group Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Group Name Up to 12 characters 1 ABB GROUPO1 32 ABB GROUP32 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 107 Program 13 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup Level IN Description Use Program 14 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port Refer to the chart below for a description of each option its range and default setting Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Name Up to 12 characters Set the names for trunks The trunk Refer below name displays on a multiline termi nal for incoming and outgoing calls 02 Transmit Level 1 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5 dB gain for the trunk The option sets in 0 5 dB intervals the gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming 03 Receive Level 1 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5dB_ gain for the trunk The option sets in 0 5 dB intervals the gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming 04 Transmit Gain 1 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 0
170. 1 Enable On for International Dialing when using Calling Number Presentation CPN from station 09 High Layer Compati 0 Disable Off 0 bility HLC Sending 1 Enable On 10 S Point Terminal 0 Disable Off 1 Seizes Analog Trunk 1 Enable On 11 Automatic Changing 0 Disable Off 0 System Clock When 1 Enable On Date Time Informa tion Element Re ceived 12 Call Forward Options 0 Normal No Mes Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automati 0 Auto Connect Send sage Off cally Return Connect Message When Out 1 Normal No Mes going Call Receives Alerting Message sage On 13 Local Busy Tone Re 0 Off Busy tone sends when T point receiving a 0 lease 1 0n RELEASE message from Network Programming Manual 2 203 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 14 No Response Release 0 Off Operation mode setting for when second 0 Send 1 On T303 timer expires 15 Call Reference selec 0 Off 0 tion for PRI 2B Ch 1 On Transfer 18 Include CPN on Pre O Not include When the presentation indicator bit is set 0 sentation Restriction 1 Include by pressing key 63 in PRG 15 07 the V3 0 Added ISDN setup message is changed as fol lows When set to Include the CPN from the station or trunk is sent in the setup mes Program Sage When set to Disable the CPN from the station or trunk is NOT sent in the setup message 19 Send Progress Mes 0 Disable
171. 1 On ability to dial Service Code 612 and COS15 0 1 Delete record listen to or erase the Gener al Message 18 SMDR Printout 0 Off COS1 14 11 10 23 Accumulated Ex 1 On COS15 1 tension Data 19 SMDR Printout 0 Off COS1 14 11 10 24 Department 1 On COS15 1 Group STG Da ta 20 SMDRPrintout 0 Off cosi1 14 11 10 25 Program Accumulated Ac 1 On COS15 1 count Code Data 21 Register and de 0 Off COS1 14 lete DECTPP 1 On COS15 1 23 CO MSG Waiting 0 Off Enable or Disable an extension abil COS1 14 Indication Call 1 On ity to receive CO Message Waiting COS15 1 back Number Indication Programming 24 Set Cancel Pri 0 Off User cannot Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 COS1 14 11 10 32 vate Call Refuse control the feature this program is used to allow or de COS15 1 1 On ny the stations ability to set or can cel the Private Call Refuse feature 25 Set Cancel Caller 0 Off User cannot Enable or Disable an extension abil COS1 14 11 10 33 ID Refuse control the feature ity to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse COS15 1 11 10 34 1 On 26 Dial In Mode 0 Off Station cannot COS1 14 11 10 35 Switch control DDI switching COS15 1 1 On Station can control DDI switching 27 Do Not Call Ad 0 Off COS1 14 25 01 07 ministrator 1 On COS15 1 15 07 89 20 01 19 30 Date Setting 0 Off COS1 14 11 10 41 1 On COS15 1 31 System Wide call 0 Off COS1 14 forward clear 1
172. 1 2 Introduction ISSUE 4 0 3 The display shows Complete Data Save when completed and exits the telephone to an idle mode L1100 To save a customer s database a blank Compact Flash CF Card is required Insert the CF Card into the CPU and using Program 90 03 save the software to the CF Card Program 90 04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary Note that a CF Card can only hold one customer database Each database to be saved requires a separate drive CPU card CF Slot CN2 VMDB C1 Section 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS Once you enter the programming mode use the keys in the following chart to enter data edit data and move around in the menus Table 1 1 Keys for Entering Data When you want to Telephone Programming Enter Data into program 0 9 Line Key 1 6 Change Index Number Next Index Cursor Key Up Prior Index Cursor Key Down Select Data Line Key 1 6 All Clear Flash Register Hold Enter Go Back to Prior Screen Mute Clear Back Move Cursor Jump Up Down DND Delete single character Clear Back Next Page Help Toggle between Number Character While in a Entering Number Prior Page Transfer Quit the programming Speaker Exit Move Cursor to Left Cursor Key Left Soft Key1 Change Program Number Soft Key2 Programming Manual 1 3 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 When you want
173. 1 Internal Paging Group Number 1 All stations 31 02 02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving 1 All stations 9 0 32 01 02 Door Lock Cancel Time 2 80 01 02 Tone 14 Intercom Ring Back Tone Unit1Basic TN 10 80 01 02 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 10 Unit1Basic TN 80 01 02 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 0 Unit2Basic TN 80 01 03 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 10 Unit1Duration 80 01 03 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 20 Unit2Duration 80 04 12 TONE RCV2 Frequency 1 2 80 04 13 TONE RCV2 Frequency 2 3 80 07 01 Table 2 Frequency 48 80 07 01 Table 3 Frequency 62 81 01 14 Flash Hooking 1 25 81 07 01 CODEC Filter Type for analog trunk port 0 Trunks 1 27 10 02 01 Country Code 852 Brazil Program No Name Default 10 20 01 TCP Port SMDR Ex Dev 5 60000 11 01 01 System Numbering ACC Operator Dial 9 1 Digit Type 5 Opr 11 01 01 System Numbering ACC Trunk Dial 0 1 Digit Type 3 Trunk 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code for Type 3 0 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 1 Set Time 02 S 0800 E 1200 M1 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 1 Set Time 03 S 1200 E 1300 M3 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 1 Set Time 04 S 1300 E 1700 M1 ModeGrp 1 12 02 01 Automatic Night Service Pattern Time Pattern 1 Set Time 05 S 1700 E 0000 M2 ModeGrp 1 2 570 Program 90 Maintenance Program
174. 1 dBm 0 1 dBm 0 1 dBm 0 1 dBm 07 ON detect time 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 08 OFF detect time 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 09 Area Type 0 0 0 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 455 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Level MF Description Use Program 80 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector Tone Detector Type 1 Dial Tone for Trunk e 2 Busy Tone for Trunk e 3 Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 Special Busy Tone for Trunk 5 Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk Input Data Tone Detector Type Number 1 Dial Tone for Trunk 2 Busy Tone for Trunk 3 Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 Special Busy Tone for Trunk 5 Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Detection Level 0 0 dBm 25 dBm Refer below 1 5 dBm 30 dBm 10 dBm 35 dBm 3 15 dBm 40 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 30 dBm 55 dBm 02 Min Detection Level 0 15 Refer below 0 10 dBm 0 25 dBm 15 1 15 dBm 0 30 dBm 15 2 20 dBm 0 35 dBm 15 25 dBm 0 40 dBm 15 4 30 dBm 0 45 dBm 15 5 35 dBm 0 50 dBm 15 6 40 dBm 0 55 dBm
175. 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering Level IN Description Use Program 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers The extension number can have up to eight digits The first second digit s of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 or Program 11 20 Input Data Virtual Extension Numbers 001 050 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Extension Number Dial Up to 8 digits Set up Virtual Extension numbers Virtual Port Num ber Extension The extension number cannot be dupli Number cated in Programs 11 02 and 11 07 1 50 250 299 V3 5 Changed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Flexible System Numbering 2 66 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 07 Department Group Pilot Numbers Level IN Description Use Program 11 07 Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Department Group set up in Program 16 02 The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling The pilot number can have up to eight digits The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 or Program 11 20 as type 2 Input Data Department Extension Group Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Extension Group Dial Up to 8 digits Use this program to assign depart
176. 1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 63 DR700 Control Level IN Description Use Program 90 63 DR700 Control to adjust settings of the DR700 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Priority Timer 0 255 80 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 604 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 65 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup Level Description Use Program 90 65 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication Program password Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Password Up to 16 characters Sets the authentication password when nec i the 1st Party CTI application is connected to the system via a NAT router If a pass word is not set the system does not certify it Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 605 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 66 FTP Firmware Update setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 66 FTP Firmware Update setup to setup the Login info to connect to the FTP Server Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 User Name Up to 32 characters SLSYSTEM 02 Password Up to 32 characters Dra Oftp 03 FTP Server Host Up to 255 characters Input URL or IP Addre
177. 1100 ISSUE 4 0 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 27 Speed Dial Speed Dial Number None Common Private Common Private 28 Speed Dial Speed Dial Number None Group Group 29 Repeat Redial On Red Repeat Dialing 30 Saved Number None Redial 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet Me Con None ference 33 Override Off None Hook Signaling 34 Break In None 35 Camp On On Red Active 36 Step Call None 37 DND FWD Over None ride Call 38 Message Waiting None 39 Room Monitoring Slow Blink Red Monitoring Fast Blink Red To be monitored 41 Buzzer Extension Number On Red Calling party Fast Blink Red Called party 42 Boss Secretary Extension Number On Red Active Call 43 Series Call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive Hold None 46 Department On Red Withdrawing Group Log Out 47 Reverse Voice Extension Number Same as DSS Over Softphone doesn t sup port Re verse Voice Over V1 5 Added 48 Voice Over On Red Responding Slow Blink Red Listening 49 Call Redirect Extension Number None or Voice Mail Num ber 50 Account Code None 52 Automatic An Incoming Ring On Red Setup swer with Delay Group Message Setup 01 25 53 Automatic An On Red Delay Message Answering swer with Delay Message Start 54 External Call For On Red Setup ward by Door Box 2 142 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup
178. 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Level IN Description Use Program 15 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline telephone options Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Display Lan 1 English This program sets the Display Lan 1 guage Selection 2 German guage for the extension port you are 3 French programming 4 Italian To select options 6 11 dial 6 or 5 Spanish press Help until 2 shows in the far 6 Dutch right of screen then press line keys 7 Portuguese 1 6 To select options 12 16 dial 8 Norwegian 12 or press Help until 3 shows in the 9 Danish far right of screen then press line 10 Swedish keys 1 6 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 02 Trunk Ring Tone 1 High Use this option to set the tone 2 22 03 2 Medium pitch of the incoming trunk ring for 3 Low the extension port you are program 4 Ring Tone 1 ming 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone 5 03 Extension Ring 1 High Use this option to set the tone 8 Tone 2 Medium pitch of the incoming extension call 3 Low ring for the extension port you are 4 Ring Tone 1 programming Also refer to Program 5 Ring Tone 2 15 08 6 Ring
179. 15 0 11 10 07 Trunk Transfer Forwarding service codes 11 10 08 06 Charging Cost 0 Off COS1 14 11 10 09 Display 1 On COS15 0 1 10 Programmable 0 Off Turns off or on the ability for an ex COS1 14 11 11 38 Function Key 1 On tension user ability to program the COS15 1 Programming Appearance function keys using Appearance Service Code 752 Level 11 Forced Trunk 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 14 11 10 26 Disconnect ana 1 On ability to use Forced Trunk Discon COS15 1 log trunk only nect 12 Trunk Port Disa 0 Off COS1 14 11 10 27 ble 1 On COS15 1 13 VRS Record 0 Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS1 14 11 10 20 VRS Msg Opera 1 On to record erase and listen to VRS COS15 0 1 tion messages 14 VRS General 0 Off Turns an extension off or on to dial COS1 14 11 10 21 Message Play 1 On 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to COS15 0 1 the General Message 2 176 Program 20 System Option Setup IN Description Use Program 20 07 Class of Service Options Administrator Level to define the administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service COS ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 15 VRS General 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 14 11 10 22 Message Record
180. 189 10 Dial Analysis Table number 190 10 Dial Analysis Table number 191 10 Programming Manual 2 575 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default Dial Analysis Table number 192 10 Dial Analysis Table number 193 10 Dial Analysis Table number 194 10 Dial Analysis Table number 195 10 Dial Analysis Table number 196 10 26 02 06 LCR Carrier Table Dial Analysis Table number 151 Dial Analysis Table number 152 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161 Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172 Dial Analysis Table number 173 Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178 NINI NI MIL NI NMI HN NM NINI NINININI NM MJ NINININI NM NM NM NM DM 26 05 01 Delete Digi
181. 2 09I3 Dial Analysis Table number 173 094 C C Dial Analysis Table number 174 095 Dial Analysis Table number 175 09IE Dial Analysis Table number 176 097 Dial Analysis Table number 177 09I8 Dial Analysis Table number 178 099 Dial Analysis Table number 179 1 Dial Analysis Table number 180 2 Dial Analysis Table number 181 3 Dial Analysis Table number 182 4 Dial Analysis Table number 183 5 Dial Analysis Table number 184 6 C Dial Analysis Table number 185 7 C Dial Analysis Table number 186 8 C Dial Analysis Table number 187 29W C C CC Dial Analysis Table number 188 91 Dial Analysis Table number 189 9I2 Dial Analysis Table number 190 I3 Dial Analysis Table number 191 4 Dial Analysis Table number 192 I9 Dial Analysis Table number 193 I Dial Analysis Table number 194 97 Dial Analysis Table number 195 I2 Dial Analysis Table number 196 I9I9 26 02 02 Service Type Dial Analysis Table number 151 1 Dial Analysis Table number 152 1 Programming Manual 2 573 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 2 574 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table nu
182. 2 536 Ee oy em RESE beseorinr E e tee aed apteneceaeeaecnaane 2 537 90 09 Automatic System Reset Time SetuUp sssrsisisisisisrisieisirisreessissssesssss 2 538 90 10 System Alarm Setup eosenorrrrrrrrrernrerrererernnnnnnnnnnnnnneennaeetreerensensaee 2 539 90 11 Alarm Report SMTP SOW csiiecaiedariscesntdienictemmestinidateatiecatnaninne 2 546 90 12 System Aarm OUMU eene 2 548 90 13 System Mformation QUPUbsinnninnsneas a 2 549 90 16 Main Software Information cccccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeaaenneeeees 2 550 90 17 Firmware Informatio m as a 2 551 909 19 DEBIO oe Co een cee E 2 552 90 20 Traffic Report Data Setups sisi ciinawsicidicisrieddisinasitanusinieusieis 2 553 90 21 Traffic Report Output cece cece cece cceeaaeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeaeeas 2 555 90 23 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones 0 ccccceeeneeeeee 2 556 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup eeeeeeeeere 2 557 90 25 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup cc ceeesseesseesseeteeeeeeenee 2 558 90 26 Program Access Level Setup ii ction tcc 2 559 90 28 User Programming Password Setup cccseneesessccnenteeeeeeennees 2 560 90 31 DIM Access Over Ethernet acriter ereen 2 561 90 33 Preselected Data SQWUD isisisisicieccalassisisiasiaiaricicwersisiiaiavaveusivernies 2 562 90 34 Firmware InformatiOn ccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeee
183. 2 Define Internal paging group number for 0 for Watch Message Watching message 02 External Paging 0 8 Define External paging group number for 0 Group for Watch Mes Watching message sage 03 VRS Message for 0 100 Define VRS number used for Watching 0 Watch Mode message 04 Interval Timer for 0 60 Define interval time for sending Watching 0 Watch Message message Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 219 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 45 Remote Watch Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 45 Remote Watch Setup to defines the remote watch 2 0 Input Data Terminal Number 1 6 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Ring Terminal for Re Extension Number Up Extension number for Remote Inspection No Setting mote Inspection to 8 digits 02 Ring Time Setting 0000 2359 Ringing start time for Inspected Extension 0000 03 Ring Timer 0 60 Ringing continue time for inspected exten 0 sion 04 Auto Dial Number 0 999 Speed dial number when detect no answer 0 Area Setting at extension and make emergency call 05 VRS Message for An 0 100 VRS message number when inspected ex 0 swer tension answered 06 VRS Message for Au 0 100 VRS message number when emergency 0 to Dial call destination answered 07 Time of Repeat Auto 0 255 Repeat number for making emergency 0 Dial call 08 Auto Dial Calli
184. 2 nation Number From entry 2 Refer to Program 92 01 Copy Program on page 2 609 for program that can be copied Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 613 Program 92 Program 92 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 92 Copy Program 92 04 Extension Data Swap Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 92 04 Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 1st Extension Number Up to eight digits 2nd Extension Number The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbering 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 13 03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions 13 06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup 15 02 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extension 15 07 Programmable Function Key 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 15 14
185. 24 hour 10 MAR TUE 15 15 are eight dis Type 6 24 hour 15 15 MAR 10 TUE play modes Type 7 24 hour 3 10 TUE 15 15 Type 8 24 hour 15 15 TUE 10 MAR 08 LCD Display Hold 0 64800 seconds 5 ing Time 09 Disconnect Supervi 0 Disable Off Use this option 1 sion 1 Enable On to enable or disable discon nect supervi sion for the system trunks 10 Time Before Shifting 0 No Shift 0 15 02 18 to Power Saving 1 1 minute Mode 2 2 minutes 3 4 minutes 4 8 minutes 5 16 minutes 6 32 minutes 7 64 minutes 11 Handsfree Micro 0 Off Use this option 1 phone Control 1 On to control the setting for Mul tiline Terminal Handsfree mi crophone after being discon nected and re connected If set to 0 the microphone is always off when the ter minal is recon nected If set to 1 the micro phone remains in the same state it was in when the ter minal is recon nected 12 Forced Intercom 0 Disable Voice Use this option 1 Ring ICM Call Type 1 Enable Signal to enable or disable Forced Intercom Ring ing If enabled incoming Inter com calls nor mally ring If disabled Inter com Calls voice an nounce 15 Caller ID Display 0 Name and Number Both 0 Mode 1 Name 2 Number 18 Dialing Record Dis 0 64800 seconds 30 play Time 2 170 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Pro
186. 25 This item assigns the transferred 0 No Setting Destination Incoming Ring Group Ring Group when the VRS is unan Number swered after Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting Message 04 VRS No Answer 0 64800 seconds If an extension has Personal Greet 0 Time ing enabled and all VRS ports are busy a DIL or DISA call to the ex tension waits this time for a VRS port to become free 05 Park and Page 0 64800 seconds If a Park and Page is not picked up 0 Repeat Timer during this time the Paging an VRS Msg Re nouncement repeats send 06 Set VRS Mes 0 No Message This item assigns the VRS Message 0 14 01 27 sage for Private Played number to be used as Private Call Call Refuse VRS 1 100 VRS Mes Refuse Msg Private Call sage 1 100 When Fixed message is set VRS 101 VRS Fixed mes message guidance is Your call sage Message will on cannot go through ly play if PRG 40 10 01 is enabled 07 Set VRS Mes 0 No Message This item assigns the VRS Message 0 14 01 27 sage for Caller ID Played number to be used as Caller ID Re Refuse VRS Msg 1 100 VRS Mes fuse CID sage 1 100 When Fixed Message is set VRS 101 VRS Fixed mes message guidance is Your call sage Message will on cannot go through ly play if PRG 40 10 01 is enabled 08 Call Attendant 0 100 0 15 01 08 Busy Message 0 No message 2 360 Program 40 Voice Recording System IN Description In Program 40 10 Voic
187. 255 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 480 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 06 ISDN PRI Layer3 S point Timer Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 82 06 ISDN PRI Layer3 S Point Timer Setup to set the basic timer for the layer 3 of ISDN PRI S Point 82 Input Data Layer3 Timer Type No 1 5 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 T301 0 180 254 sec 180 sec 02 T302 1 254 sec 10 sec 03 T303 1 254 sec 4 sec 04 T304 0 254 sec 20 sec 05 T305 1 254 sec 30 sec 06 T306 0 254 sec 30 sec 07 T307 1 254 sec 180 sec 08 T308 1 254 sec 4 sec 09 T309 1 254 sec 90 sec 10 T310 0 180 sec 30 sec 11 T312 1 254 sec 6 sec 12 T313 1 254 sec 4 sec 13 T314 1 254 sec 4 sec 14 T316 T317 1 254 sec 120 sec 15 T317 1 T316 1 sec 60 sec 16 T318 1 254 sec 4 sec 17 T319 1 254 sec 4 sec 18 T320 1 254 sec 30 sec 19 T321 1 254 sec 30 sec 20 T322 1 254 sec 4 sec Conditions None Programming Manual 2 481 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference None Program 82 2 482 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 07 CODEC Filter Set
188. 255 minutes between non pager Mes sage Notification callouts in which the des tination answers says Hello dials 1 to ac knowledge and then enters the wrong se curity code 20 minutes 11 Wait Between Busy Non Pager Callout At tempts 1 255 minutes Notify Busy Intvl Use this option to set how long InMail waits 1 255 minutes after it dials a busy non pager callout destination before retry ing the callout number 15 minutes 12 Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout At tempts 1 255 minutes Notify RNA Intvl Use this option to set how long InMail waits 1 255 minutes after it dials an unanswered non pager callout destination before retrying the callout number There are 3 types of unanswered non pag er callouts e Ifthe callout rings the destination longer than the 47 01 13 Wait for Answer Non Pager Callout Attempts option e If the destination answers says Hello or the system detects answer supervision and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with noti fication answers the callout or if the cal lout is picked up by an answering ma chine e If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying Hello This typi cally happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the callout like the above example or if the call is picked up by an answering machine with insufficient outgoing message
189. 3 04 Forward All 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 04 05 Forward Busy 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 05 06 Forward RNA 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 06 07 Remote Log On 0 Off 0 45 01 15 4 On 45 04 07 08 Conversation Recording 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 08 09 Clear Down String 0 Off 0 45 01 15 1 On 45 04 09 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 406 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 01 InMail System Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 01 InMail System Options to set up the InMail system wide options Program Input Data 47 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 InMail Master Name Up to 12 characters MasterName InMail The CPU must be reset for a change to The system this program to take effect substitutes the Use this option to modify the name for all port number for InMail ports The system briefly displays the when call this name when a display multiline terminal ing the port user calls a Voice Mail port either by pressing Message their voice mail key or by dialing the master number You should always end the name with the charac ters The system substitutes the port num ber for the last Using the default name InMail for example the telephone dis play shows InMail 1 when calling port 1 03 Subscriber Message 1 4095 seconds Subs Msg Length 120 seconds Length Use this option to set the ma
190. 30 HookFlash Send Time Ground 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms 31 HookFlash Send Time DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms 32 HookFlash Send Time E amp M 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms 33 HookFlash Send Time OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms 34 Pause Send Time ALL 1 255 1 sec 255 sec 3 3 sec 35 Wink Send Duration Time DID 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 25 200 ms 36 Delay Send Duration Time DID 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 25 200 ms 37 Incoming Wink Send Time DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 3 300 ms 38 Wink Send Duration Time E amp M 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 25 200 ms 39 Delay Send Duration Time E amp M 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 25 200 ms 40 Incoming Wink Send Time E amp M 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 3 300 ms 41 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 48 4800 ms Time DID 42 Receive Wink Duration Min Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 12 96 ms DID 43 Receive Wink Duration Max Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 45 360 ms DID 44 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 48 4800 ms Time E amp M 45 Receive Wink Duration Min Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 12 96 ms E amp M 46 Receive Wink Duration Max Time 1 250 8 ms 2000 ms 45 360 ms E amp M 47 Receive DP Make Min Time ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 3 12 ms 48 Receive DP Make Max Time ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 19 76 ms 49 Receive DP Break Min Tim
191. 32 Special Dial Tone TONE 3 1 0 0 1 32 2 1 1 32 Busy Tone TONE 6 1 0 0 2 32 2 1 2 32 Ring Back Tone TONE 14 1 0 0 40 32 2 1 10 32 External Ring Back Tone TONE 45 1 0 0 40 32 2 1 10 32 3 a r P 2 4 a z External Busy Tone TONE 46 1 0 0 2 32 2 0 1 2 32 Malaysia Program No Name Default 10 02 01 Country Code 60 Programming Manual 2 577 Program 90 SL1100 Thailand ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 10 02 01 Country Code 66 India Program No Name Default 10 02 01 Country Code 91 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 578 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 34 Firmware Information Level Description Use Program 90 34 Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware units installed in Program the system Input Data 9 0 Slot Number 00 15 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Package Name Read Only PKG Name 02 Firmware Version Number Read Only 00 00 15 15 03 VOIPDB Software Version Read Only DEV PR REL 00 00 00 00 00 00 DEV PR REL FF FF FF FF FF FF 04 DSP Project Number Read Only 00000000 FFFFFFFF 05 Vocallo Firmware Version Read Only 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 06 OCT10101D Version Read Only 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF Conditions None Feature
192. 37 TDM Echo Can 0 Disable 1 celler NLP mode 1 Enable 4W 2 Echo Path Mode 3 Echo Path Auto De tect Mode Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 84 None 2 526 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 32 FAX Over IP CODEC Setup Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Use Program 84 32 FAX Over IP CODEC Setup to program the CODECs used when faxing across SIP Trunk Note these settings must match in both systems for faxing across SIP Trunk to work Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 FAX CODEC 1 G 711 a law Set up FAX over IP CODEC 2 2 G 711 u law If set to 4 T 38 UDPTL system does not 3 G 726 follow PRG 84 32 02 07 02 Payload Size 1 4 10 ms base Set up payload size when using SIP 2 Trunk 03 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 Static Set up Jitter Buffer settings when using 1 2 Self adjusting SIP Trunk 04 Jitter Buffer min 0 300 Set up minimum Jitter Buffer settings when 20 using SIP Trunk 05 Jitter Buffer average 0 300 Set up average Jitter Buffer settings when 40 using SIP Trunk 06 Jitter Buffer max 0 300 Set up maximum Jitter Buffer settings 80 when using SIP Trunk 07 RTP Payload Type 0 2 8 96 127 Set up RTP Payload type when settings 103 when using SIP Trunk 2 When the G 711 a This setting should b
193. 4 Max Conference Du 0 64800 seconds Define the maximum duration of a Remote 7200 ration Conference When this time passes the conference is disconnected by the SL1100 05 End Tone Alert Time 0 64800 seconds Determine how long prior disconnecting a 300 Remote Conference call based on the maximum conference duration above the L1100 should send out a beep This is used to warn the conference participants of the pending disconnect Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Conference Remote 2 212 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 35 Extension s Operator Setting Level Description Use Program 20 35 Extension s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group Program Input Data 2 0 Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Extension s Operator Setting 0 15 0 Not Set 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 213 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 36 Trunk s Operator Setting Level IN Description Use Program 20 36 Trunk s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Trunk s Operator Set 0 15 Allows the user to select Operator Group 0 ting 0 No Sett
194. 40Hz 16Hz Middle 760Hz 540Hz 16Hz Low 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz Pattern 6 V3 0 Added High 1400Hz 540Hz 8Hz Middle 760Hz 540Hz 8Hz Low 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz Pattern 7 V3 0 Added High 2000Hz 1100Hz 16Hz Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 16Hz Low 1100Hz 760Hz 16Hz Pattern 8 V3 0 Added High 2000Hz 1100Hz 8Hz P Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 8Hz rogram Low 1100Hz 760Hz 8Hz 2 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Selectable Ring Tones 2 258 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Level SA Description Use Program 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring Program Groups Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming Use Program 22 05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22 06 to set the ringing for the phones An Incoming Ring Group IRG can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned 2 2 There are 25 available Ring Groups Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 01 25 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Extension Num Maximum eight Digits Use this program to assign exten Group01 has 22 02 ber sions up to 32 to Ring Groups 101 102 103 22 05 Calls ring extensions according to 104 105 106 22 06 Ring Group programming 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing Conditions None Feature C
195. 5 7 this option to specify the address length The choices are from 1 8 digits Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 34 None 2 346 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 10 Digit Delete for T1 ANI Level IN Description Use Program 34 10 Digit Delete for T1 ANI to delete the Information Digits received from the Program Network on Feature Group D Trunks Input Data 34 Incoming Trunk Group Number 001 025 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delete digit 0 9 0 No delete Example 2 ANI Information 111222 Delete 2 digits After digit been deleted 1222 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 347 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 01 SMDR Options Level Program 39 IN Description Use Program 35 01 SMDR Options to set the SMDR Station Message Detail Recording options for each of the eight SMDR ports Refer to the following chart for a description of each option its range and default setting Input Data SMDR Port Number 1 2 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Output Port Type 0 No Setting SMDR This option specifies the type of connec SMDR port1 3 disabled tion used for SMDR The baud rate for the SMDR port2 0 3 LAN SMDR en
196. 6 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Table 2 8 Function Number List 2 Appearance Function Level x00 x99 Service Code 752 Puneton Function Additional Data LED Indication Number x01 Trunk Key Trunk Line Number 001 084 Fast Blink Red Incoming On Red Speaking Slow Blink Red Holding Transferring Recall x04 Park Key Park Number 01 64 Slow Blink Red Holding Recall x07 Station Park Hold None Program Default e The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS consoles DSS One Touch key 101 160 3 0 e The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS consoles No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Station Selection DSS Console Programming Manual 2 317 Program 30 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 04 DSS Console Alternate Answer Level SA Description Use Program 30 04 DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in case off duty mode is set by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console Input Data Index 1 DSS Console Number 01 12 Index 2 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 DSS Console Alternate Answer Alternate DSS No 01 12 0 No Setting 0 No setting Conditions e Related extension is assigned in Program 30 02 Alternate answer key ALT key is assigned at Program 30 03 Feature Cross Reference None 2 318 Program 30 DSS DLS Co
197. 7 Call Pickup 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT x 23 02 8 digit 28 Call Pickup for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 769 23 02 Another Group 8 digit 29 Direct Extension 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT xx Call Pickup 8 digit Customize the Service Codes for di rect extension call pickup 30 Specified Trunk 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 672 Answer 8 digit 31 Park Hold 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 6 24 03 8 digit 32 Answer for Park 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 6 24 03 Hold 8 digit 33 Group Hold 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 732 8 digit 34 Answer for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 762 Group Hold 8 digit 2 78 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 35 Station Park 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 757 Hold 8 digit 36 Door Box Access 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 702 8 digit 37 Common Cancel 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT x9 ing Service Code 8 digit 38 General Purpose 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 783 15 07 56 Indication 8 digit 15 07 57 40 Station Speed Di 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 7 aling 8 digit 41 Voice Over 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 690 11 16 08 8 digit 42 Flash on Trunk 0 9 Maximum of Terminal SLT 3 lin
198. 8 ticLevelControl dbm asked to change by engineer Level V2 0 Add 0 42 dBm Select target gain ed 39 dBm Effective when PRG 84 31 28 2 7 21dBm 11 9dBm 12 6dBm 31 RTP Tx HLC 0 42 42 dBm 0 Type 1 Type 7 Threshold dBm 8 36 V1 5 0 42dBm Changed 1 41 dBm Type 9 11 15 42 42 0 dBm 32 RTP Tx Gain 0 Disable Type 1 Type 7 Compression 1 Enable 8 1 V1 5 mode Changed Type 9 11 15 0 33 RTP Tx Gain 0 42 42 dBm 0 Type 1 Type 7 Compression dBm 8 36 V1 5 Threshold 42 dBm Changed 1 41 dBm Type 9 11 15 42 42 0 dBm 34 RTP Rx Level 0 Disable Do not change the setting unless 0 Control V2 0 1 RX Level Control asked to change by engineer Added Mode Select receive level control mode 2 RX Automatic Level Control Flag 35 RTP Rx Level 0 16 24dB 24 Do not change the setting unless 8 84 31 34 Control Level dB asked to change by engineer V2 0 Added 0 24dB Select receive voice level 21dB Effective when PRG 84 31 34 1 8 0dB 15 21 dB 16 24 dB 36 RTP Rx Automa 0 12 42 dBm 6 Do not change the setting unless 7 84 31 34 ticLevelControl dBm asked to change by engineer Level V2 0 Add 0 42 dBm Select target gain ed 1 39 dBm Effective when PRG 84 31 34 2 7 21dBm 11 9dBm 12 6 dBm Programming Manual 2 525 Program o4 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program
199. 800 seconds 0 Interval 09 Warning Beep 0 64800 seconds 60 14 01 18 Tone Signaling Interval Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 198 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 19 System Options for Caller ID Level IN Description Use Program 20 19 System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID feature Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Caller ID Displaying 0 First 10 digits Up if displaying digits are more than 12 digits 0 Format per 1 Last 10 digits Low er 02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0 30 seconds When an incoming CO call is received the 5 SL1100 starts the timer It will wait the pro grammed time for Caller ID information from Telco before connecting the CO call 03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0 Off If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled 0 no 0 V2 0 Added 1 On access code will be added to the Caller ID If this option is enabled 1 the access code entered in PRG 10 02 02 amp 10 02 03 will be added to the beginning of the Caller ID 04 Wait Facility IE Timer 0 64800 seconds This timer is used with ISDN trunks to de 10 termine how long the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco 05 Caller ID Sender 0 64800 seconds 0 Queuing Time Send er Wait 07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits 1 08 Area Code
200. 90 ms 83 2520 ms 0 0 9 OFF max time 1 60 ms 20 630 ms 115 3480 ms 0 0 12 Frequency No 1 1 3 2 1 1 13 Frequency No 2 2 4 3 0 0 14 Twist Level 0 0 0 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 457 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 05 Date Format for SMDR and System Level MF Description Program Use Program 80 05 Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out the SMDR alarm report and system information report 8 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Date Format 0 American Format Month Day Year 0 1 Japanese Format Year Month Day 2 European Format Day Month Year Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 458 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup Level MF Description Use Program 80 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the Program detection tone set with Program 80 04 12 and Program 80 04 13 Input Data 8 0 Frequency Table Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Frequency 0 10 255 Frequency Table No 1 100 2550 Hz 35 350 Hz 0 Not used Frequency Table No 2 44 440 Hz Frequency Table No 3 48 480 Hz Frequency Table No 4
201. BGM setting status per ex tension 16 Key Touch Tone 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 19 1 Enable Indicates Key Touch Tone setting status per extension 17 Dial Block 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 33 1 Enable Indicates Dial Block setting status per extension 18 Repeat Dial 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 1 Enable Indicates Repeat Dial setting status per extension 19 Headset Mode 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 65 Switching 1 Enable Indicates Headset Mode Switching setting status per extension 20 Headset Ringing 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 43 Mode Switching 1 Enable Indicates Headset Ringing Mode Switching setting status per exten sion Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance 2 622 Program 93 System Information ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 93 System Information 93 04 Redial List Level SA This Program is available for V3 0 or higher Description Program Use Program 93 04 Redial List to display the redial list of each extension Input Data 9 3 Extension Number Up to 8 digits Redial Last Number 10 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Redial Data Dial Data Read Only No Setting 15 02 13 1 9 0 x P R Indicates the number stored in Out 15 02 39 Up to 36 digits going call history 02 Name Up to 12 characters Read Only No Setting 15 01 01 Indicates the name stored in Out
202. Bm 0 30 dBm 15 detect level 4 20 dBm 0 35 dBm 15 detect level 5 25 dBm 0 40 dBm 15 detect level 6 30 dBm 0 45 dBm 15 05 twist level 0 9 1 dB 10 dB Refer below 06 S N ratio 0 4 5 step 0 dB 20 dB Refer below 07 ON detect time 1 255 15 step 30 ms 3840 ms Refer below 08 OFF detect time 1 255 15 step 30 ms 3840 ms Refer below Programming Manual 2 463 Program 80 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Default Item Item Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 No 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min detect level 10 20 dBm 10 20 dBm 10 20 dBm 10 20 dBm 10 20 dBm 04 Max detect level 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 2 2 dBm 05 twist level 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 5 6 dBm 06 S N ratio 2 10 dBm 2 10 dBm 2 10 dBm 2 10 dBm 2 10 dBm 07 ON detect time 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 08 OFF detect time 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms 1 30 ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 464 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 12 Caller ID Receiver Setup Level Description Use Program 80 12 Caller ID Receiver Setup defines th
203. Caller ID 1 On automatically block outgoing Caller 14 01 21 ID information when a user places a call If this option is on the system auto matically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits 16 Display E911 Di 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to dis COS 01 15 0 aled Extension 1 On play the name and number of the Name and Num extension that dialed E911 ber 17 ARS Override of 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 0 Trunk Access 1 On to override the trunk access map Map programming for outgoing calls 19 Hotline for SPK 0 Off The ability of an extension to have COS 01 15 0 20 08 09 1 On Hotline activated or deactivated when going off hook via the speaker key 20 Hot Key Pad 0 Off The ability of an extension to make COS 01 15 0 1 On a Call by just dialing the number without first going off hook 21 Automatic Trunk 0 Off The ability of an extension to auto COS 01 15 0 Seizing by Press 1 On matically access Trunk Route when ing SPK Key going off hook via the speaker key 22 Voice Over to 0 Off The ability of an extension to make COS 01 15 0 Busy Virtual Ex 1 On Voice Over to Busy Virtual Exten tension sion 23 Display indica 0 Off COS 01 15 0 tion for security 1 On sensor detection 24 Display indica 0 Off COS 01 15 0 tion for emergen 1 On cy call by remote inspection Conditions None Feature Cross
204. Code Restriction Toll Restriction 2 552 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program Description Use Program 90 20 Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report 90 20 Traffic Report Data Setup Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Call Traffic Output 0 Not Measured 0 1 Measure 03 All Line Busy Output 0 Not Detected 0 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 04 DTMF Receiver Busy 0 Not Detected 0 Output 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 05 Dial Tone Detector 0 Not Detected 0 Busy Output 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 06 Caller ID Receiver 0 Not Detected 0 Busy Output 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 07 Voice Mail Channel 0 Not Detected 0 All Busy Output 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 09 Attendant Channel All 0 Not Detected 0 Busy Output 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined val ue 11 Security Sensor Dial 0 Not Recorded Record Security sensor dialing and Re 1 Record 1 Recorded mote Inspection dialing to security report Conditions None Programming Manual 2 553 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference Traffic Reports Program 90 2 554 Program 90 Maintenance Pro
205. Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 239 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment Level IN Description Program Use Program 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment to define the Hotline destination number for each extension number 2 1 Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Hotline Destination Number 1 0 x Pause Hook Flash Code to wait No Setting 20 08 09 for answer supervision maximum 36 digits 21 01 09 Conditions The code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto Attendant This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported Feature Cross Reference e Ringdown Extension Hotline Internal External 2 240 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Level IN Description Use Program 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Program Numbers for each trunk maximum 16 digits per entry When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21 12 If the Calling Party Number is assigned
206. DTMF tone When this value comes to 6 3db Odb the DTMF is distinguished only when 7 2db the signal level except DTMF is low In 8 1db case of wrong DTMF detection by a per 9 Odb son s voice there is the possibility that the level except DTMF is large The system will be able to protect a wrong DTMF de tection by choosing Odb value or so Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 520 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 28 DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 28 DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download Program for the IP Phone Input Data 84 1 3 Not used 4 IP4WW 24TIXH Terminal Type Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting 02 Firmware File Name Maximum 30 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 521 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 29 SIP MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 29 SIP MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of the SIP MLT when it uses Multicast Input Data 1 Type 1 Multicast 2 Type 2 reserved Type 3 Type 3 reserved 4 Type 4 reserved 5 Type 5 reserved
207. Data ARS F Route Table Number 001 100 Priority Number 1 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Trunk Group Number 0 No Setting Select the trunk group number to use for 0 1 25 Trunk Group the outgoing ARS call 101 104 Networking V1 5 Added 255 Extension Call 02 Delete Digits 0 255 Enter the number of digits to be deleted 0 255 Delete All from the dialed number 03 Additional Dial Num 0 100 Enter the table number defined in Pro 0 ber Table gram 44 06 for additional digits to be di aled 04 Beep Tone 0 Off Select whether or not a beep is heard if a 0 1 0n lower priority trunk group is used to dial out 05 Gain Table Number 0 100 Select the gain table number to use for the 0 for Internal Calls 0 No Setting internal call defined in Program 44 07 06 Gain Table Number 0 100 Select the gain table number to use for the 0 for Tandem Connec 0 No Setting tandem call defined in Program 44 07 tions 07 ARS Class of Service 0 16 Select the ARS Class of Service to use for 0 0 No ARS Class Call the table An extension ARS COS is deter Restricted mined in Program 26 04 01 08 Dial Treatment 0 15 Select the Dial Treatment to use for the ta 0 ble If a Dial Treatment is selected Pro grams 44 05 02 and 44 05 03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program 26 03 01 is used instead 09 Maximum Digit 0 24 Input the maximum number of digits to 0 send when using the F Route 11 Net
208. Di 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 4 aling 8 digit 12 Last Number Dial 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 5 8 digit 13 Saved Number 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 715 Dial 8 digit 14 Trunk Group Ac 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 704 cess 8 digit 15 Specified Trunk 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 9 Access 8 digit Program gt a 16 Trunk Access via 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 726 Networking V1 5 8 digit Added 17 Clear Last Num 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 776 ber Dialing Data _ 8 digit 18 Clear Saved 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 785 Number Dialing 8 digit Data 19 Internal Group 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 701 31 01 01 Paging 8 digit 20 External Paging 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 703 8 digit 21 Meet Me Answer 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 764 31 02 01 to Specified In 8 digit ternal Paging Group 22 Meet Me Answer 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 765 to External Pag 8 digit ing 23 Meet Me Answer 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 763 31 02 01 in Same Paging 8 digit Group 24 Combined Pag 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 1 31 02 01 ing 8 digit 31 07 25 Direct Call Pick 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 756 up Own Group 8 digit 26 Call Pickup for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 768 23 02 Specified Group 8 digit 2
209. E Message Number 9 FORA DE SERVI O Message Number 10 AUSENTE_ATE 20 31 02 Callback Trunk queuing cancel time 7200 Class 01 15 22 09 01 Expected Number of Digits 2 TRK G 10 only 24 02 01 Busy Transfer 1 25 01 02 DISA User ID 0 All Trunk 26 02 01 Dial Data Dial Analysis Table number 151 1 COC C Dial Analysis Table number 152 01 Dial Analysis Table number 153 02 C Dial Analysis Table number 154 03 Dial Analysis Table number 155 4 C Dial Analysis Table number 156 H CO CC 2 572 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default Dial Analysis Table number 157 06 C C CC Dial Analysis Table number 158 07 C CC Dial Analysis Table number 159 080 Dial Analysis Table number 160 081 Dial Analysis Table number 161 082 Dial Analysis Table number 162 083 Dial Analysis Table number 163 084 Dial Analysis Table number 164 085 Dial Analysis Table number 165 08E Dial Analysis Table number 166 087 Dial Analysis Table number 167 088 Dial Analysis Table number 168 089 Dial Analysis Table number 169 09I0 Dial Analysis Table number 170 091 Dial Analysis Table number 171 092 Dial Analysis Table number 17
210. Extension Group 16 01 Pilot Number ment group pilot numbers No 1 31 Depart The number set up by Program 3101 3131 ment 11 02 Extension Numbering can V3 5 Exten not be used Changed sion The extension number cannot be Group duplicated in Programs 11 02 and Basic 11 07 Data Setup e 16 02 Depart ment Group Assign ment for Exten sions 16 03 Secon dary De part ment Group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Calling e Department Step Calling Programming Manual 2 67 Program 11 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering 11 09 Trunk Access Code Level IN Description Use Program 11 09 Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code The trunk access code can be set from 1 4 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11 01 This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line Caution The digit 9 is defined in Program 11 01 as Dial Type with the Number of Digits Required set to If you change the trunk access code in Program 11 09 you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11 01 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Access Dial Up to four digits Use this program to assign the tr
211. F OF CO CO DM olojo olol 07 0 0 ojoj ojl OC DY NIANI NINININI N NINI NM NM O Conditions None Programming Manual Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference e Flexible System Numbering Program 11 2 64 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 02 Extension Numbering Level IN Description Use Program 11 02 Extension Numbering to set the extension number The extension number can Program have up to eight digits The first second digit s of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 or Program 11 20 This allows an employee to move to a new location port and retain the same extension number 4 4 Input Data Extension Port Number 001 128 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Extension Number Dial Up to 8 digits Set up extension numbers for multiline tel Extension Port ephones single line telephones and IP tel Number Exten ephones sion Number 001 112 101 Extension number assignments cannot 212 V3 5 be duplicated in Programs 11 02 and Changed ahs 113 128 No Setting V3 5 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Calling e Flexible System Numbering e Intercom Programming Manual 2 65 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering
212. Gain Table assigned in Program 44 05 is activated e The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line For ARS F Route calls the CODEC gains defined in Programs 14 01 02 and 14 01 03 are not activated Input Data Gain Table Number 001 100 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Incoming Transmit 1 63 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 02 Incoming Receive 1 63 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 03 Outgoing Transmit 1 63 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 04 Outgoing Receive 1 63 32 0 dB 15 5 dB 15 5 dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual 2 397 Program 44 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Description Use Program 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS F Route feature ARS F Route has 10 time patterns These patterns are used in Programs 44 09 and 44 10 The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings Input Data Schedule Pattern Number 01 10 Item No Item Input Data 01 Time Number 01 20 Start Time 0000 2359 End Time 0000 2359 Mode 1 8 Default All Schedule Patterns 0 00 0 00 Mode 1 Example Pattern 1 0 00 8 00 18 00 22
213. ID Translation Number Conversion ssssssssssssereerirrrrrssssssrerrrerns 2 267 22 12 DID Intercept Ring OroUP seseina erae 2 270 22 13 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment 2 271 22 14 VRS Delayed Message for IRG ssesseserenerrnrrrnrrnrnrnnnreeseeeseeroreeeeeese 2 272 22 15 VRS Delayed Message for Department Group eeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 273 22 16 Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup 2 274 22 17 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern 2 275 22 18 Private Call Assignment Setup 2 22 22222 ccccceseneseeeeeeeeteeeeeees 2 276 Programming Manual ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 22 20 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID SUP isisisissssssscsssscsssasssiinssisscsissaissecesve 2 277 Program 23 Answer Features Set cece ceca cca csc cece cet caee cache ence ceneeetecnncniedeatansce 2 278 23 02 Call Pickup Groups asiiscittaisicatinnrsadietisannagatesgalisaniowsisarimradansand 2 278 23 03 Universal Answer Auto ANSWED cccccccceseesseecerneeeeteeseecceeeeeereeee 2 279 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 2 280 Program 24 Hold Transfer ace ie eee eee 2 281 24 01 7 System Options for AOIG va sisincinccsiesisemrtasnanbnudmunmucunmmnaroiand 2 281 a2 System Options for Transi iriennerien 2 282 20 05 Park CMD EE E E E EE AER O E 2 284 24 04 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup eeeeeeees 2 285 24 05 Department Group Transfe
214. IN Description Program Use Program 26 12 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific Parameter Table 2 6 Input Data Network Specific Parameter Table 1 16 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Called Party Number 0 System Default This setting is used by Programs 26 02 07 0 Type of Number Se 1 Unknown and 44 05 11 to determine ISDN element lection 2 International No 3 National No 4 Network Specific No 5 Subscriber No 6 Abbreviated No 02 Called Party number 0 System Default This setting is used by Programs 26 02 07 0 Numbering Plan Iden 1 Unknown and 44 05 11 to determine ISDN element tification Selection 2 ISDN Plan 3 Data Plan 4 Telex Plan 5 National Standard Plan 6 Private Plan Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 310 Program 26 ARS Service ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Level IN Description Use Program 30 01 DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles Program The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles The available options are e Regular Business Mode 0 e Hotel Mode 1 3 0 Input Data DSS Console Number 01 12 nk Item Input Data Default 01 DSS Operation Mode 0 Business Mode 0 1 Hotel Mode Conditions
215. IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Administer Mode Level 1 Default User No User Name Password Level Level Description 1 necam kK KKK 1 MF Manufacture Level Access to all system program 2 sltech 12345678 2 IN Installer Level Access to all IN level pro grams 3 ADMIN1 0000 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 Restricted Access 4 ADMIN2 9999 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 More Re stricted Access 2 530 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 User No User Name Password Level Level Description 5 USER1 1111 5 UA User Programming Administer Mode Lev el 1 Conditions e More than one extension can be in the programming mode Feature Cross Reference Program 90 None Programming Manual 2 531 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 03 Save Data Level SA Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 03 Save Data to save the programmed data on the CF Card This program should be used after changing the programmed data Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Save Data Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions e Before Uploading Customer Database please make sure you reset the system either
216. ISA call 23 Page Announce 0 64800 seconds This timer sets the maximum length 1200 31 01 02 ment Duration of Page announcements Affects External Paging only 24 Mobile Extension 1 64800 seconds 3 22 01 12 answer time 25 Mobile Extension 1 64800 seconds 15 20 01 16 callback time Conditions These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20 29 01 or 20 30 01 When the timer class is set to 0 the system wide timer is used All defaults are the same as the system wide timers Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 211 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 34 Remote Conference Group Setup Level SA Description Program Use Program 20 34 Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options 2 0 Input Data Remote Conference Group Number 1 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Conference Name Up to 12 characters Enter the name displayed at the time of a Group1 Conf1 Remote Conference This entry will display Group2 Conf2 on the keyset LCD Group3 Conf3 Group4 Conf4 02 Password 4 digits Fixed Define the password of a Remote Confer Group1 1111 0 9 wild charac ence Group2 2222 ter Group3 3333 Group4 4444 03 Max participants 0 32 Define the maximum number of partici 8 pants of a Remote Conference 0
217. If disabled 0 an extension user must dial a trunk access code e g 9 or press a line key before dialing 911 USA only 13 Alarm Ring Tim 0 1 64800 seconds Use this option to set the duration of 0 11 12 56 er E911 0 Off the E911 Alarm Ring Time If set for 20 08 16 0 the E911 Alarm does not ring 14 Forced Account 0 64800 seconds If the user does not enter the ac 3 Code Inter digit count code in the amount of time Timer specified in this program the call will be restricted 15 Outgoing Disable 0 Disable Off Enable or disable the Outgoing Dis 0 15 01 05 on Incoming Line 1 Enable On able on Incoming Line feature 21 01 16 Toll Restriction 21 01 17 80 03 01 16 Supervise Dial 0 64800 seconds With the Outgoing Disable on In 20 15 01 05 Detection Timer coming Line feature if dial tone is 21 01 16 not detected after the extension an 21 01 17 swers an incoming line the system 80 03 01 determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 17 Restriction Digit Digits 1 9 With the Outgoing Disable on In 4 15 01 05 in Outgoing Dis coming Line feature determine the 21 01 15 able on Incoming number of digits to be dialed before 21 01 16 Line the call should be disconnected 80 03 01 18 Reset Dial After 0 Disable Off Enable 1 or Disable 0 the ability 1 Failure of Trunk 1 Enable On to continue to dial codes or exten Access sions after receiving Trunk Busy This needs to be set to
218. In the default program only and use 2 digit codes All the other codes are single digit If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9 be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program Program 11 20 to define the codes Step 2 Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code you must tell the system how many digits comprise the code This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2 1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2 59 Step 3 Assign a function to the code selected After entering a code and specifying its length you must assign its function This is the Dial Type column in the Table 2 1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2 59 The choices are Dial Types Dial Type Descrip Related Program Note tion 0 Not Used 2 58 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Dial Types Dial Type Descrip tion Related Program Note Service Code 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator on page 2 70 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation on page 2 73 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access on page 2 77 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel on page 2 83 11 15 Ser
219. InMail either au tomatically saves or erases the message If the mailbox user hangs up before listen ing to the entire new message InMail re tains the message as a new message 06 Message Retention 0 99 Days 0 Indefinite Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages If a message is left in a Sub scriber Mailbox longer than this interval InMail deletes it 07 Recording Conversa tion Beep 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Rec Conv Beep Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep If enabled all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conver sation Record If disabled the voice prompt and beep do not occur When you disable the Conversation Record beep the following voice prompts do not occur while InMail records the conversation Recording followed by a beep That mailbox is full if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached You have reached the recording limit if the recorded message is too long Provides an additional Conversation Re cord beep This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0 64800 seconds To disable the Conversation Record beep enter 0 for this option 08 Message Waiting Lamp 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled
220. L1100 Feature Cross Reference None Program 84 Programming Manual 2 507 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 19 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Level Program 8 4 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of G 711 Au 1 10ms Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames 2 dio Frame 2 20ms When the voice is encoded using the PCM 3 30 ms Pulse Code Modulation method a unit is 4 40 ms a frame of 10ms 02 G 711 Silence Detec 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0 tion VAD Mode 1 Enable G 711 When there is silence the RTP packet is not sent 03 G 711 Type 0 A law Set the type of G 711 1 1 p law 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G 711 Jitter 20 Minimum Buffer 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average value of the G 711 Jitter 40 Standard Buffer 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G 711 Jitter 80 Maximum Buffer 07 G 729 Audio Frame 1 6 Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames 2 1 10 ms 2 20ms G 729 assumes the audio signal made by etc a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method 08 G 729 Silence Com 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0 pression VAD Mode 1 Enable G 729 When there is silence the RTP packet is not sent 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the minimum
221. L1100 Section 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SVS TEM issainisiccisiendisiscisncicrniiscisieisieussemainreien 2 1 Program 10 System Configuration Setup eeessesssssssssririrrrssssssssrrrrrerirrrrnrnneeessene 2 3 19 01 Time and Date asinn 2 3 Toa Location lt oense EE 2 4 TOSS ETU SOUD eae EASA NEN 2 5 10 04 Music On Hold SOs wcccinsccccadensacsccacsenscssancaconnseaceaeacasescnsensnssesensieedenees 2 9 19 08 5 Pre Ringing Setup srasni enaa 2 10 10 09 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup cccceccceseceereennteeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Ode CPU NGWO SETUD ar sia Gi eideleraeiauneleu ule E 2 13 10 13 IN DHCP Server Setup cccccccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneneees 2 16 10 14 Managed Network SetUPsrnsisnnsasnssnnsasnnsn aaa 2 17 10 13 Ghent Iinormaton SetiD sssri E 2 18 10 16 Option Information SENG sscicisaaiasaireriaisiaisisiarinalennareaieiads 2 19 10 19 VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeereees 2 22 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment ccccccccecccsssceeseeesteeeeseseeeeeees 2 23 10 23 SIP System Interconnection SetUp ssssssrrrrirreereresserernrerrreesssesnseesssees 2 25 10 24 Daylight Savings cr MU isisisi ians ENNE 2 26 10 26 IP System Operation Setup ccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaneeeeeees 2 27 19 27 7 IP System D nnns ETE AA 2 28 10 28 SIP System Information Setup eirean 2 29 10 29 SIP Server Information SSUB
222. NEC SL1100 Programming Manual A50 031167 003 NA ISSUE 4 e Copyright NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications functions or features at any time without notice NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Copyright 2011 2014 NEC Corporation Printed in Japan ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING ccccccccccccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 1 Section2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL cinerascens 1 1 Section 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Section 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE viscsiiccecrcisaressasinsaisesassaracisiieiessesiatierexs 1 2 Section 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS 1 3 Section 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES 1 4 Section 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING sssrssrrrnrrerererinrirsrrennruessseeeeeersns 1 4 Section 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN c ccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Section 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN CAPACITIES ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Section 10 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER ti cmciswnsaisuinnmnmelaumnianeninaiennnns 1 8 Chapter 2 Programming the S
223. No Setting V1 5 8 digit Changed 19 Key Touch Tone 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 724 On Off 8 digit 20 Change Incom 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 720 15 02 ing CO and ICM 8 digit Ring Tones 21 Check Incoming 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 711 Ring Tones 8 digit 22 Extension Name 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 700 15 01 Programming 8 digit 23 Second Call for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 679 DID DISA DIL 8 digit 24 Change Station 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 677 20 13 28 Class of Service 8 digit Allows an extension user to change the COS of another extension Must be allowed in Program 20 13 28 25 Automatic Trans 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 602 20 11 17 fer Setup for 8 digit 24 05 Each Extension Group 26 Automatic Trans 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 603 fer Cancellation 8 digit for Each Exten sion Group 27 Destination of 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 604 20 11 17 Automatic Trans 8 digit 24 05 fer Each Exten sion Group 28 Delayed Transfer 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 605 20 11 17 for Every Exten 8 digit 24 05 sion Group 24 02 08 29 Delayed Transfer 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 606 20 11 17 Cancellation for 8 digit Each Extension Group 30 DND Setup for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 607 Each Extension 8 digit Group 31 DND Cancella 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 608 tion for Each Ex 8 dig
224. OOR 2 Door Box Name 3 DOOR 3 Door Box Name 4 DOOR 4 Door Box Name 5 DOOR 5 Door Box Name 6 DOOR 6 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box Programming Manual 2 335 Program 34 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 01 E amp M Tie Line Basic Setup Level IN Description Use Program 34 01 E amp M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E amp M Tie line Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 DID E amp M Start 0 2nd Dial Tone Set the start signaling mode for DID 1 22 02 Signaling 1 Wink and Tie trunks DID and Tie trunks 2 Immediate can use either immediate start or 3 Delay wink start signaling 02 Receive Dial 0 DP 1 10 09 Type for E amp M Tie 1 DTMF Line 2 MF 03 E amp M Dial In 0 Specify Extension Determine if the incoming Tie Line 0 22 11 Mode Number Intercom call should be directed as an inter 1 Use Conversion com call or if it should follow the DID Table NTT Translation Table in Program 22 11 04 E amp M Line Dial 0 Disable No Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send 1 Tone 1 Enable Yes dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up Enter 0 if the Tie Line should not send dial tone 05 System Toll Re 0 System Determine if an incoming Tie Line 0 21 05 striction 1 Each Extension call should be subject to
225. OR OUP O DUONG rasa EE 2 350 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group ccsccscccccceteveetierccicreuceteverencaue 2 353 35 04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group6 ccceeeeeee 2 354 35 05 Account Code Setup cccccceccceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeaaneaaaeeaennseeees 2 355 35 06 Verified Account Code Tables sciciciesisitsisssuisrctsssrscuesasticunicuesiaverncae 2 357 Program 40 lt Voice Recording ay SU ices tcc ti cep aeea 2 358 40 01 Voice Mail Basie SetU rsrsr aieia aiiai 2 358 40 07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 2 359 40 10 Voice Announcement Service Option ccccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 360 40 11 Preamble Message Assignmenit ccssceccceeeseeeeeeececeeereeeeeeeeeeeee 2 362 PA Se iS ACD SE OPi Ana AEAEE ARAETA 2 363 41 01 System Options Tor ACD sreci e EE 2 363 41 02 ACD Group and Agent Assignment cccceseeseeteeteetetneeeeeeees 2 364 41 03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group 2 365 41 05 ACD Agent Work Schedules ccccccssesscsessssssessseseesseeseeseee 2 366 41 06 Trunk Work Seg 2 eee Ores Pe Ee PPro nel yer ere eee rene re 2 367 41 07 ACD Weekly Schedule Setup 0 ccccccicceseesseedeneeesssesnetectsneneee 2 368 41 08 lt ACO Overlow ODIONS isece EEE S 2 369 41 09 ACD Overflow Table SOU ssiassisiesisnustsrsiaisisisinsneimatiqninalsies 2 371 41 11 VRS Delay Announcement
226. Off Operation 57 General Purpose LED 001 100 Red On amp Off Indication 58 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set Call Immediate Number 01 32 Off Cancel 59 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set Call Delay Number 01 32 Off Cancel 60 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink Red Set Call DND Number 01 32 Off Cancel 62 Flash Key None 63 Outgoing Call Without On Red Mode enabled Caller ID ISDN 66 CTI V3 0 Deleted On Red CTI active 72 Keypad Facility Key 73 Keypad Hold Key 74 Keypad Retrieve Key 75 Keypad Conference Key 76 Application Key None 77 Voice Mail In Skin Extension Number or Fast Blink Red Existing new message Pilot Number 8 digits 78 Conversation Recording 0 Conversation re Fast Blink Red Recording InOskin VM cording 1 Delete Re record ing 2 Delete 79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or On Red Setup All calls In Skin Pilot Number 8 digits Fast Blink Red Setup No answer calls 125msec on 125msec off 125msec on 625msec off Red Setup busy calls Slow Blink Red Setup busy noans calls Programming Manual 2 315 Program 30 Program 30 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 80 Tandem Ringing Set Up 0 Cancel On Red Master Side Key 1 Set Slow Blink Re
227. On 13 04 12 Night mode switching Other 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 10 12 Group 1 Turn On 13 DSS Key Assignment 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 30 03 1 Turn On 14 Doorphone Ringing Assign 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 32 02 ment 1 Turn On 15 Extension Numbering 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 02 1 Turn On 16 Extension Name 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 01 01 1 Turn On 17 Night mode switching Own 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 10 01 Group 1 Turn On 2 584 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 18 Call Forward Immediate No 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 11 01 Answer Both Ring 1 Turn On 11 11 03 11 11 05 19 Call Forward Busy 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 11 02 1 Turn On 20 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 11 20 1 Turn On 15 02 02 21 Internal Incoming Ring Tone 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 11 20 1 Turn On 15 02 03 22 Display Language Selection 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 02 01 1 Turn On Program 23 Toll Restriction Override 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 21 07 Password 1 Turn On 24 User Programming Pass 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 90 28 word 1 Turn On 25 Programmable Function Key 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 07 1 Turn On 26 Virtual Extension Ring As 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 09 signment 1 Turn On 27 One Touch Key Assignment 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 14 1 Turn On 28
228. Operation 0 Off Class 01 15 1 On 1 03 Room Status Output 0 Off Class 01 15 1 On 1 04 DND Setting for Other 0 Off Class 01 15 Extension 1 On 1 05 Wake up Call Setting 0 Off Class 01 15 for Other Extension 1 On 1 06 Room Status Change 0 Off Class 01 15 for Other Extension 1 On 1 07 Restriction Class 0 Off Class 01 15 Changing for Other 1 On 1 Extension 08 Room to Room Call 0 Off Class 01 15 Restriction 1 On 1 09 DND Setting for Own 0 Off Class 01 15 Extension 1 On 1 10 Wake Up Call Setting 0 Off Class 01 15 for Own Extension 1 On 1 11 Change Room Status 0 Off Class 01 15 for Own Extension 1 On 1 12 SLT Room Monitor 0 Off Enable 1 or disable 0 a single line tele Class 01 15 1 0n phone ability to use Room Monitor 1 Conditions None Programming Manual 2 383 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service e Hotel Motel Program 42 2 384 Program 42 Hotel Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN Description SL1100 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 04 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes Use Program 42 04 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one digit service codes which are assigned in 42 02 01 For each Department Calling Group 01 32 you enter the destination for each single digit code 1 9 0 The destination can be any code with up to eight digits such as an extension number or access code
229. Programming One Touch Keys 15 17 CO Message Waiting Indication 15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions 20 06 Class of Service for Extension 20 29 Timer Class for Extensions 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extension 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extension 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions 2 614 Program 92 Copy Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program Number Program Name 21 11 Hotline Assignment 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21 18 IP Trunk H 323 Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension 22 04 Incoming Ring Group Setup 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 23 02 Call Pickup Group Program 23 03 Ringing Line Preference 23 04 Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension 24 03 Park Hold Group Assignment 9 2 24 09 Call Forward Split Settings 26 04 ARS Class of Service 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 41 02 ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group V1 5 Added 42 02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup 82 14 Handset Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone 90 28 User Programming Password Setup 92 05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup Conditions None F
230. Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Program 11 2 82 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 Level IN Description L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel Use Program 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Hotel Motel feature You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 11 12 11 15 and 11 16 The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42 02 The following chart shows The number of each code 01 19 e The function of the Service Code The type of telephones that can use the Service Code e The default entry Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Set DND for Own Ex 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 627 tension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set DND for own extension 02 Cancel DND for Own 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 628 Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel DND for own extension 03 Set DND for Other Ex 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 629 tension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set DND for an other extension 04 Cancel DND for Other 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 630 Extension
231. Reference e Class of Service Programming Manual 2 179 Program 20 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 09 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Level IN Description Use Program 20 09 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service to define the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Second Call for 0 Off 2nd call will not Turns off or on the extension ability COS 01 15 1 DID be allowed to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL E amp M 1 On 2nd call is al DISA DIL or tie line caller Override lowed i With this option set to 1 the des tination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination exten sion does not have a trunk key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the ex tension but has not yet been an swered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 02 Caller ID Display 0 Off Turns off or on the Caller ID display COS 01 15 1 1 On at an extension V1 5 Changed 04 Notification for 0 Off Determines whether or not an ex COS 01 15 0 Incoming Call 1 On tension display shows Check List List Existence when an incoming call is missed by a user 05
232. Required Dial Type Default New Default New 1X 3 2 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Programming Manual 2 59 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Default New Default New 2X 3 2 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 Program 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 1 1 27 0 0 28 0 0 29 0 0 20 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 3X 4 2 31 0 0 32 0 0 33 0 0 34 0 0 35 0 0 36 0 0 37 0 0 38 0 0 39 0 0 30 0 0 3x 0 0 3 0 0 a oa OIG GO GOG 0 0 7 0 0 O Of WwW oO oO 1 o o o o o o o o 2 60 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Default New Default New 4x 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E pE s E sM Ee 0 0 0 0 OO O
233. Route 2 390 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table Level IN Description When Program 44 02 02 is set to type 3 use Program 44 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table to set Program the dial extension analysis table These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1 250 table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension Table Area 1 4 to be searched If the received digits are not identified in tables 1 250 the F Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used 44 Input Data Extension Table Area Number 1 4 Dial Analysis Table Number 1 252 Dial Analysis Table Number 1 250 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Dial Up to 36 digits No Setting Digits 1 9 0 Press Line Key 1 for wild character 02 ARS F Route Select Table Number 0 100 ARS F Route Table Number 0 With Program 44 01 set to 0 Program 44 05 is checked With Program 44 01 set to 1 Program 44 04 is checked Dial Analysis Table Number 251 Item Item Input Data Default No 03 ARS F Route Select Table Number 0 100 ARS F Route Table Number 0 With Program 44 01 set to 0 Program 44 05 is checked With Program 44 01 set to 1 Program 44 04 is checked Dial Analys
234. S Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Notification 0 Off 0 1 On 02 Notification Begin Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 03 Notification End Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 04 Notification Type 0 Undefined 1 1 Voice 2 Pager 05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 08 Notification Security 0 Off 1 1 On 09 Notification Day of week Sunday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 10 Notification Day of week Monday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 11 Notification Day of week Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 12 Notification Day of week Wednes 0 Disabled 1 day V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 13 Notification Day of week Thurs 0 Disabled 1 day V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 14 Notification Day of week Friday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 15 Notification Day of week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled Programming Manual 2 445 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 47 2 446 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 23 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 23 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options to define the IntraMail Group Program Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Optio
235. S F Route Service Description Use Program 26 01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS F Route to define the system options for Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 ARS Service 0 Disabled ARS Enable or disable ARS 0 26 02 service is OFF 26 03 1 Enabled ARS serv 26 04 ice is ON 02 Network Outgo 0 64800 seconds With Networking this time replaces 30 20 03 04 ing Inter Digit 20 03 04 when determining if all ARS Time network protocol digits have been received If ARS is enabled at Site B this time can be programmed for 5 500 ms at Site A If ARS is disa bled and Site B is using F Route for outbound dialing this time should be programmed for 30 three sec onds at Site A 03 ARS Misdialed 0 Route to Trunk If a user dials a number not pro 0 21 02 Number Han Group 1 grammed in ARS this option deter dling 1 Play Warning Tone mines if the system should route to Dialer over Trunk Group 1 or play error tone 06 Class of Service 0 Disabled ARS This enables disables the ARS class 0 26 02 Match Access service is OFF of service settings 1 Enabled ARS serv ice is ON 07 F Route Access 0 F Route 0 26 02 COS Reference 1 ARS 44 05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual 2 305 Program 26 Program 26
236. SUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 09 SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 82 09 SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data when Program 82 07 is set to 4 8 2 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 B1 Filter Setup 1 0 255 105 02 B1 Filter Setup 2 0 255 122 03 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 166 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 42 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 227 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 46 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 169 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 242 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 151 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 41 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 122 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 135 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 168 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 112 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 45 16 B2 Filter Setup 2 0 255 1 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0 255 14 18 Z Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 178 19 Z Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 162 20 Z Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 53 21 Z Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 83 22 Z Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 42 23 Z Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 171 24 Z Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 194 25 Z Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 43 26 Z Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 106 27 Z Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 163 Programming Manual 2 485 Program
237. Set the Call Waiting Caller ID 1 14 02 10 Caller ID V4 0 1 On Added Programming Manual 2 113 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 14 2 114 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 04 Behind PBX Setup Level IN Description Use Program 14 04 Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX There is Program one item for each mode Input Data 1 4 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related Pro No gram 01 Type of Connection 0 Stand Alone Trunk 0 22 02 1 Behind PBX PBX 3 CTX assume 9 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Placing Programming Manual 2 115 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup Level IN Description 14 05 Trunk Group Use Program 14 05 Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group When users dial up the trunk group they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item No Item Input Data 01 Trunk Group Number 0 25 Priority Number 001 084 Default Trunk Port Group Priority 1 1 1
238. Set the FAX Relay Mode 0 1 T 38 V4 0 Changed 2 Path Through Mode has more 2 Path Through V4 0 detail setting at PRG 84 32 Added V4 0 Added 51 T 38 Protocol 0 R U V1 5 1 mode Changed 1 UIR V1 5 Changed 2 RTP V1 5 Changed 3 UDPTL V1 5 Changed 52 Fax Max Rate 1 V 27ter 4800 bps 5 3 V 29 9600 bps 5 V 17 14400 bps 56 Low Speed Data 0 2 0 Redundancy 57 High Speed Data 0 2 0 Redundancy 58 TCF Handling 0 Local 1 1 Network 61 T 38 RTP Format 96 127 100 Payload Number 62 DTMF Level 0 VoIPDB Unit 0 mode 1 Main Soft 63 DTMF Level High 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm 64 DTMF Level Low 1 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm Programming Manual 2 501 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 65 VAD Negotiation 0 Disable This PRG is used to determine the 0 on SDP Future 1 Enable VAD determination method setting V2 0 Added VAD information on SDP This PRG is effective when VAD is enabled on each codec G 711 and G 729 are targets at this time 66 Voice Band Data 0 Disable This PRG is used for setting VBD to 0 15 03 03 VBD Future 1 Enable is Enable Disable V2 0 Added This PRG is necessary to set the 1 Special in PRG15 03 03 for target Program terminal 67 VBD Payload 96 127 This PRG is specifies the Payload 97 15 03 03 Type Future Type number used by VBD 8 V2 0 Added Con
239. Sets local subnet mask 0 0 0 0 10 46 14 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 Conditions None Programming Manual 2 51 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 2 52 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 60 Audio Port Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 60 Audio Port Setup to defines which audio port on the 084M packages are used Program for BGM External MOH Input Data 1 0 Audio Port Number 1 BGM 2 External MOH Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Slot No 0 Not Used Select which audio port on the 084M pack Audio Port 1 1stKSU ages are used for BGM External MOH BGM 0 V1 5 4 2nd KSU Audio Port Number 1 BGM Changed 7 3rd KSU Audio Port Number 2 External MOH Audio Port2 Ex ternal MOH 1 V1 5 Changed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 53 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 61 Relay Port Set
240. Setup 10 50 License Information Level Description Use Program 10 50 License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system Program Input Data 1 0 Feature Code Number 000 9999 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 License Name Read Only Character 02 License Quantity Read Only 0 32767 03 Campaign License Quantity Read Only 0 32767 04 Campaign License Remaining Read Only Days 0 9999 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 47 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 51 PRI T1 Selection of PRI Level IN Description Use Program 10 51 PRI T1 Selection of PRI to select whether the unit works as PRI or T1 Input Data Slot Number 01 15 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 PRI T1 Selection 0 PRI Chose whether the unit works as PRI or 0 PRI 1 T1 T1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 48 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 52 Free Demo License Information Level IN Description Use Program 10 52 Free Demo License Information to display information on free of charge Demo Program license Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Remaining days of Free Demo Li Read Only c
241. Setup 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment Level IN Description Use Program 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port address etc for communicating to external equipment Input Data Type of External Equipment 1 CTI Server 2 ACD MIS V4 0 Added 4 Networking System V1 5 Added 5 SMDR Output 6 DIM Output 9 1st Party CTI 11 O amp M Server 12 Traffic Report Output 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 14 IP DECT Directory Access V3 0 Added Item Item Input Data Default No 01 TCP Port 0 65535 External Device 1 CTI Server 8181 V3 0 Changed External Device 2 ACD MIS 4000 V4 0 Added External Device 4 Net working System 30000 V1 5 Added External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 8282 V3 0 Changed External Device 11 O amp M Server 8080 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 V3 0 Added 03 Keep Alive Time 1 255 seconds 30 Conditions None Programming Manual 2 23 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 2 24 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 23 SIP System Interconnection Setup
242. Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories Station Routing or Master You can also set up Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes Input Data Station Mailbox Number 001 128 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Mailbox Type 0 None Use this option to enable or disable the Mailbox 1 64 1 Personal mailbox An extension mailbox is not ac 1 2 Group cessible when it is disabled even though Mailbox 65 its stored messages and configuration are 128 1 V3 5 retained in memory If disabled a user Changed pressing Message initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their mailbox num ber A voice prompt then announces That mailbox does not exist To make programming easier consider associating a mailbox number with a sta tion port For example mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1 which in turn corre sponds to extension 101 02 Mailbox Number Up to eight digits Use this option to select the extension Mailbox 1 101 number associated with the mailbox you Mailbox 2 64 are programming Normally mailbox 1 102 164 should use Mailbox Number 101 mailbox Mailbox 65 112 2 should use Mailbox Number 201 101 165 212 etc V3 5 Changed To make programming easier consider Mailbox 113 associating a mailbox number with a sta 128 250 265 tion port For example mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1 which in turn corre sponds to extension 101 V3 5 Cha
243. Toll Re striction If it is set to O then it will use the Program 21 05 13 if it is set to 1 then it will used Programs 21 05 01 21 05 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 336 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 02 E amp M Tie Line Class of Service Level IN Description Use Program 34 02 E amp M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line there Program are 15 Tie line Classes of Service The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20 14 For each Tie line make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data 34 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Class 1 15 1 20 14 Conditions Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 337 Program 34 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 03 Trunk Group Routing for E amp M Tie Lines Level IN Description Use Program 34 03 Trunk Group Routing for E amp M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 01 25 chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 07 If the system has Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route dialing 9 accesses ARS Make a separate entry for each Tie Line for each Night Service Mode
244. Toll Restriction 10 20 08 06 Override Time Override codes the system re 21 07 moves Toll Restriction from the ex tension for this time 08 Preset Dial Dis 0 64800 seconds 10 play Hold Time 09 Ringdown Exten 0 64800 seconds A Ringdown extension automatically 5 20 08 09 sion Timer Hot calls its programmed destination af 21 11 line Start ter this time 2 226 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 10 Dial Digits for 0 36 If this option is programmed with an 0 Toll Restriction entry other than 0 a call does not Path have a talk path unless the user di als at least the number of digits en tered in this option when placing an outgoing call This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911 USA on ly Since it is only a 3 digit number the call does not have a talk path preventing the emergency dispatch er from hearing the caller This op tion should be kept at its default set ting of 0 to prevent any problems with dialing 911 USA only 11 Inter Digit Time 0 60 seconds 0 for Toll Restric tion Path Control 12 Dial E911 Rout 0 Trunk Access Code If enabled 1 an extension user 1 ing Without Required can dial 911 USA only without first Trunk Access 1 Trunk Access Code dialing a trunk access code or Not Required pressing a line key
245. Trunk Name 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 14 01 01 1 Turn On 29 Automatic Transfer per 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 10 06 Trunk 1 Turn On 11 10 07 30 SPD Area No 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 10 08 1 Turn On 24 04 31 Telephone Data Copy 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 92 01 1 Turn On 32 Dial in Name 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 22 11 03 1 Turn On 33 LCD Line Key Name Assign 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 15 20 ment 1 Turn On 34 IntraMail Station Mailbox Op 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 47 02 tions 1 Turn On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance Programming Manual 2 585 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 39 Virtual Loop Back Port Reset Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 39 Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Virtual Loop Back Reset Reset Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e PC Programming 2 586 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 41 Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data Level IN Description Use Program 90 41 Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS Server address the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roa
246. UE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 17 InMail Port 0 113 V3 5 Changed When using V3 5 or higher software the In 0 Can only use the port Mail can be assigned to ports 113 128 and numbers provided in the will not affect the total station and trunk description section ports In addition when the SL1100 is de faulted with an InMail CF mounted the In Mail is automatically assigned to ports 113 128 and when a SL1100 is upgraded to V3 5 or higher software the InMail ports can be moved to 113 128 The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 49 53 57 61 65 69 73 77 81 85 89 93 97 101 105 109 113 Only able to set 61 113 with V3 5 or higher 18 Play PAD Control 1 63 32 15 5 dBm 15 5 dBm 19 Record PAD Control 1 63 32 for Networking 15 5 dBm 15 5 dBm Conditions e When changing 47 01 01 or 47 01 02 a system reset is required for the new setting to take effect Feature Cross Reference None 2 410 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 Level IN Description Program 47 SL1100 InMail 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox Options Use Program 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station extension mailbox Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes Normally InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1 64 should correspond to extensions 101 164
247. User ID Setup to set the 6 digit DISA password for each user There are 15 users each with one 6 digit password Input Data DISA User Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Password Dial Fixed six digits No Setting 0 9 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 298 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 09 Class of Service for DISA Users Level IN Description Use Program 25 09 Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each Program user When a DISA caller enters a password defined in Program 25 08 the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20 14 When programming DISA Class of Service make one entry for each Night Service mode 2 5 Input Data DISA User Number 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Function Class 1 15 1 Conditions e DISA Class of Service cannot be 0 Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 299 Program 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 10 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level IN Description Use Program 25 10 Trunk Grou
248. When enabled if an ISDN call forwards out 0 sage on Forward 1 Enable of the system a Progress Message will be V3 0 Added sent for the initial call Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e ISDN Compatibility 2 204 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 26 Multiplier for Charging Cost Level IN Description Use Program 20 26 Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each Program extension service class Input Data 2 0 Service Class 01 15 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Value 100 500 100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 205 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 28 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 28 Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk Conversation 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Conversation 0 9 x Input the code that can be dialed to No Setting 14 01 25 Continue Code Set for one digit only continue the conversation after the 20 28 03 Trunk to Trunk Release Warning 24 02 07 Tone is heard 24 02 10 25 07 07 25 07 08 02 Conversation 0 9 Input the code that can be dialed to No Setting 14 01 25 Disconnect Code S
249. When not receiving any response 4 Timer V3 0 Add within this timer setting the system ed determines that the SIP terminal is out of range When set to 0 timer is invalid Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Transfer Programming Manual 2 283 Program 24 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 03 Park Group Level IN Description Use Program 24 03 Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in own group Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Park Group Num 1 64 Assign an extension to a Park 1 15 07 01 ber Group The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Park 2 284 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 04 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup Level IN Description Use Program 24 04 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Description Related No Program 01 Spee
250. Work Schedules Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 41 06 Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks For each Work Schedule 1 4 designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods After you set up the schedules assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 This is the same 4 1 program used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules Input Data ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Work Period 1 8 Start 0000 Mode Number End 0000 Start Time 0000 2359 End Time 0000 2359 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Programming Manual 2 367 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 07 ACD Weekly Schedule Setup Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 07 ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules 1 4 to days of the week The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules Program 41 05 and the Trunk Work Schedules Program 41 06 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Day Number 1 Sunday 0 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Time Pattern 0 4 0 No ACD Conditions None Feature Cros
251. a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1 You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes To clear any previously programmed key press 000 to erase any displayed code Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Default Settings Line Key Function Number Additional Data LKO1 01 Trunk Line Key 1 LK12 01 Trunk Line Key 12 LK13 0 No setting 0 LK24 0 No setting 0 Item No Item Input Data Additional Data 01 Line Key Number 1 24 Refer to Table 2 2 Function Number List on page 2 141 Function Number 0 99 0 99 Refer to Table 2 2 Function Number Normal Function Code Service Code List on page 2 141 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default Default Programmable keys 1 8 are Trunk Line keys key 1 Trunk Line 1 key 2 Trunk Line 2 etc All other programmable keys are undefined Function Number List 2 140 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Table 2 2 Function Number List 1 Normal Function Code 00 99 00 99 Service Code 751 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 01 DSS One Touch_ Extension number On Red DSS Ext Busy or any numbers up Off DSS Ext Idle DND External DND Transfer to 36 digits CFW Busy CFW Noans CFW Busy Noans CFW Bo
252. aaeaaaesaeaees 2 579 Programming Manual ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 90 35 Wizard Programming Level Setup iisisisisssssssccssacisseissarisisissasesisisvsisene 2 580 90 36 Firmware Update Time Settings ci cece seetncs ac ectestcnntbseiecaeieteansce 2 581 90 37 7 Set Temporary LIGSISS i sciinsibicicdizedicnniisachiseuieriiiammincaneaanieanisnanse 2 583 90 38 User Programming Data Level Setup 0 ccccccecetereeeeseeeeeeeseee 2 584 90 39 lt Virtual Loop Back POTlUReESL siinicisusiesieeisineisineseiseidvivasterssis neivien 2 586 90 41 Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data cceeeeeeeee 2 587 90 42 DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information 2 588 90 43 Deleting Terminal License of DR700 2 eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 2 589 90 44 Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface c 0c0sseeeeeeee 2 590 90 45 Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone 2 591 90 50 System Alarm Display Setupy sisisisiciccsisccsssicsticutanteencsiaveatistauiseeisaas 2 592 90 51 Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange 2 593 90 52 le AGE SIVE aiaa A E T 2 594 90 53 System Alarm eee ee ee elles et ee nee nes fuer ani ener eee re 2 595 90 54 PC Web ProgramimiNg ssccncsiceoricsnicimrcianeusreeeiauiwiausuiabanielenwianaiaae 2 596 90 59 lt Free Ble gg Laere ne eee ee eee 2 597 PA NTF OSUD aaa irora 2 598 90 57 Backup Recovery Oa ccc ina ce 2 599 90 58 Rest
253. able Number 001 025 Priority Order Number 1 4 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Trunk Group Routing 0 Not Set Refer below 14 01 07 001 025 Trunk group No 14 05 101 104 100 Networking System No V1 5 15 01 02 Added 21 02 1001 1025 1000 Route Table No Programming Manual 2 117 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Default Route No Order Data Route 1 1 Trunk group 1 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified Bil Ww N Route 2 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified Bl wl N Program 14 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified AJOJ N Route 25 0 Not specified 0 Not specified Bl wl N Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 118 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 07 Trunk Access Map Setup Level IN Description Use Program 14 07 Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps This sets an extension access options for trunks For example an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access There are 084 Access Maps with all 084 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access An extension can use one of the maps you
254. able Select whether to compress silence 0 Compression 1 Enable with G 726 When there is silence Mode the RTP packet is not sent 2 500 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 40 G 726 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 30 fer Minimum Buffer of G 726 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between pack ets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed 41 G 726 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the average G 726 Jitter Buffer 60 fer Standard 42 G 726 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the maximum G 726 Jitter Buf 120 fer Maximum fer 43 iLBC Audio 2 20 ms Maximum number of i LBC Audio 3 Frame 3 30 ms Frames iLBC assumes the frame of 4 40ms 10 ms is a unit 45 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 30 Minimum Buffer of iLBC is set Jitter is the variation in the time between pack ets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed 46 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer 60 Standard 47 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer 120 Maximum 48 ILBC Payload 96 127 The payload number of iLBC is set 98 Number However the same number as Item 31 cannot be set 49 RTP Filter 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 50 Fax Relay mode 0 Disable
255. abled COM port should be set in Program and sent out of the LAN 10 21 02 or 15 02 19 port 03 Header Language 0 English Specify the language in which the SMDR 0 1 German header should be printed 2 French 3 Italian 4 Spanish 04 Omit Digits 0 24 0 Not applied The number of digits entered in this option 0 does not print on the SMDR report For ex ample if the entry is 10 the first 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR re port 05 Minimum Digits 0 24 0 Not applied Outgoing calls must be at least this num 0 ber of digits for inclusion in the SMDR re port 06 Minimum Call Dura 0 65535 seconds 0 The duration of the call must be at least 0 tion All this time to be included on the SMDR re port 07 Minimum Ring Time 0 65535 seconds 0 A call must ring for at least this time to be 0 For Incoming Calls All included on the SMDR report 08 Format Selection 0 Format1 Type North 0 America 1 Format2 Type Over seas Conditions None 2 348 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference e Station Message Detail Recording Program 35 Programming Manual 2 349 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 02 SMDR Output Options Level IN Description Use Program 35 02 SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR Station Message Detail Recording output options for each of the eight SMDR ports Refer to the followi
256. acters 1 _ I 3 lt AAAAAAGEEio0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G l g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 amp 66UaaeOUaEOB Enter characters lt gt TLOQ GE Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Input Data Internal Paging Group Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Internal Paging Group Up to 12 Characters Assign name to Internal Paging Groups Refer below Name i e Page Zones The system shows the name you program on the telephone dis play 2 324 Program 31 Paging Setup SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Default Item 01 Internal Paging Group Name Extension Paging Group Name 01 Group 1 02 Group 2 32 Group 32 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Paging Internal Programming Manual 2 325 Program 31 Program 31 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 04
257. age for Wake Up Calls You 0 sage Assignment 0 No setting must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above 03 Wake Up Call No An 0 No Transfer 0 swer 1 Transfer to the Oper ator 04 Setup Message Mode 0 Confirmation Tone 0 for Wake Up Call Ho 1 VAU Message tel Mode 2 Time Stamp VAU Message 05 Wake Up Call Mes 0 100 0 sage Assignment 0 No setting 06 Flexible Room Status 0 Off When PRG42 01 06 is set to on any room 0 V2 0 Added 1 On status change from any status can be made Ex Hotel Status Code 4 gt 3 Hotel Status Code 4 gt 4 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Programming Manual 2 381 Program 42 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup Level IN Description Use Program 42 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel Motel extensions Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Hotel Mode 0 Normal If you want an extension to operate in the 0 1 Hotel Hotel Motel mode enter 1 If you want the telephone to operate in the business mode enter 0 02 Toll Restriction Class 1 15 Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class 1 When Check In when it is checked in The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes 1 15 The entry you
258. al Class No3 1 21 06 03 lowed for outgoing calls Class No4 2 Class No5 3 05 Common Permit 0 Unassign No com It chooses whether the table set up Class No1 8 21 06 04 Code Table mon permit table ap by 21 06 04 is referred to or not re 15 0 plied ferred to Class No2 7 1 1 Assign Table in PRG 21 06 04 is ap plied 06 Common Re 0 Unassign No com It chooses whether the table set up Class No1 6 21 06 05 striction Table mon restrict table ap by 21 06 05 is referred to or not re 15 0 plied ferred to Class No2 5 1 1 Assign Table in PRG 21 06 05 is ap plied 07 Permit Code Ta 0 No Permit Table Set the tables 1 4 when referring Class No1 2 6 21 06 06 ble Assigned to the table set up by 21 06 06 15 0 1 4 Permit Tables 1 Class No3 1 4 assigned in PRG Class No4 2 21 06 06 Class No5 3 08 Restriction Table 0 No Permit Table Set the tables 1 4 when referring 0 21 06 07 Assigned to the table set up by 21 06 07 1 4 Restrict Tables 1 4 assigned in PRG 21 06 07 2 232 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup IN ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Restriction for 0 Does Not Restrict Use this option to enable disable 0 Common Speed 1 Following Resitric Toll Restriction for Common Speed Dials tion Check Dialing numbers If enabl
259. am 10 12 CPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway addresses Caution If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed the system must be reset for the changes to take affect Input Data Item No Item Input Data Description Defaul t 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Set for CPU 192 168 0 10 02 Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all Host Addresses are 0 If the network section is 0 127 128 0 191 255 192 0 0 223 255 255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid 255 255 255 0 03 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Assign the default gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 Programming Manual 2 13 Program 10 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 It
260. am 12 Night Mode Setup 12 01 Night Mode Function Setup Level IN Description Use Program 12 01 Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options Refer to the following chart for a description of each option its range and default setting Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Manual Night 0 Off Manual Night Allow Prevent a activating Night 1 11 10 01 Mode Switching Mode changes are not Service by dialing a service code allowed 1 On Manual Night Mode changes are al lowed 02 Automatic Night 0 Off Automatic According to a preset schedule en 0 12 02 Mode Switching Night Mode disabled able or disable Automatic Night 12 03 1 On Automatic Service for the system Night Mode enabled 2 Even if the operation mode is changed manually the operation mode changes according to the schedule set up Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 91 Program 12 Program 12 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns Level SA Description Use Program 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Switching Each Mode Group has 10 patterns These patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer Settings
261. ansfer to an alternate destination a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode make an entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Group Number 0 Disconnect 0 22 04 01 25 Incoming Ring Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM V1 5 Added 104 Assign the Speed Dial Number V3 0 Add ed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 292 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 05 VRS DISA Error Message Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 25 05 VRS DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to Program be used as the Automated Attendant error message For each VRS DISA trunk that the VRS answers enter the VRS message 1 100 the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly If you enter 0 i e no error message the call reroutes according to Programs 25 03 and 25 04 2 5 For each trunk make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 VRS Message Number 0 100 0 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 293 Program
262. any calls as calls If a call is delivered to the system you have available when the limit has been reached the out trunks side caller will receive a busy tone 09 Music on Hold Source 0 IC MOH Port 0 1 BGM Port 2 268 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 11 Incoming Ring Group 0 Disable Calls will Enable 1 or disable 0 each conversa 1 Transfer not be routed to PRG tion tables ability to follow the Ring Group 22 12 programming defined in Program 1 Enable Calls will be 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group If routed to PRG 22 12 Program 22 11 05 DID Translation Num ber Conversion Transfer Destination Number 1 and Program 22 11 06 DID Translation Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 are set the priority of transferring is in this order Program 22 11 05 then Program 22 11 06 then if Program 22 11 11 is enabled the calls will overflow from Transfer Destination Num ber 2 to the destination programmed in PRG 22 12 01 Program 22 2 If the terminal is in Power Cutting mode from the ecology feature this command will not be applied Conditions When the trunk type is set to 3 DID in 22 02 01 the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Dialing DID Programm
263. aracter twice for the second character etc For example to enter C press 2 three times Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can have up to 12 digits Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ gt lt AAAAAAGEEi6o0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G l g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 amp 66UaaeOUaEOB Enter characters lt gt TLOQ GE Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 All Call Paging Up to 12 Characters Assign a name to each All Call Inter Group all 11 12 19 Zone Name nal Paging zone The name shows 31 02 02 on the display of the telephone mak ing the announcement 02 Page A
264. art Time played for IRG 02 1st Delayed Message 0 101 VRS message that is used for the 1st De 0 Number 0 No Message layed Message 101 Fixed Message 03 1st Delayed Message 0 255 time This is the number of times the 1st Delay 0 Sending Count Message is played If set to 0 the 1st De lay Message is not played 04 2 4 Delayed Message 0 101 VRS message that is used for the 2nd De 0 Number 0 No Message layed Message 101 Fixed Message 05 2nd Delayed Message 0 255 time This is the number of times the 2nd Delay 0 Sending Count Message is played If set to 0 the 2nd De lay Message is not played 06 Tone Kind at Mes 0 Ring Back Tone What is heard between the Delay Mes 0 sage Interval 1 MOH Tone sage 2 BGM Source 07 Disconnect Time Af 0 64800 seconds Time after all 2nd Delay Messages are 60 ter the End of VRS 0 No Disconnect played before the caller is disconnected Delayed Message Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 272 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 15 VRS Delayed Message for Department Group Level IN Description Use Program 22 15 VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department Extension Group the timers VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message There Program are 32 available Department Groups Input Data
265. ata Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Version Number Read Only ASCII Code 01 00 99 99 5 Bytes 02 Software Release Date Read Only ASCII Code May 22 2002 17 53 46 20 Bytes Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 550 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 17 Firmware Information Level Description Use Program 90 17 Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system Program units Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 DSP Firmware Version No Read Only BCD Code 2 Byte 00 00 00 00 15 15 15 15 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 551 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 19 Dial Block Release Level SA Description Note This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming When the extension number is entered in Program 90 19 Dial Block Release the extension is released from the Dial Block restriction Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delete IP Telephone Release Dial 1 This assignment removes the station num press Hold ber association with the MAC address of Press Hold only to can the IP station cel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference
266. ata Default No 01 VLAN 0 Disable Off 0 1 Enable On 02 VLAN ID 0 4094 0 03 Priority 0 7 0 Conditions e System programming must be exited before these program options take affect Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 495 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 10 ToS Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 10 ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data Input Data Protocol Type 1 3 Not used 4 Networking V1 5 Changed 5 RTP RTCP 6 SIP 7 Not used 8 SIP MLT 9 SIP Trunk 10 Not used Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 ToS Mode 0 Disable Invalid When Input Data is set to 1 Item No 07 is 0 1 IP Precedence invalid When Data is set to 2 Item No 02 2 Diffserv 06 are invalid 02 Priority IP Prece 0 7 1 Router queuing priority 0 dence 0 Low 7 High 03 Low Delay O 1 1 Optimize for low delay routing 0 0 Normal Delay Low Delay 04 Wideband Through 0 1 1 Optimize for high bandwidth routing 0 out 0 Normal Throughput 1 High Throughput 05 High Reliability 0 1 1 Optimize for reliability routing 0 0 Normal Reliability 1 Low Reliability 07 Priority D S C P 0 63 DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point 0 Differentiated Serv ices Code Point Conditions The system must be reset for these program options to take affect Featu
267. atic only ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all the stations in the De partment Group 06 STG Withdraw 0 Disabled Call will 0 Mode camp on to the group 1 Automatic Call fol lows PRG 22 11 11 07 Call Recall Re 0 Disabled Call will Determine whether or not an unan 0 striction for STG recall swered call transferred to a Depart 1 Enabled Call will ment Group should recall the exten not recall sion from which it was transferred 2 162 Program 16 Department Group Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 08 Maximum Queu 0 32 This program sets the amount of 0 ing number for 0 No Queuing calls that can queue to a department Department group when all members of the Group Call group are busy 09 Department 0 64800 seconds Set how long a call rings a Depart 15 Hunting No An ment group extension before hunt swer Time ing occurs 10 Enhanced Hunt O No hunting Set the type of hunting for each Ex 0 Type 1 Hunting When Busy tension Department Group 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy Program or No Answer Conditions 1 6 None Feature Cross Reference e Department Calling Programming Manual 2 163 Program 16 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 16 02 Department Group As
268. ation Port 2 483 82 08 Sidetone Volume Setup ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeaaeaaes 2 484 Programming Manual vii SL1100 viii ISSUE 4 0 82 09 SUU CODEC Filter Data SCUIPy ssiissievisicascisissrisvensaisiiaariastaraeeeiies 2 485 82 11 SLIU Initial Data Setup ececeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenessneesneesneeees 2 488 62 12 SPA Initial Data Setups aE 2 489 82 14 Handset Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone 2 490 oaa See OSI aici aa ew eas 2 491 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB cccecceseteeeeseseennneneneeeneneneeneneeee 2 492 84 02 H 225 and H 245 Information Basic Setup eeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 2 492 84 07 Firmware Download Setup ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneenes 2 494 ee VLAN Se tUi AENEA AEE E 2 495 PIU TO ese UD OE een ee Pee cap CM Renae eget cro eee ere et rere rer rrr 2 496 84 12 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 497 84 13 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup cccsseeeeeeeeeere 2 499 84 14 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup ccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeetteeesteeeee 2 503 84 15 SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaeaaes 2 505 84 16 VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup cccccccceseeeeeseneeeeneteneteeees 2 506 84 19 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
269. ay ent Hour 0 23 0 hour Pressing the Hold Key increments to Minutes 0 59 the next setting data 30 minutes 05 Last DHCP Data 0 Disable If 10 13 01 is enabled this setting de 1 1 Enable termines if DHCP resource is enabled or disabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 16 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 14 Managed Network Setup Level SA Description Use Program 10 14 Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP Server leases to a client Input Data 1 0 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default Related Pro No gram 01 The Range of the IP_ Minimum When Maximum has 172 16 0 100 10 13 04 address to Lease 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 not been entered the 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 maximum value equals 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 the minimum value Maximum 172 16 5 254 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 17 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 15 Client Information Setup Level SA Description Program Use Program 10 15 Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients 1 0 Input Data Clie
270. ay Announcement functions are not gram 41 09 available for ACD pilot number calls Each 4 Voice Mail Integra ACD Group can have unique overflow op tion tions 5 System Speed Pro gram 41 08 05 6 Incoming Ring Group Program 41 08 06 03 Delay Announcemen 1 VRS Assign the overflow mode 0 9 destina 1 Source Type 2 InMail tion and announcement message types Delay Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls Each ACD Group can have unique overflow op tions Programming Manual 2 369 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 04 ACD Overflow Trans 0 64800 seconds Define the time before ACD overflow oc 30 fer Time curs Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options 05 System Speed Dial 0 999 Used when Assign the speed dial bin to be used as 999 Bin 41 08 02 is set to 5 the ACD overflow destination Using a speed dial bin for ACD Overflow is suppor ted only for off premise calls 06 Incoming Ring Group 01 25 Used when Assign the Ring Group for ACD overflow 1 when Overflow 41 08 02 is set to 6 calls to go to Program Conditions a1 i Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 370 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 09 ACD Overflow Table Setting Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher
271. by using 90 08 or Power down up the system When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ VM21 the system MUST be powered off Never install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power Feature Cross Reference None 2 532 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 04 Load Data Level SA Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 04 Load Data to load the system data from the inserted CF Card into the PZ VM21 Daughter Board installed to the system 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Load Data Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions e After uploading the data the display will change to a next Program Then make sure you EXIT the Program order for upload to complete Now some of the setting needs to have system reset order for setting to be effective example IP Address Line Key Assignment so we Recommend to reset the system When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ VM21 the system MUST be powered off Never install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 533 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 05 Slot Control Level IN Description Note This program is a
272. cation Call Back Settings Level IN Description Program Use Program 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back Settings to define the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication 2 1 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 CO MWI Call Back En 0 No VMWI Service Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back 0 abling 1 Enable VMWI Serv ice 02 CO MWI Call Back 0 999 Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI 999 Number Area Setting Call Back Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 250 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 26 Home NPA Setup Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Podam Use Program 21 26 Home NPA Setup to set the home NPA dial Order to use this program PRG 21 01 20 needs to set to 2 Automatic Call Back 2 4 Input Data Index 1 16 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Home NPA Up to 3 digits 0 9 Set the NPA Home Area Code None 21 01 20 Wild Card oe 21 01 21 If using wild card x make sure 21 01 22 it is 3 digits Example 1 21 27 01 21 28 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 251 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 27 HNPA Exceptions Setup Level IN This Program is ava
273. ce Number 01 128 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Default No 01 DTMF Dial Tone Detection 0 Common Use Resource 01 128 0 1 Extension Only Common V3 5 2 Trunk Only Changed Resource 01 16 are Baic resource only use Basic Board Resource 17 32 are vmdb resource only use Basic Board Resource 33 64 are EXIFE1 resource only use Expansion 1 Resource 65 96 are EXIFE2 resource only use Expansion 2 Resource 97 128 are EXIFE3 resource only use Expansion 3 V3 5 Added Conditions e CPU has 16 Channel DSP resources receivers only for basic CPU Unit VMDB has additional 16 DSP resources which you can add to CPU Addition to that EXIFE also each has 32 DSP resource receivers only for expand unit In case of 0 Common is selected and if 14 02 10 Caller ID receive ability is set to Yes DSP resources are always allocated to analog trunk only not for analog extension If 14 02 10 is set to No the DSP resources can be used for both analog trunk and analog extension commonly Feature Cross Reference e Caller ID Programming Manual 2 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 e Central Office Calls Placing e Direct Inward Dialing DID e Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 10 2 12 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup Description 10 12 CPU Network Setup Use Progr
274. ce level judged to be silence 20 VAD Threshold self adjustment and 19 Change value based 30 dB 10 dB This entry is ignored if silence compres 1 19 dB 49 dBm sion is disabled in 84 01 03 with G 711 or 84 01 06 with G 729 20 0 dB 30 dBm 29 9 dBm 21 dBm 30 10 dBm 20 dBm 28 Priority Codec Setting 0 G 711 PT The option selected here determines what 0 1 G 723 PT other codec options are applied by priority 2 G 729 PT For the system to utilize the G 723 or iLBC 3 G 722 Codecs program 84 27 02 must be set to 4 G 726 G 723 iLBC 5 iLBC 30 EchoAuto Gain Con 0 5 Define the Auto Gain Control 0 trol 31 DTMF Payload Num 96 127 Define the DTMF Payload Number 96 ber 32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 Disable Determine the DTMF setup used between 0 1 RFC2833 the SIP extensions It is effective when a terminal call is made through the VoIPDB 33 G 722 Audio Frame 1 10ms Maximum number of G 722 Audio Frames 3 2 20ms G 722 assumes the audio signal made by 3 30 ms a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 4 40 ms ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method 35 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30 Minimum of G 722 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average G 722 Jitter Buffer 60 Standard 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer
275. ch extension virtual extension The destination can have up to 24 digits using 0 9 x and Be sure to include the trunk access code e g 9 in the number if the destination is off premise Only ISDN uses the symbol 2 4 Pause can be set by LK 1 Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Call Forwarding Type 0 No Call Forwarding 0 1 Call Forward Both 2 Call Forward No Answer 3 Call Forward All 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer 5 Call Forward Busy 02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 x P R V1 5 No Setting Both Ring All Call No Answer Changed Only ISDN uses the symbol 03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destina Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R V1 5 No Setting tion for Both ring All Call No An Changed swer 04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destina Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R V1 5 No Setting tion Changed 05 Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 x P R V1 5 No Setting Destination Changed 06 Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 x P R V1 5 No Setting CTX PBX for All Call No Answer Changed 07 Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R V1 5 No Setting CTX PBX for Busy Changed Conditions None Programming Manual 2 287 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Refere
276. chedule run continuously make the same entry for 47 12 07 Schedule Start Time and 47 12 08 Schedule End Time Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 434 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 13 InMail Dial Action Tables Level IN Description Use Program 47 13 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the InMail Dial Action Tables The Dial Program Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox which is in turn associated with an Answer Table When an Answer Table is active its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options to callers The illustration below shows how this works in a default InMail 47 system There are 32 V3 0 or higher Dial Action Tables Input Data Dial Action Table Number 01 32 V3 0 Changed Key Number 0 9 x TIMEOUT Programming Manual 2 435 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item No Name Input Data Description 01 Action 0 UND Undefined e TRF Action Screened Transfer 1 TRF 1 TRF Transfer e UTRF Action Unscreened Transfer 2 UTRF 2 UTRF Unscreened Transfer REC1 Action Quick Message With Greeting 3 REC1 3 REC1 e REC2 Action Quick Message Without Greeting 4 4 REC2 REC2
277. connect Program 81 01 15 A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk call 05 Dial Tone Detec 0 Dial Tone Detection Use this option enable disable dial 0 21 01 04 tion for Manually Not Used tone detection for directly accessed Accessed Trunks 1 Dial Tone Detection trunks If disabled the system out Used dials on the trunks without monitor ing for dial tone 06 Pause at 1st Dig 0 No Pause No 1 21 01 06 it after Line Seize 1 Pause Yes in Manual Dial Mode 2 112 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup IN Description Use Program 14 02 Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port Refer to the table below for a description of each option its range and default setting ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 07 DP to DTMF Con 0 Automatic Determine how a user can convert a 2 21 01 03 version Options 1 Automatic and Dial Pulse DP call to a DTMF call Manual For each trunk set the type of DP to 2 Manual DTMF conversion required There are three conversion options Auto matic 0 Automatic and Manual 1 or Manual 2 Automatic DP to DTMF conversion occurs au tomatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit Automatic and Manual DP to DTMF conversion occurs au tomatically if the extension user
278. d Slave Side Extension Number to Tandem Ring 8 dig its 81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line Number Off Cancel Transfer Key 001 084 Slow Blink Red Set 83 Conversation Recording 0 Pause Function 1 Re record 2 Address 3 Erase 4 Urgent Page 84 Line Drop send long flash 86 Private Call Refuse None Off Cancel Slow Blink Red Set 87 Caller ID Refuse None Off Cancel Slow Blink Red Set 88 Dial In Mode Switching Program 22 17 Table Off pattern 1 pattern 5 8 No 1 500 On Red pattern 2 Slow Blink Red pattern 3 91 Live Monitoring Key Slow Blink Red Set 92 Wake Up Call Indication None Set On No Set Off No answer Blink On 125ms Off 125ms 93 Room Status Indication None ON Checked In and Clean OFF Checked Out clean and available SLOW blink Maid Required On 500ms Off 500ms MEDIUM blink Maid in Room On 250ms Off 250ms FAST blink Inspect Room On 125ms Off 125ms 94 Call Attendant Fast Blink Red Setup No answer calls 125msec on gt 125msec off gt 125msec on gt 625msec off Red Setup Busy calls On Red Setup Busy No answer calls 95 Page Switching None Red On Page 1 Slow Blink Red Page 2 97 Door Box Access Key Doorphone No 1 On Red Door Box Busy 6 Off Door Box Idle Fast Blink Red Door Box Incoming 98 Message Waiting Indi None ON New Message cation Key OFF No Message 99 Alternate Answer Key None 2 31
279. d key 2 If 13 01 01 is set to 0 do not in Code to wait for clude the trunk access code answer supervision in If 13 01 01 is set to 1 include the ISDN Press line key 3 trunk access code Maximum 36 digits 02 Name Maximum 12 Charac Per Speed Dialing bin 000 999 No Setting ters Use dial pad to assign a name to be used when enter name searching through the directory If a name is not assigned for a speed dial bin the speed dial entry will not be listed in the directory 03 Transfer Mode 0 Not Used Calls will 2 Each time when this setting is 0 not be routed based off changed Program 13 04 04 will a users caller ID be reset V1 5 Added 1 Internal Dial Calls will be routed to an in ternal number specified in PRG 13 04 04 2 Incoming Ring Group Calls will be routed to a ring group specified in PRG 13 04 04 3 Remote Monitor Used for the security feature and not Flexible Caller ID routing Programming Manual 2 103 Program 13 Program 13 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 04 Transfer Destina If Transfer mode is This setting can be changed only No Setting 13 04 03 tion Number Refer to 13 04 03 when Program 13 04 03 is set 1 Internal Dial Mode other than 0 Also if the Program 1 9 0 P R 13 04 03 is set to 3 only Exten Maximum 36 Charac sion number can be changed ters V1 5
280. d Dial Area Number 0 999 999 The destination telephone number of the 11 10 08 Trunk to Trunk Transfer uses the num 13 04 ber registered into the Speed Dial Use 24 05 this program to setup the Speed Dial Bin Number Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Call Forwarding Off Premise Programming Manual 2 285 Program 24 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 05 Department Group Transfer Target Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 24 05 Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin 24 which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group There are 32 available Department Groups Input Data Extension Group Number 01 32 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Speed Dial Area 0 999 The Speed Dialing area is used to 999 11 11 27 Number program the destination number of 13 04 the transferred telephone number 24 04 when a Department Group call is transferred using the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding feature Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Transfer 2 286 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 09 Call Forward Split Settings Level IN Description Use Program 24 09 Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the Program destination number for ea
281. d No An swer and DND 24 Privacy Release 0 Off Turns off or on a user ability to COS 01 15 0 by Pressing Line 1 On press a line key to barge into an out Key side call The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used 26 Group Listen 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 1 On ability to use Group Listen 27 Busy on Seizing 0 Off If set to 1 you can call a busy ex COS 01 15 1 Virtual Extension 1 On tension which is talking on a virtual extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be set to 0 for this option to work 28 Allow Class of 0 Off Turns off or on the ability of an ex COS 01 15 0 Service to be 1 On tension Class of Service to be Changed changed via Service Code 677 2 188 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 29 Paging Display 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 1 On ability to display paging information 30 Background Mu 0 Deny user cannot Allow or Deny an extension user to COS 01 15 1 sic control background mu turn Background Music on and off sic on their station 1 Allow user can control background mu sic on their station 31 Connected Line 0 Off COS 01 15 0 Identification 1 On COLP 32 Deny Multiple 0 Off Allows or Denies an extension from COS 01 15 0 Ba
282. d Only 0 0 0 0 dress V3 0 Added 255 255 255 255 Displays the IP address of 3rd Party CTI Server currently connected Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 202 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 25 ISDN Options Level IN Description Use Program 20 25 ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options Program Input Data 2 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Send the Release 0 Service Off 1 Message After Sub 1 Service On scriber Hangs Up 02 Progress Indicate In 0 Service Off 1 formation Element 1 Service On Detect 03 Bearer Capability Se 0 3 1 KHz Audio 0 lect from SLT Outgo 1 Speech ing 04 Send DT until user di 0 Service Off With Overlap Sending Mode if the network 0 als first digit Local 1 Service On side stops dial tone when CLI is included Dial Tone in the SETUP message the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network 05 T305 Timer Start After 0 Service Off 1 Sending Disconnect 1 Service On Message 06 Call Proceeding Send 0 Service Off 1 Mode 1 Service On 07 Local Busy Tone 0 Local Busy Tone Off 0 Mode Set When Dis 1 Busy Tone from NT connect Message Re network side ceived 08 Use of Lower Layer 0 Disable Off This Program must be set to 0 Disable 0 Compatibility LLC
283. d Program 01 Priority Or 1 4 When two or more virtual 15 08 der extensions are set ona E function key on the tele Data 0 Tone Pattern 1 phone and the tone pat 1 Tone Pattern 2 tern by which the sound 2 7 Tone Pattern 3 of each extension differs 3 TonePatten4 the priority of ring sound 4 Incoming Extension Ring Tone is set up 5 Tone Pattern 5 V3 0 Added i 6 Tone Pattern 6 V3 0 Added 7 Tone Pattern 7 V3 0 Added 8 Tone Pattern 8 V3 0 Added Default e By default Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order Priority Order Ring Tone Set in Program 15 08 1 0 Tone Pattern 1 2 1 Tone Pattern 2 3 2 Tone Pattern 3 4 3 Tone Pattern 4 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 150 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Level SA Description Use Program 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing Program options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys defined in Program 15 09 You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports Assign extension numbers Program 11 04 and names Program 15 01 to virtual extension ports 1 5 Program Multiple Directory Number virtual extension keys in Program 15 07 code x03
284. d System Access DISA 2 290 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 03 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Level IN Description Use Program 25 03 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode make an entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Group Number 0 Disconnect 0 22 04 01 25 Incoming Ring Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM V1 5 Added 104 Assign the Speed Dial Number V3 0 Add ed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 291 Program 25 Program 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy Level IN Description Use Program 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy to set the operating mode of each DISA trunk This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either disconnect 0 or Tr
285. ddress 172 16 0 10 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 06 Client Host Name Code number 0 255 Set the Client Host 12 Fixed Name Maximum 64 character strings No setting 07 DNS Domain Name Code number 0 255 Set the DNS Domain 15 Fixed Name Maximum 20 character strings No setting 08 Download Protocol Code number 0 255 Set Download Protocol 43 Fixed used for AutoConfig for Sub code number DR700 Series 163 Fixed 1 FTP 1 2 HTTP 09 Encryption Information Code number 0 255 Set an Encryption Infor 43 Fixed mation used for Auto Sub code number Config for DR700 ser 164 Fixed Maximum 128 character strings ies No setting Programming Manual 2 19 Program 10 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 10 FTP Server Address Code number 0 255 Set a FTP Server Ad 43 Fixed dress used for AutoCon Sub code number fig 141 IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 11 Config File Name Code number 0 255 Set a File Name used for 43 Fixed AutoConfig Sub code number 151 Maximum 15 character strings No setting 12 Vender Class ID Code number 0 255 60 Fixed Maximum 256 character strings NEC DR700 13 SNMP Server Code number 0 255 69
286. digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel DND for another extension 05 Set Wake Up Call for 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 631 Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set wake up call for own extension 06 Cancel Wake Up Call 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 632 for Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel wake up call for own extension 07 Set Wake Up Call for 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 633 Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set wake up call for another extension 08 Cancel Wake Up Call 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 634 for Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel wake up call for another extension Programming Manual 2 83 Program 11 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 09 Set Room to Room 0 9 Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 635 Call Restriction digit Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to Set Room to Room Call Restriction 10 Cancel Room to 0 9 x Maximum of 8 Terminal MLT SLT 636 Room Call Restriction digit Determine what the service code should Hotel be for an internal party to cancel Room to Room
287. ditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 502 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 14 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Description Use Program 84 14 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 INVITE ReTx Count 0 255 7 Specifies the number of times the INVITE mes sage is sent 02 Request ReTx Count 0 255 11 Specifies the number of times Request mes sage except INVITE are sent 03 Response ReTx 0 255 7 Count Specifies the number of times the Response message is sent 04 Request ReTx Start 0 65535 5 500 ms Time 0 ms 6553 5 seconds 05 Request Maximum 0 65535 40 4000 ms ReTx Interval 0 ms 6553 5 seconds 06 SIP Trunk Port Num 1 65535 5060 ber 07 Session Timer Value 0 65535 0 08 Minimum Session 0 65535 1800 Timer Value 09 Called Party Informa 0 Request URI 0 tion 1 To Header 10 URL Type 0 SIP URL 0 1 TEL URL 11 URL To HeaderSet 0 Proxy Server Do 0 ting Information main 1 SIP UA Domain 13 SIP Trunk Incoming 0 Off 0 Outgoing via 1 Mode 1 V3 0 E164SIP_URI V1 5 Changed Added 2 Mode 2 V3 0 Changed 3 Mode 3 V3 0 Add ed 15 100rel Settings V1 5 0 Use default Settings 0 Added 1 Use opposite Default S
288. e Hold e Park Programming Manual 2 281 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 02 System Options for Transfer Level Description Program Use Program 24 02 System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer feature 24 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Busy Transfer 0 Disable No Use this option to prevent or allow 1 1 Enable Yes extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions If disabled calls trans ferred to busy extensions recall im mediately 02 MOH or Ring 0 Hold Tone Use this option to enable or disable 1 V1 5 20 03 02 back on Trans 1 Ring Back Tone MOH on Transfer If enabled 0 a Changed ferred Calls transferred caller hears MOH while their call rings the destination exten sion If disabled 1 a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension 03 Delayed Call For 0 64800 seconds If activated at an extension Delayed 10 20 31 15 warding Time Call Forwarding occurs after this time This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an exten sion forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mail box 04 Transfer Recall 0 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call re 20 V1 5 20 31 16 Time calls to the extension that initially Changed transferred it after this time 05 Message Wait 0 64800 seconds For Single Line Telephones SLTs 30 Ring Interval with
289. e ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 3 12 ms 50 Receive DP Break Max Time ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 25 100 ms 51 Receive DP InterDigit Min Time 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 125 500 ms ALL 52 Receive HookFlash Duration Min 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 3 300 ms Time E amp M 53 Receive HookFlash Duration Max 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms Time E amp M Programming Manual 2 473 Program 81 Program 81 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 54 Receive HookFlash Duration Min 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 3 300 ms Time OPX 55 Receive HookFlash Duration Max 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms Time OPX 56 Loop Off Guard Time Loop 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 57 Loop Off Guard Time Ground 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 58 Loop Off Guard Time DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 59 Loop Off Guard Time E amp M 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 60 Loop Off Guard Time OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms 62 Double Between Ringing Send 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 5 500 ms Time 1 OPX 63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 25 2500 ms 64 Double Between Ringing Send 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 30 3000 ms Time 2 OPX 65 Single Ri
290. e 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Receive Format 0 Address Use this option to specify the format COS 01 0 34 01 02 1 x ANI of the ANI DNIS data received from COS 02 15 0 34 09 02 2 x DNIS the Telco Make sure your entry is 3 x ANI Address compatible with the service the Tel 4 x ANI DNIS co provides The character indi 5 x DNIS ANIx cates a delimiter Delimiter Code If Program 34 01 02 is selected to 2 MF this Program works only as 4 ANI DNIS 02 Delimiter Dial 1 9 0 This option defines the character COS 01 34 09 01 Code Telco uses as a delimiter see en COS 02 15 x tries 1 5in Item 1 above Valid entries are 0 9 and x 03 Route Setup of 0 Fixed Route Item This option specifies the source of COS 01 0 22 09 01 Receive Dial 08 No Routing the data the system uses to route in COS 02 15 0 22 11 01 1 Routes on Re coming ANI DNIS calls If option 2 is 34 09 04 ceived DNIS or Ad selected refer to Program 34 09 04 34 09 08 dress Data 2 Routes on Re ceived ANI Data 2 344 Program 34 Tie Line Setup IN Description Use Program 34 09 ANI DNIS Service Options to define the ANI DNIS service option setup for E amp M Class of Service ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item No Item Input Data Description Default Related Program 04 Route Table Set up of Target
291. e Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice Announcement feature ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Call Attendant 0 100 0 15 01 09 No Answer Mes 0 No message sage 10 Call Forward Re 0 Do not play Flag that control the playback of the 1 40 10 01 mainder An 1 Play VRS announcements for on the for nouncement warded phone V2 0 Added 11 Call Forward No 0 Do not play Flag that control the playback of the 1 40 10 01 tification An 1 Play VRS announcements for towards nouncement the incoming call V2 0 Added Program Conditions None 4 0 Feature Cross Reference e Voice Response System VRS 2 361 Programming Manual Program 40 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 40 Voice Recording System 40 11 Preamble Message Assignment Level IN Description In Program 40 11 Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk When the extension user answers the incoming call the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 VRS Message Number 0 100 0 No Service 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Voice Response System VRS
292. e Cross Reference None 2 488 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 12 OPX Initial Data Setup Description Use Program 82 12 OPX Initial Data Setup to define the various initial data for OPX packages Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Bounce Protect Time 0 No setting Specify a time for detection of a valid off 3 1 15 100 ms 1 5 Hook indication that is long enough to pre 300 ms sec vent an unintentional bounce of the receiv er from being detected as a new Off Hook indication from a single line telephone 02 HookFlash Start Time 0 40 ms Specify the minimum hookflash time from 5 1 15 90 ms 790 ms a single line telephone or analog Voice 290 ms Mail system before it is detected as the be ginning of a valid hookflash 03 HookFlash End Time 0 HST 0ms Specify the maximum hookflash duration 7 1 15 HST 100ms_ froma single line telephone to receive a 990 ms HST 1500 ms second dial tone HST Hookflash Start Time Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 489 Program 82 Program 82 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 14 Handset Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone Level IN Description Use Program 82 14 Handset Headset Gain Setup for Multi Li
293. e Line Telephone Conditions None Programming Manual 2 85 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference None Program 11 2 86 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup Level IN Description Use Program 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one digit Service Codes Program used when a busy or ring back signal is heard You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 11 15 The following chart shows 1 1 The number of each code 01 11 e The function of the Service Code e The default entry For example dialing 1 Item 03 when calling an extension switches the call from either a voice or signal call depending on how it is currently defined e Programs that may be affected by changing these codes Input Data Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Step Call 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 2 02 Barge In 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 03 Switching of Voice Signal 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 1 Call 04 Intercom Off Hook Signaling 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit 05 Camp On 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 06 DND Call Forward Override 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting Bypass 07 Message Waiting 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 0 08 Voice Over 0 9 x Maximum of 1 digit 6 09 Access to Voice Mail 0
294. e Program 40 07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be Program used for the VRS prompts Input Data 40 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Voice Prompt Language Assign 01 US English 1 ment for VRS 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian V3 0 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Voice Mail Integration Analog Programming Manual 2 359 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 40 Voice Recording System 40 10 Voice Announcement Service Option Level Program 4 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 VRS Fixed Mes 0 Disable VRS fixed Enable 1 or disable 0 the system 0 sage message will not be ability to play the fixed VRS mes played sages such as You have a mes 1 Enable VRS fixed sage message will be played 02 General Message 0 100 This item assigns the VRS message 0 Number 0 No General Mes number to use for the General Mes sage Service sage 03 VRS No Answer 0
295. e Program 81 06 ISDN PRI Layer 3 T Point Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for Program layer 3 of ISDN PRI defined in Program 10 03 04 Input Data 8 1 Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1 5 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 T301 0 180 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 180 second of the timer to be started when the ALERT message is received 02 T302 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 15 second of the timer to be started when the SETUP ACK is sent Timer is also restar ted when INFO is received 03 T303 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second of the timer to be started when SETUP is sent 04 T304 0 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 30 second of the timer to be started when the SETUP ACK is received Timer is also re started when INFO is received 05 T305 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 30 second of the timer to be started when DISC without progress No 8 is sent 06 T306 0 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 30 second of the timer to be started when DISC with progress indicator No 8 is sent This timer is valid for Network side use on ly 07 T307 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 180 second of the timer to be started when SUSPEND ACK is sent This timer is valid only for Network side use only
296. e Setup on page 2 348 Program 40 Voice Recording System on page 2 358 Program 41 ACD Setup on page 2 363 Program 42 Hotel Setup on page 2 381 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup on page 2 388 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration on page 2 402 Program 47 InMail on page 2 407 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System on page 2 448 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk on page 2 466 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension on page 2 477 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP on page 2 492 Program 90 Maintenance Program on page 2 529 Program 92 Copy Program on page 2 609 Programming Manual 2 1 U O Co Q 3 3 Co ot gt wm rr EN SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program Number Program Name Program 93 System Information on page 2 619 2 2 Programming the SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 01 Time and Date Level SA Description Use Program 10 01 Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming Extension users can also dial Service Code 728 to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service Input Data 1 0 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Year 07 96 Enter 2 digits for year 07 96 No Setting 02 Month 01 12 Enter 2 digits 01 12 for the
297. e WAR sion error Address colli dress in the net dress in the net IP Address sion CPU work work collision VOIPDB Pro gram 84 26 01 GW 1 8 59 2 0 Network Total number of New extension Reduce extensions When the to ERR ing port ports exceeded or trunk ports or trunks not to ex tal number of limit ex the limit of 168 are added ceed 168 ports in ports be ceeded ports in the net Anewsystem is the network comes 168 or V1 5 work added in Pro less the error Added gram 10 27 01 is recoverd Anew system is connected to the network EXIFU is con nected 60 2 0 SIP Reg 1 The regis 1 Thesettingof 1 Confirm the The error is ERR istration tration of the system da following sys recovered REC Error No the SIP ta is wrong tem data set when normal tification trunk to the 2 The setting of ting Pro ly connecting SIP server the router is grams 10 12 it failed wrong 10 28 10 29 2 The regis 3 Itis an error to 10 30 and tration of the link of 10 36 the SIP LAN 2 Confirm the trunk to the 4 Net side trou setting of rout SIP server ble ers failed in the 3 Confirm authentica whether ab tion normality oc 3 There is no curs on the net response side from the 4 Confirm the SIP server authentication to the SIP system data registration setting request 5 Confirm wiring and the sys tem data set ting Please in quire on un certain points of the make
298. e and 0 play info via number trunk for stand 1 Name only ard SIP 2 Number only 3 None 41 Time Zone hour 0 24 12 12 12 hour 43 Video Mode 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 44 Using STD SIP 0 Disable 0 Display for CPN 1 Enable 45 NAT plug amp play 0 OFF Effect this program only when PRG 1 10 46 14 1 ON 10 46 14 for DR700 or PRG 10 33 05 for Standard SIP Termi nal are set to NAT mode V4 0 or higher If you are setting the SIP Terminal using remote router by turning this setting ON you don t need to set the Port Forward on remote router side V4 0 Added Select sending RTP port number to remote Router use from negotiation result 0 or received RTP packet 1 47 Registration Ex 0 Disable On a per station basis this setting 180 84 23 01 pire Timer for 60 65535 sec defines the SIP registration expiry NAT V4 0 timer This setting applies to DR700 Changed stations or Standard SIP Terminal connected via NAPT If this value is set to 0 for a NAPT terminal the value in PRG 84 23 01 for DR700 or PRG 10 33 01 for Standard SIP Terminal are applied 48 Subscriber Ex 0 Disable On a per station basis this setting 180 84 23 02 pire Timer for 60 65535 sec defines the SIP subscribe expiry NAPT V4 0 timer This setting only applies to Changed DR700 stations or Standard SIP Terminal connected via NAPT If this value is set to 0 for a NAPT ter minal the value in PRG 84 23 02 for DR700 or PRG 1
299. e dial needs to configure as F Route at PRG 11 01 03 Tone Kind V2 0 Add 0 Internal DT Set simulated DT kind which can change 0 ed 1 External DT the tone used at PRG 44 01 02 and PRG 44 02 04 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route 2 388 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Description Use Program 44 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access to set the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route Input Data Dial Analysis Table Number 001 120 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 01 Dial Up to eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing No Setting 02 Service Type 0 No setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Ana lyze Table Option e Service Type 1 Extension Number The number goes to an extension after deleting the front digit s Additional Data Assign the digit s to be deleted on top of the number for extension number us age At least one digit must be deleted Service Type 2 ARS F Route The number is controlled by ARS F Route table Additional Data If the ARS F Route Time Schedule is not used assign
300. e trunk codes Refer to 14 06 Trunk Group Routing on page 2 117 to set up the trunk routes When entering data for this option enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Route Table Number 0 25 This assigns extensions per day night 0 0 No Setting Calls will mode to a route table PRG 14 06 01 not route This program follows the special trunk ac cess code from PRG 11 01 01 and 11 09 02 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Placing 2 244 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 21 16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking to assign Program 14 06 routes for a networked system This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B 2 1 The route number is specified for each system ID 01 04 Input Data System ID 01 04 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Route Table 0 25 If a call comes in from across the 1 14 06 01 Number 0 No Setting Calls network this program determin
301. e type and level for Caller ID detection of Program DSP Input Data 8 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Type 0 NTT 1 1 Other 2 Korea 02 Level Mark 0 32766 50 03 Level Space 0 32766 50 04 Bit Sampling Type 0 Other 0 1 Malaysia 05 1st Bit Offset 0 32766 10 06 Minimum Seizure Count 0 32766 10 07 Guard Time when Mark 0 32766 1 08 CAS detect time V4 0 Added 0 20ms 0 20ms 1 25ms 2 30 ms 3 35 ms 4 40 ms 5 45 ms 6 50 ms 7 55 ms 8 60 ms 9 65 ms 10 70 ms 11 75 ms 12 80 ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 465 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 01 CO Initial Data Setup Description Program Use Program 81 01 CO Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the COIU 8 1 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 PCM Encoding Method Specifica 0 u law 0 yu law tion 1 A law 02 Loop Current Detection Time 1 255 60 600 ms 10 2550 ms 03 Clear Signal Open Loop Detec 1 255 61 305 ms tion Time 5 1275 ms 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum 1 255 10 100 ms Time 10 2550 ms 05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum 0 255 66 660 ms Time 0 10 2550 ms 06 Double Ringing Detection Mini 0 255 10 100 ms mum Off Time 0 10 2550 ms 07 Double Ringing Detection Maxi 0 255 40 400 ms mum Off Time 0 10 2550 ms 08 Ringing Signal not Detection Mini
302. e used as default law is selected in Item 01 it is possi ble to set 8 When the G 711 u law is selected in Item 01 it is possi ble to set 0 When the G 726 u law is selected in Item 01 it is possi ble to set 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Programming Manual 2 527 Program 84 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VolPDB 84 39 SIP Trunk message customize Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description This program is not available for Web Programming or Telephone Programming You can only change setting using Script Function of PC Programming Use Program 84 39 SIP Trunk message customize to check the Message customize Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Option 1 0 255 0 99 Option 99 0 255 0 There are Items from 01 to 99 This chart only shows the beginning and end but Default Input Data they are all same Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 528 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 01 Installation Date Level IN Description Use Program 90 01 Installation Date to define the installation date of the system Program Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Year 00 99 00 No Setting 02 Month 01 12 00 No Se
303. eature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 615 Program 92 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 92 Copy Program 92 05 Extension Data Swap Password Level IN Description Use Program 92 05 Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4 digit password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Password Fixed four digits No Password required on a per station No Setting 11 15 12 setting at default basis when utilizing the station swap feature Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 616 Program 92 Copy Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 92 Copy Program 92 06 Fill Command Level IN Description Use Program 92 06 Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data 01 Source Number Each extension port 001 128 V3 5 Changed Program 11 02 oad Each virtual extension port 01 50 Program 11 04 Destination Number From Each extension group 1 32 Program 11 07 Destination Number To Each ACD Group 1 2 V1 5 Added The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbering 11 04 Virtual Extensio
304. ecacgsenes 2 623 93 05 Department Group Information c seeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaeeaes 2 624 Programming Manual ix SL1100 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 Table 2 18 ISSUE 4 0 LIST OF TABLES Keys for Entering DM oscccndiciniic inner 1 3 Keys tor Entering NaMe Siseosa eE EE EEAS 1 4 te Genel Fron pi Saiesan aE A 1 5 System Number PPV RC a sacs so scsceccech cece ceases 1 5 System Numbering Default SOTO Ss iaiscuciccnirainsisiatcauationabicreunmatdanssdonnsudquauiens 2 59 Funcion Nomoer C osre a 2 141 Fanconi Number LIST sarasiguicisusictasiaretie nsieaieisaienmauaiemmmecsieieeisesienbas 2 144 Program 15 08 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns 2 147 Ringing GIES secsranisoia aAA DARDAI 2 193 Program 22 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns eceeeeeeeees 2 257 Funcion Number Ligier asenne REA 2 313 Funcion Nompar Eilses E 2 317 41 02 16 Default Tale i atricancrccaeazesinrasbsaahocasdegatniaeniesuiaiauieusocestmutbaaneiauenes 2 414 MS A Tt Derant TADE rer A E 2 419 4003 TI TapE eiii Ena A vise 2 421 47 10 03 Default Table 000enonorsernrrernreorererrnnnrnnrnnnnnenenennnennnnnnnneeeeeereeeeos 2 427 Basic Tongs insna A ASEE 2 448 Lyte U2 TADE en meer eee fer eve foe rer rte ede ees Yene
305. ed No Routing Entry N Entered by pressing LK1 Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number To do this for the key for example for the key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the cor responding Number When the caller dials they hear Please enter the mailbox number Or to exit press the pound key e Pause Entry P Entered by pressing LK4 Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to pause while dialing Defaults Dial Action Table Default Settings k Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 2 16 e Action Data Action Data 1 2 UTRF XXX 0 UND 0 2 2 UTRF V3 5 XXX V3 5 Changed 0 UND 0 Changed 3 2 UTRF XXXX 0 UND 0 4 0 UND 0 0 UND 0 5 0 UND 0 0 UND 0 6 0 UND 0 0 UND 0 2 436 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Dial Action Table Default Settings Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 2 16 Action Data Action Data 7 0 UND 0 0 UND 0 8 0 UND o 0 UND 0 9 6 Hang Up 0 0 UND 0 0 2 UTRF 101 0 UND 0 3 REC1 IXXX 0 UND 0 5 LOGON IXXX 0 UND 0 TIMEOUT 2 UTRF 101 0 UND 0 Program 2 TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers 47 Note If Action is set 0 or 6 skip Data setting XXX change as it fit The Data data needs to follow these r
306. ed System Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers 10 Restriction for 0 Does Not Restrict Use this option to enable disable 0 Group Speed Di 1 Following Restric Toll Restriction for Group Speed Di als tion Check aling numbers If enabled Group Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers 11 Intercom Call Re 0 Disable ICM call Determines if incoming and outgo 0 striction not restricted ing intercom calls are allowed 1 Enable ICM call re stricted 12 PBX Call Restric 0 Disable PBX CTX Use this option to set how the sys Class 1 6 0 tion call not restricted tem Toll Restricts calls over PBX Class 7 1 1 Enable PBX CTX trunks If you enable PBX Toll Re Class 8 15 0 call restricted striction the system begins Toll Re striction after the PBX access code The user cannot dial a PBX exten sion If you disable PBX Toll Restric tion the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code The system does not restrict calls to PBX extensions Refer to the PBX compatibility feature Make sure Program 21 05 04 Maximum Num ber of Digits Table Assignment al lows for PBX Toll Call Dialing nor mally 12 digits 13 Restriction of Tie 0 Disable No It chooses whether the toll restric 0 34 08 Line Calls 1 Enable Yes tion of the dial set up by 34 08 is en abled or disabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference
307. ed ommended to not use the DHCP client function a static IP address would be pre ferred If you are going to still use the DHCP client function then the DHCP serv er should be setup so that the same IP ad dress is always provided to the system Z When changing this program a system reset is required Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 56 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 65 NTP Server Setting Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Program Use Program 10 65 NTP Server Setting to set the NTP Server Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 NTP Server 0 Disable Stop Set 1 when you want to start the NTP 0 Stop 1 Enable Start Server 02 NTP Server Port 1 65535 Set the receiving port of NTP Server 123 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 57 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering 11 01 System Numbering Level IN Description Use Program 11 01 System Numbering to set the system numbering plan The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features such as service codes and trunk codes If the default numbering plan does not meet
308. eeeeeeeees 2 416 47 07 InMail Routing Mailbox Options cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaaaaaes 2 420 47 08 lt Call Routing Mailbox OPIONS irriteren keare 2 422 47 09 Announcement Mailbox Options ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeseeeeees 2 424 47 10 InMail Trunk Options 0 c cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 2 426 47 11 InMail Answer Table Options seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 428 4 12 MnMail Answer Schedules sciri 2 431 4 137 Wal Dial Acton Ve Bia iisen 2 435 47 15 Routing Directory Mailbox OptionS eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeererererrrrrerreens 2 438 47 17 Routing Distribution Mailbox Options ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaes 2 439 ar18 OMTP E 0 pa meg nee rn or errr en rer E 2 440 re ey PORS O EEEE ES 2 441 47 20 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options eee 2 442 47 21 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me OptionsS ceeeeeeees 2 444 47 22 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options 00 eeeee 2 445 47 23 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options cceeeeeesseeeeees 2 447 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for Systemm 2 ccseeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneneeee 2 448 BU 0T Service Tone SeUIP vicccmanianinisniiipeniemounsmaddioonmame 2 448 Ce DTMF TONG tl csc osc cide sides eae aT 2 453 80 03 DTMF Tone Receiver SQUID iiscsisicisiieriaiasiassisivcisinasiviaassiatesasisres
309. eentenentenneee 2 391 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule 2 393 44 05 ARS F Route Table irsinin anrasin nnen 2 394 44 06 Additional Dial 9 See ae eer Pe Pier fe riers eR Ere tay Pn VER 2 396 Programming Manual ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route ACCESS eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 397 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F ROute cscs seccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 398 44 09 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route 2 cccsessseesectceeseeeesenerenneee 2 400 44 10 Holiday Schedule for ARS F ROute ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 401 Program 45 Voice Mall INIA iscsi ciereinainicissicistwisineraeesarsiodensisiciansieiibns 2 402 45 01 Voice Mail Integration Options 2 ecceeeseseeesseceennneneeeeeeees 2 402 45 02 gt NSL Option SOUDs discincnacrsonsoncmexamnaimnnanneisraseiiaaad 2 404 45 04 Voice Mail Digit Add Assigriment 020 ccccceeseeeesseeeeeeeeereteeeeees 2 405 45 05 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits 2 406 Progam Ar I RS ne even em eres ert E 2 407 41 01 Well System OPO Si rirni 2 407 47 02 intail Station Mailbox O Plone isccscicckeceviescreatcetsecesvetcsctveten ewe 2 411 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options ccccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenes 2 415 47 06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options cccccccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeee
310. egram 20 Systemi Option Setup sranani A EE 2 167 200ta E ODIOS eene 2 167 20 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 2 169 20 03 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 eeeeees 2 172 20 04 System Options for Virtual Extensions 2 174 20 06 lt Class of Service for EXIGNSIONS c seccicescsaterscteenieiierresiecei enti 2 175 20 07 Class of Service Options Administrator Level 2 176 20 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service eee 2 178 20 09 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service 2 180 20 10 Class of Service Options Answer Service ccccccccccccereereeeerees 2 182 20 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service 2 184 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service eee 2 186 20 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ceeee 2 187 20 14 Class of Service Options for DISA E amp M cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 191 Ue RMO Core UDa a 2 193 20 16 Selectable Display Messages ccecceeeeeeseeessecceneneneeneneeee 2 195 20 17 Operator Extensi scoica 2 197 20 18 lt Service TONG TIME S sssrin eE EREE 2 198 20 19 System Options for Caller D sissecisscvarcicsscrsnersiatdnisisisrsisigieigiergiaissss 2 199 20 20 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeenneeneees 2 200 20 21 System Options for L
311. eight digits e g extension number or Service Code To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys clearing an extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended Enter key to be cleared 00 or 00 If using WebPro or PC Programming delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding Without clearing an extension key first the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display although the DSS function works correctly If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping Input Data Index 1 DSS Console Number 01 12 Index 2 Item No Key Number Function Number Additional Data 01 001 114 0 99 0 99 General Refer to Table 2 7 Function Functional Level x00 x99 Appearance Functional Level Number List on page 2 313 Table 2 7 Function Number List 1 General functional level 00 99 00 99 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 01 DSS One Touch Extension Number or On Red DSS Ext Busy any Numbers up to Off DSS Ext Idle DND External DND 36 digits Transfer CFW Busy CFW Noans CFW Busy Noans CFW Both CFW FL ME Fast Blink Red DND Intercom DND All CFW Imm 02 Microphone Key ON On
312. eller Tail Dis asked to change by engineer placement V2 0 Effective when PRG 84 31 19 1 Added 24 RTP Echo Can 1 32ms Do not change the setting unless 7 84 31 19 celler Tail Length 2 48 ms asked to change by engineer V2 0 Added 3 64 ms Select length of echo 4 80 ms Effective when PRG 84 31 19 1 5 96 ms 6 112 ms 7 128 ms 25 RTP Echo Can 0 6 9dB 9dB Do not change the setting unless 5 84 31 19 celler Default 0 9dB asked to change by engineer ERL Level V2 0 1 6dB Select length of echo Added 2 3dB Effective when PRG 84 31 19 1 5 6dB 6 9dB 26 RTP Echo Can 0 Disable 0 celler Echo Type 1 Line Echo Cancel ler 2 Acoustic Echo Can celler 27 RTP Max ERLE 0 10 24 54 dB Do not change the setting unless 2 84 31 19 V2 0 Added 0 24dB asked to change by engineer 1 27 dB Select maximum echo return loss level 9 51 dB Effective when PRG 84 31 19 1 10 54 dB 28 RTP Tx Level 0 Disable Type 1 Type 7 Control 1 TxLevelControl 8 3 V1 5 mode Changed 2 TxAutomaticLevel Type 9 11 15 Control mode 0 3 HLC 2 524 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 29 RTP Tx Level 0 16 24 24 dB 8 Control Level 24dB 1 21dB 2 18dB 8 0dB 14 18 dB 15 21 dB 16 24 dB 30 RTP Tx Automa 0 12 42 dbm 6 Do not change the setting unless 7 84 31 2
313. em Input Data Default No 01 Notification 0 Off 0 1 On 02 Notification Begin Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 03 Notification End Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 04 Notification Type 0 Undefined 1 1 Voice 2 Pager 05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 08 Notification Security 0 Off 1 1 On 09 Notification Day of week Sunday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 10 Notification Day of week Monday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 11 Notification Day of week Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 12 Notification Day of week Wednes 0 Disabled 1 day V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 13 Notification Day of week Thurs 0 Disabled 1 day V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 14 Notification Day of week Friday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 15 Notification Day of week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 2 442 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual SL1100 2 443 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 21 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Level IN Description Program Use Program 47 21 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options to define the IntraMail Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options 47 Input Da
314. em Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Private Line 0 Disable Private 0 Line Normal 1 Enable Private Line Private Line 10 DTMF Tones for 0 Disable No Use this option to enable 1 or disa 0 Outgoing Calls 1 Enable Yes ble 0 DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls 11 Account Code 0 Disabled user can Per trunk enable or disable the abili 1 Required not enter account co ty to enter an account code on an des using this trunk inbound or outbound trunk call 1 Enabled user can enter account codes using this trunk 13 Trunk to Trunk 0 Disable No Use this option to enable 1 or disa 1 Transfer 1 Enable Yes ble 0 loop supervision for the trunk This option is required for Call Forwarding Off Premise and Tan dem Trunking only 14 Long Conversa 0 Disable No Use this option to enable or disable 0 20 21 03 tion Cutoff 1 Enable Yes the Long Conversation Cutoff fea 20 21 04 ture for each trunk 15 Long Conversa 0 Disable No Use this option to enable or disable 0 20 21 01 tion Alarm Be 1 Enable Yes the Long Conversation Alarm for 20 21 02 fore Cutoff each trunk 16 Forced Release 0 Disable No Use this option to enable disable 0 24 01 01 of Held Call 1 Enable Yes forced release for calls on Hold If 24 01 05 enabled the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a pro grammed interval Program 24 01 05 If disabled forced dis connectio
315. em Item Input Data Description Default No 04 Time Zone 0 24 0 12 Hours and Determine the offset from Greenwich 07 24 12 Hours Mean Time GMT time Then enter its respective value For example Eastern Time US and Canada has a GMT offset of 5 The program data would then be 7 0 12 1 11 2 10 9 4 8 5 7 Sa 6 7 5 24 12 05 NIC Interface 0 Auto Detect NIC Auto Negotiate 0 1 100Mbps Full Du CPU plex 2 100Mbps Half Du plex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 4 10Mbps Half Duplex 06 Network Address Port 0 No Disable If using an external NAPT Router or not 0 Translation NAPT 1 Yes Enable Router Setup 07 NAPT Router IP Ad 0 0 0 0 Set the IP address on the WAN side of 0 0 0 0 dress Default Gate 126 255 255 254 router way WAN 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 08 ICMP Redirect 0 NO Signaling pack When receiving ICMP redirect message 0 ets will follow the ICMP this determines if the IP Routing Table up redirect message dates automatically or not 1 YES Signaling pack ets will NOT follow the ICMP redirect message 09 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Assign the IP Address for the VoIPDB 172 16 0 10 126 255 255 254 If a VoIPDB is installed in the system it is 128 0 0 1 recommended to set PRG 10 12 01 to 191 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 and all connections to the system 192 0 0 1 will be made through the VoIPDB 223 255 255 254 2 14 Program 10 System Configuration Setu
316. en the voice is encoded using the PCM 3 30 ms Pulse Code Modulation method a unit is 4 40ms a frame of 10ms The Audio frame size setting is only from IP phone to IP phone When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will al ways use a 20 ms frame size Ba Softphone SP310 only supports 20 ms or 40 ms 02 G 711 Silence Detec 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0 tion VAD Mode 1 Enable G 711 When there is silence the RTP packet is not sent When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop sending silence packets but the IP phone will continue to transmit silence packets 03 G 711 Type 0 A law Set the type of G 711 1 1 p law 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G 711 Jitter 20 Minimum Buffer 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the average value of the G 711 Jitter 40 Standard Buffer 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G 711 Jitter 80 Maximum Buffer 07 G 729 Audio Frame 1 4 Maximum number of G 729 Audio Frames 2 1 10 ms 2 20 ms G 729 assumes the audio signal made by etc a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method The Audio frame size setting is only from IP phone to IP phone When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will al ways use a 20 ms frame size Softphone SP310 only supports 20 ms or 40 ms Prog
317. ense 0 9999 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 49 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 54 License Configuration for Each Package Level IN Description Use Program 10 54 License Configuration for Each Package to set the license information for each unit Input Data Slot Number 0 15 V3 5 Changed License Index Number 1 32 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 License Code 0000 9999 No Setting 02 License Quantity 0 255 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 50 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 58 Network Address Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 10 58 Network Address to set the local network address when the SIP Terminal V4 0 or higher terminal connects the system via a local router 4 0 Input Data Area Table 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Network Address 0 0 0 0 Sets local network address 0 0 0 0 10 46 14 126 255 255 254 If the system uses both the Intranet 128 0 0 1 and NAT router please input the IP 191 255 255 254 Network address of the terminal 192 0 0 1 connected to the Internet V4 0 223 255 255 254 Added 02 Subnet Mask 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0
318. ension in which the MAC address matches 04 Nickname Up to 48 characters Nickname section on Invite mes No Setting 15 05 17 sage Example Extension 100 has a Nickname set to PAUL Extension 101 has command 15 05 17 set to Nickname The inbound call to extension 101 from 100 shows PAUL Nickname must be unique in the system 07 Using IP Address Read Only 15 05 01 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 09 Call procedure Read Only 15 05 01 port 0 65535 15 CODEC Type 1 Type 1 Assign the CODEC Type of the SIP 1 84 24 2 Type 2 MLT 84 11 3 Type 3 15 05 01 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 16 Authentication Up to 24 characters Assign the authentication password No Setting 15 05 01 Password for SIP single line telephones 2 136 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 18 IP Duplication Al 0 Not Used If there is an adapter that has one IP 0 15 05 01 lowed Group 1 Group 1 address coming into it but has multi 2 Group 2 ple extensions off of it 3 Group 3 Assign all the extensions to a group 4 Group 4 so that way the CPU knows that the 5 Group 5 one IP address is assigned to multi 6 Group 6 ple extensions 7 Group 7 8 Group 8 9 Group 9 10 Group 10 20 Bottom Option Read Only Shows the type of adapter installed 0 10 03 10 Information 0 No Option
319. er Ta MB Ctg 1 Subscriber Mailbox setting ble 1 3 Use this option to specify the category STA Category 1 Mailbox No should Answer Ta of mailbox used as the Default Mail 2 Master Mailbox be 1 128 V3 5 Changed re ble2 8 0 box 3 Routing Mailbox fer to lt 47 02 InMail Station If the Default Mailbox is a Sub Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt scriber Mailbox the outside caller Category 2 Mailbox No should hears the mailbox greeting if recor be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 In ded and can leave a message Mail Group Mailbox Options on If the Default Mailbox is a Master page 2 415 gt Mailbox the outside caller hears Category 3 Mailbox No should the recorded announcement De be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 In pending on how the Announcement Mail Routing Mailbox Options on Mailbox is programmed InMail then page 2 420 gt hangs up reroutes the call or pro vides additional dialing options If the Default Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associ ated Dial Action Table If any of the Input Data values are entered the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selec tion below If any of the Input Data values are entered the termi nal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection below Default Mailbox Number Default Up to 3 digits using 0 9 Category 0 Skip Mailbox No Answer Ta MB Num setting ble 1 1
320. es will not route the route table PRG 14 06 01 that will be accessed in the local system Conditions None Feature Cross Reference SL Net Programming Manual 2 245 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 17 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Level IN Description Program Use Program 21 17 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party number for individual trunks 2 1 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Calling Party Number V2 0 Up to 16 digits No Setting 15 01 04 Changed 1 0 20 08 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 246 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level IN Description Program 21 Use Program 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Calling Party Number Up to 16 Digits No Setting 15 01 04 1 0 20 08 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 247 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 20
321. es 8 digit 43 Answer No Ring 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 0 14 05 Line Universal 8 digit 14 06 Answer 44 Callback Test for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT 799 SLT 8 digit 45 Enabled On 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT 749 15 03 07 Hook When 8 digit Holding SLT 46 Answer On Hook 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT 759 15 03 08 When Holding 8 digit SLT 47 Call Waiting An 0 9 Maximum of Terminal SLT 794 11 12 03 swer Split An 8 digit Splitting switching between calls swer 48 Account Code 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT HH 8 digit 51 VM Access 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 8 8 digit 53 Live Recording 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 654 at SLT 8 digit 54 VRS Routing for 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 782 ANI DNIS 8 digit Use when setting up ANI DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated At tendant Using the Transfer feature this also allows a call to be transfer red to the VRS 56 E911 Alarm Shut 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 786 21 01 13 Off 8 digit Enter the Service Code that an ex 21 01 14 tension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring 57 Tandem Trunk 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 8 ing 8 digit 58 Transfer Into 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 624 Conference 8 digit Assign the Service Code a user di als to Transfer a call to a Confer ence call 59 Trunk Drop Op 0 9 Maximum of Terminal SLT 660 eration for SLT 8 digit 62 Securit
322. escription of Alarm Alarm Re Content of y Alarm Type Name Cause Action Recover No YP port Alarm i y Status 1 2 0 PKG Initi 1 The PKG 1 PKG not inser 1 Insert PKG During initiali ERR alize Er failed to ini ted firmly firmly zation the REC ror tialize 2 PKG wasre 2 Insert PKG PKG is rec 2 The PKG moved but firmly ognized did not start not reinserted 3 Delete slot in normally firmly formation in 3 Old PKG data Program still reported 90 05 and in due to no initi sert the PKG alization again 2 2 0 PKG The unit didnot 1 The package 1 Please insert When unit is ERR Mounting step on a regu is not com the package reconfirmed REC Error lar procedure pletely inser firmly the error is and it was ted 2 Please try recovered pulled out 2 The package again after ini Or it is not nor is out of order tializing the mally inserted system data once when LED doesn t blink normally 3 Exchange packages Programming Manual 2 539 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Alarm Re Content of Alarm No Type port Name Alarm Cause Action Recovery Status 3 2 0 Connec The error occur 1 The unitis not 1 Please insert When unit is ERR tion fault red when com completely in the unit firmly confirmed REC between municating with serted 2 The power the error is CPU and the package 2 The power supply voltage recovered other When
323. ession 0 65535 180 seconds Timer Value 04 Called Party Info 0 Request URI 0 1 To Header 05 Expire Value of Invite 0 256 seconds Arrival of a message is ended when this 180 seconds time expires and there is no cut from the caller 06 Expire Value of Invite 1 3600 seconds The expiration time is set for the Invite 180 seconds send message Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 511 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 22 DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Level SA Description Program Use Program 84 22 DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DR700 Multiline logon information 84 Input Data Personal ID Index 001 128 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 User ID Up to 32 characters Input the User ID when using manual or No Setting auto registration 10 46 01 02 Password Up to 16 characters Input the Password when using manual or No Setting auto registration 10 46 01 Web pro indicates password as mark V3 0 Added 03 User ID Omission 0 Off Input the Personal ID from terminal auto 0 1 On matically when log on again 04 Log Off 0 Off Input the Personal ID from terminal auto 1 1 0n matically when log on again 05 Nick Name Up to 32 characters Input the Personal ID from terminal auto No Setting matically when log on again Conditions None Feature Cro
324. et Mode 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting Switching 8 digit 68 IntraMail Lan 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 664 47 02 16 guage Selection 8 digit for own exten sion 69 IntraMail Lan 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 665 20 13 53 guage Selection 8 digit 47 02 16 for specific ex tension 70 Backlight Bright 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 705 15 02 61 ness 8 digit 15 02 63 71 Auto Backlight 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 706 15 02 64 8 digit 15 02 65 72 Headset V An 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 714 nounce 8 digit 73 Select Incoming 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 761 15 28 01 Ring Tones at 8 digit trunk V1 5 Add ed MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 76 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 Level IN Description L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access Use Program 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 11 11 and 11 14 through 11 16 The following chart shows The number of each code 01 64 e The function of the Service Code The type of telephones that can use the Service Code The default entry For example dialing Item 05 cancels a previously set Camp On
325. et for one digit only disconnect the conversation after 24 02 07 the Trunk to Trunk Release Warn 24 02 10 ing Tone is heard 25 07 07 25 07 08 03 Conversation 0 64800 seconds Input how long the conversation ex 0 14 01 25 Continue Time tends when the Conversation Con 20 28 01 tinue Code is dialed 24 02 07 24 02 10 25 07 07 25 07 08 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 206 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 29 Timer Class for Extension Level IN Description Use Program 20 29 Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension There Program are 16 Classes that can be assigned You make eight entries for this Program one for each Night Service Mode This entry includes virtual extension numbers The details of classes are assigned by Program 20 31 0 Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Timer Class for Extension 0 15 0 0 Not assigned Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 207 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 30 Timer Class for Trunks Level IN Description Use Program 20 30 Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk There are 16 Classes that can be assigned You make eight entries for this Program one for
326. et in Program 22 08 06 DID Ring No An 0 64800 seconds In systems with DID Ring No An 20 22 12 swer Time swer Intercept this sets the Ring No Answer time This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the in tercept ring group 07 DID Incoming 0 64800 seconds 20 Ring Group No Answer Time 08 DID Pilot Call No 0 64800 seconds 60 Answer Time 09 DID to Trunk to 0 64800 seconds 20 Trunk no answer timer 10 VRS Waiting 0 Enable Always Set up the operation mode for Auto 0 22 14 Message Opera 1 Change by Manual Attendant and Queuing Message 22 15 tion Operation 22 08 22 04 22 01 04 20 15 11 15 07 2 254 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 11 VRS Waiting 0 64800 seconds Setup the sending duration time of 20 22 14 06 Message Interval the Auto Attendant amp Queuing 22 15 06 Time The message is repeatedly sent out 41 11 06 during the specified time 12 Mobile Extension 0 64800 seconds 3 15 22 04 answer time Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 2 2 Central Office Calls Answering 2 255 Programming Manual Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 02 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Level IN Description Use Program 22 02 Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk There
327. et the options for the alarm report This program has six separate menu options Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options The system can have up to 50 reports 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Output Port Type 0 No Setting Indicate the type of connection used for 0 5 Compact Flash the System Alarms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 548 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 13 System Information Output Level IN Description Use Program 90 13 System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system Program information output Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Output Port Type 0 No Setting Indicate the type of connection used to 0 5 Compact Flash print the system information 05 Output Command Dial 1 press Hold This program only be able to access by Press Hold only to can Telephone programming cel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 549 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 16 Main Software Information Level Description Program Use Program 90 16 Main Software Information to display the main software information on the CPU 9 0 Input D
328. etting Programming Manual 2 503 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 16 SIP Trunk SIP URI E 0 OFF 0 164 Incoming Mode 1 Mode 1 V2 0 Added 2 Mode 2 17 Call Forward Moved 0 Disabled When enabled a 302 Moved temporarily 0 Temporarily Support 1 302 Return response is sent for external call forward V3 0 Added destinations Conditions Program None 84 None 2 504 Feature Cross Reference Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 15 SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 15 SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the SIP phone Input Data 84 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Registration Informa 0 Disable When set to 1 Enable the registration in 0 tion Automatic Dele 1 Enable formation is automatically deleted for H tion 323 02 Keep Alive Message 1 10 minutes Time interval that system sends a Ping to 1 Interval the terminal 03 Keep Alive Message 1 10 seconds Time that system waits for a Ping re 5 Timeout sponse from the terminal 04 Keep Alive Timeout 1 5 times How many times the system waits for a 3 non response before determining the ter minal is down Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming
329. etup for analog Trunk Port If the Analog Port is in used or if it is other than a Analog Trunk Port then it will give out the error message Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Adjustment Start Trunk Port Number This will start the Adjustment of Side No Setting 81 07 01 001 084 Tone for each Analog Trunk Port If 21 01 05 it is successful it will change the 21 01 06 PRG 81 07 If it is successful it will 14 01 07 ask to change it for all Analog Trunk 21 06 06 Port If you select to change the 21 05 07 Setting All Analog Trunk Port it will change all the Port in 81 07 02 1 digit data Dial 1 dight This setting will ask to use the digit 0 after Line is retrieved Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 608 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 92 Copy Program 92 01 Copy Program Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 92 01 Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal port group or other number Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data Description Source Number For Trunk Base Trunk Port Number Enter the extension trunk group 001 084 or other number fr
330. etup to set up the basic CODEC options for SIP trunks Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Number of G 711 1 10 ms Maximum number of G711 Audio 2 Audio Frame 2 20 ms Frames When the voice is encoded 3 30 ms using the PCM Pulse Code Modu 4 40 ms lation method a unit is a frame of 10ms 02 G 711 Silence 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence 0 Detection VAD 1 Enable with G 711 When there is silence Mode the RTP packet is not sent 03 G 711 Type 0 A law Set the type of G 711 1 1 p law 04 G 711 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G 711 20 fer Minimum Jitter Buffer 05 G 711 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the average value of the G 711 40 fer Minimum Jitter Buffer 06 G 711 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G 80 fer Maximum 711 Jitter Buffer 07 G 729 Audio 1 6 Maximum number of G729 Audio 2 Frame 1 10ms 2 20ms Frames G 729 assumes the audio etc signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as sumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method 08 G 729 Silence 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence 0 Compression 1 Enable with G 729 When there is silence VAD Mode the RTP packet is not sent 09 G 729 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 20 fer Minimum Buffer of G 729 is set Jitter is the variat
331. f 0 no setting then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller s extension refer to Program 14 06 This setting is available only in External Speed 1 3 Dialing Mode Program 13 01 01 Input Data Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 999 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Trunk Group Route Number V3 0 O Follow the caller s extension trunk group rout No Setting Changed ing PRG 21 02 1 25 Trunk group 1 25 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Programming Manual 2 105 Program 13 SL1100 Level SB ISSUE 4 0 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 06 Speed Dial Number and Name Description Use Program 13 06 Speed Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each Speed Dial Number Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Speed Dial Number 01 20 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Speed Dialing Data 1 9 0 x Pause Press line key 1 Recall No Setting Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 Maximum 36 digits Name Maximum 12 Characters Use dial pad to enter name Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial 2 106 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 11 Abbreviated Dial Group Name Level SB Description Use Program 13 1
332. f when PRG15 03 03 1 Special 19 Door Phone 1 6 Set the SLT door phone number 0 10 03 05 Number V4 0 When unlocking the door PRG10 61 SLIU Added will be in effect 10 61 Psa 15 05 46 oO not se the same door phone number be tween PRG10 03 0 5 SLIU and PRG15 05 4 2 134 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Normal Outgoing Call idle Reverse Normal Incoming Call Idle Reverse Normal Call Pickup Idle _ Program Reverse 1 Off Hook 2 Calling Ringing 3 Answer 4 Detect Hang Up 5 On Hook 1 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Single Line Telephones Programming Manual 2 135 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 05 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Level IN Description Use Program 15 05 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP telephone Program 1 5 Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Terminal Type Read Only 0 NGT 1 H 323 2 SIP 3 MEGACO 4 SIP MLT 02 IP Phone Fixed MAC address MAC Address of registered SIP MLT 00 00 00 15 05 01 Port Assignment 00 00 00 00 00 00 phone is stored and or can input the 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF MAC address of an SIP MLT phone so when it comes online it is provi ded with the ext
333. for monitor from No Setting to 8 digits outside IP terminal cannot set as moni tored extension 11 Interval of Auto Dial 0 3600 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 221 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 47 Time pattern setting for Watch Mode Level Description Program Use Program 20 47 Time pattern setting for Watch Mode to defines the watch mode time pattern 2 0 Input Data Time Pattern 01 08 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Watch Mode Time 0 Off Define watch mode on off against time pat 0 Pattern 1 On tern 1 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 222 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 48 Time pattern setting for Security Sensor Level IN Description Use Program 20 48 Time pattern setting for Security Sensor to defines the Security Sensor time Program pattern Input Data 2 0 Time Pattern 01 08 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Security Sensor Time 0 Off Define security sensor on off against time 0 Pattern 1 On pattern 1 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 223 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 49 Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 49 Calle
334. fore normally was installed 2 There isa downloaded before re possibility that the error is mains the unit pro recovered gram is broken though an ex ternal factor of the noise etc is thought 3 Please load in to the USB memory and try again when you back up the unit pro gram 4 Please Check with maker on uncertain points 2 540 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Alarm Re Content of Alarm No Type port Name Alati Cause Action Recovery Status 6 0 0 Blocking The link of ter Terminal Confirm the termi The error is ERR minals connec Breakdown nal connected with recovered REC ted with the ESI Faulty wiring same ESI If they when con package came and wiring ter work normally necting or ex off mination confirm the break changing it External down or the wiring noise for the terminal ESI package Exchange the ter Breakdown minal that doesn t work and the work ing terminal and confirm it s work ing An external factor of the noise etc is thought Please reconfirm wiring and the in stallation etc Please inquire of the manufacturer when the problem occurs after it con firms it 8 1 0 RAM RAM backup Check the battery The error is ERR Backup battery on the connector If it is recovered REC Battery CPU unit is un connected correct once the bat Error plugged or de ly replace the bat tery is re fecti
335. fy a starting and end ad dress the system uses the part of the table for look ups When you specify a starting address and length the system uses that part of the table for routing If the in coming ANI DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the ta ble the system routes according to the associated Name data That da ta can be an extension Department Group pilot number the voice mail master number or a trunk ring group COS 01 Start 900 End 999 COS 02 15 Start 0 End 0 13 04 07 Routing on ANI DNIS Error 0 Play Busy Tone to Caller 1 Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25 03 Transfer This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string COS 01 1 COS 02 15 0 25 03 08 Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer 0 Play Busy or Ring back Tone to Caller Busy NoAns 1 Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25 04 Transfer This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer COS 01 0 COS 02 15 0 25 04 Programming Manual 2 345 Program 34 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Calling Number 1 8 When Item 01 0 ANI DNIS re COS 01 7 34 09 01 Address Length ceive format is the address use COS 02 1
336. ge iLBC Jitter Buffer 60 Standard 47 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer 120 Maximum 48 ILBC payload number 96 127 The payload number of iLBC is set How 98 ever the same number as Item 31 cannot be set 49 RTP Filter 0 Disable 1 1 Enable 50 Fax Relay mode 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 51 T 38 Protocol mode 0 R U V1 5 Changed 1 1 U R V1 5 Changed 2 RTP V1 5 Changed 3 UDPTL V1 5 Changed 52 Fax Max Rate 1 V 27ter 4800 bps 5 3 V 29 9600 bps 5 V 17 14400 bps 56 Low Speed DataRe 0 2 0 dundancy 57 High Speed Data Re 0 2 0 dundancy 58 TCF Handling 0 Local 1 1 Network 61 T 38 RTP Format Pay 96 127 100 load Number 62 DTMF Level mode 0 VoIPDB Unit 0 1 Main Soft 63 DTMF Level High 1 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm 64 DTMF Level Low 1 33 dBm 28 28 6 dBm Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 510 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VolIPDB 84 20 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 20 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information session timers called party information and expire value of invite Input Data 84 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Registrar Proxy Port 1 65535 5070 02 Session Timer Value 0 65535 180 seconds 03 Minimum S
337. gits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Delete Terminal License Delete Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 589 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 44 Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 44 Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface Input Data License Delete Code 000 000 000 999 999 999 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Delete Terminal License Delete Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 590 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 45 Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone Level IN Description Program Note This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming Use Program 90 45 Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the 9 0 Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Temporary Password Change Re 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00
338. go 13 04 02 ing call hitory Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance Programming Manual 2 623 Program 93 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 93 System Information 93 05 Department Group Information Level SA This Program is available for V3 0 or higher Description Use Program 93 05 Department Group Information to display the settings of each department group Input Data Department Group Number 1 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Set Automatic 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 25 transfer at De 1 Enable Indicates Automatic transfer setting partment Group status per Department Group call 02 Set Delayed 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 28 transfer at De 1 Enable Indicates Delayed transfer setting partment Group status per Department Group call 03 Set DND at De 0 Disable Read Only No Setting 11 11 30 partment Group 1 Enable Indicates DND setting status per call Department Group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Maintenance 2 624 Program 93 System Information ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 MEMO Programming Manual 2 625 SL1100 Programming Manual NEC Corporation ISSUE 4 0
339. gram ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 21 Traffic Report Output Level IN Description Use Program 90 21 Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report Program output Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Output Port Type 0 No setting 0 3 LAN Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Traffic Reports Programming Manual 2 555 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 23 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones Level IN Description Note This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming Use Program 90 23 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone from the system Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delete IP Telephone Delete Dial 1 press This assignment removes the station num Hold ber association with the MAC address of Press Hold only to can the IP station cel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 556 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the alar
340. gram 19 DSS Key Virtual 0 No Sets the mode 0 Extension Mode 1 Yes of a virtual ex tension key that appears on a DSS con sole 24 LCD scroll mode 0 Character 0 1 Dot Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 171 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 03 System Options for Single Line Telephones Level Program 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 SLT Call Waiting 0 Hook Flash Hook For a busy single line telephone set 0 11 12 47 Answer Mode ing the mode used to answer a camp 1 Hook Flash Serv ed on trunk call ice Code 794 02 Ignore Received 0 Do Not Ignore No Use this option to define whether 0 15 03 01 DP Dial on DTMF 1 Ignore Yes the system should receive dial pulse SLT Port and DTMF signals 0 or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals 1 03 SLT DTMF Dial to 0 Receive all dialed Type 0 The system keeps the 0 20 03 04 Trunk Lines data before sending digits dialed by the single line tel All ephone on a trunk in a buffer Af 1 Direct through out ter all the digits are received the Direct system sends all the digits to the trunk If the time space between digits is longer than the time in Item 4 the system considers all digits received Type 1 The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediate ly If the
341. gram 22 01 01 23 Speed Dial Pre 0 Preview This option defines how a speed dial 0 view Mode 1 Outgoing Immedi key functions when pressed If set to ately Preview 0 the speed dial number can be previewed before dialing If set to Outgoing Immediate 1 the number is dialed immediately 27 Handset Volume 0 Back to Default Determine how an extension hand 1 Back set volume is set after it is adjusted 1 Stay at previous during a call level Stay PES When 1 is assigned in this pro gram and a user sets the volume to maximum the volume is reset to a level to meet FCC standards when the user hangs up 28 Message Waiting 0 Green Determine whether an extension 1 Lamp Color 1 Red Message Waiting Lamp lights Green 0 or Red 1 when a message is received 29 PB Back Tone 1 63 15 5 dB This program allows adjustment of 32 0 dB Level 15 5 dB the PB Back Tone Level when you are calling an ISDN Line 30 Toll Restriction 0 Virtual Extension Select the Toll Restriction Class to 1 15 02 21 Class Follows virtual exten use when placing a call from a virtu sion Toll Class in PRG al extension 21 04 1 Real Extension Follows physical sta tions Toll Class in PRG 21 04 34 Call Register 0 Trunk Mode The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk 1 Mode 1 Extension Trunk calls only 0 or both Internal and Mode Trunk calls 1 35 Message Waiting 1 Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 3 Lamp Cycle for 2
342. gramming Manual 2 173 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 04 System Options for Virtual Extensions Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 04 System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for Virtual Extensions There are 50 available Virtual Extension ports 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 03 Virtual Extension 0 64800 seconds Virtual Extensions set for Delayed 10 Delay Interval Ringing see Program 15 11 ring the extension after this time 04 Virtual Extension 0 Normal When set to Enhanced the BLF will 1 Key Seize Mode 1 Enhanced Option not show as being busy when the station is on a trunk call When set to Normal the BLF will show as being busy when on a trunk call 05 Ringtone mode 0 Off Enable the distinctive ring tone 0 22 03 01 for incoming to 1 On when incoming ring 15 08 01 VE V2 0 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Virtual Extensions 2 174 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service COS to an Program extension There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned To specify the options in each Class of Service refer to Programs 20 07 t
343. h digits If set to 0 trunk names are printed instead 17 Print Account Code 0 ACC Determine if SMDR should print Account 0 or Caller Name of In 1 CNAME Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call coming Call 18 Print Mode for Caller 0 Normal Determine how SMDR should print Caller 0 Name of Incoming 1 Line Feed Name of Incoming Call Call 19 Dialed Number Out 0 Display from the first Determine if the dialed number should dis 0 put Format digit play from the first digits or from the last 1 Display from the last digits This option is only available for out digit going calls 20 External Information 0 Transfer Information Determine which information is displayed 0 CFW Mode 1 Incoming Information in the STATION area for a transferred call when the extension has Call Forward set with an Abbreviated Dial number as the destination Selecting 0 Transfer In fo will display the extension number which called the extension with external Call For ward set Selecting 1 Incoming Info will display the extension number which has the external Call Forward set This option only applies when Call For ward is set using a service code Pro grams 11 11 01 11 11 07 and the desti nation uses an Abbreviated Dial bin It does not include Off Premise or Centrex transfers 21 S Point Terminal 0 MSN Number 0 Number 1 Extension Number 22 Security Auto Dialing 0 No Output Emergency call from Watch Mode Define 1 1 Outpu
344. hat system send to 1 On Deny invalid In SIP server and the Invite information that vite message system receive are different system sends 404 Not Found message If PRG10 29 05 Register Mode is 0 Off it is necessary to set 0 Off in PRG10 29 16 17 DNS Source Port 0 65535 10 29 08 must be On 53 This sets the DNS source port number Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 32 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 30 SIP Authentication Information Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 30 SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP trunks Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 User Name Up to 64 Characters This sets the user name of the SIP trunk No Setting 03 Password Up to 32 Characters This sets the SIP trunk password No Setting 04 Authentication Trial 0 9 This is how many times it will try an au 1 thenticate before timing out and not regis tering Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 33 Program 10 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 31 Network Keep Alive Setup Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 10 31 Network Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the Aspi
345. he Automated Attendant should answer The Automated Attendant follows the routing specified by the selected Answer Table 02 Record PAD Control 1 63 15 5 dBm 32 15 5 dBm 03 Voice Prompt Lan Refer to Ta 1 guage ble 2 12 47 10 03 De fault Table on page 2 427 04 Telephone User Inter 0 Numeric interface 0 face V4 0 Deleted 1 Mnemonic interface 2 426 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Table 2 12 47 10 03 Default Table Item Name Input Data 47 10 03 Voice Prompt Language 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 4 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian V3 0 Added Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 427 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 11 InMail Answer Table Options Level IN Description Program Use Program 47 11 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables InMail provides eight Answer Tables 1 16 V3 0 higher To set up the schedules for each Answer Table g
346. hether fixed codes are 0 45 04 Mail Protocol Se 1 Program used or the codes used in Program 11 11 50 5 lection 45 04 are used for analog voice mail 1 Program protocol 16 Voice Mail Fax Up to four digits Assign up to four digits in front of No Setting 15 03 16 Digit Add As the station number sent to the SLT signment port when a call is forwarded 17 Reply Mailbox 0 No Whether or not to include the mail a 45 04 Number 1 Yes box number in the analog voice mail protocol 18 Trunk Number 2 3 Assign the digits of trunk number 2 Mapping mapping Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Voice Mail Integration Analog Programming Manual 2 403 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 02 NSL Option Setup Level SA Description Program Use Program 45 02 NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration 45 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD message 0 Send DTMF tone to SLT VM port 1 1 Send 6KD message to Serial port 02 Forced Send Dial Tone 0 Normal 0 1 Forced 03 Send 51A Message 0 Off 1 1 0n 04 NSL over LAN 0 Off 1 1 0n 05 Send 4PM message 0 Off 0 1 0n Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 404 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 04 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Level IN
347. hing to define a yearly schedule of holiday night Program switch settings This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to be closed such as a national holiday Input Data 1 2 Night Mode Service Group Number 01 04 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Days and Months 0101 1231 No Setting e g 0101 Jan 1 1231 Dec 31 Time Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 95 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Description Program Use Program 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day Night Mode Group for each extension 1 2 Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Night Mode Service 1 Night Mode Group 1 Assign extension numbers into one of the 1 Group Number 2 Night Mode Group 2 four Night Mode Service Groups 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service 2 96 Program 12 Night Mode Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 06 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Level IN Description Use Program 12 06 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day Night Mode Program Gr
348. hrough 20 13 You make eight entries for Program 20 06 one for each Night Service Mode 2 0 Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Class of Service for Extensions P15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Class of Service Programming Manual 2 175 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 07 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Level Program 0 Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Manual Night 0 OFF User cannot Turns off or on an extension for COS1 14 11 10 01 Service Enabled control manual night manual Night Service Switching COS15 1 mode 1 ON User can con trol manual night mode 02 Changing the 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to COS1 14 11 10 02 Music on Hold 1 On change the Music on Hold tone COS15 1 Tone 03 Time Setting 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to set COS1 14 11 10 03 1 On the Time via Service Code 728 COS15 1 04 Storing Speed 0 Off Deny Turns off or on an extension to store COS1 14 11 10 04 Dialing Entries 1 On System or Group Speed Dialing COS15 1 numbers 05 Set Cancel Auto 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 14 11 10 06 matic Trunk to 1 On ability to use the Trunk to Trunk COS
349. ht Mode SetU cercen 2 91 12 01 Night Mode Function SUID ci sisiarsiarisscicssrssleveicissssigarsienaisiisiecsgieds 2 91 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns sssrerrrrrrereeeseeeererereeeesnsernssesesses 2 92 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching srissisisisrniisinirrsiorninernierniernierinisrasens 2 94 12 04 Holiday Night Service Switching ssssesssrrrrerinresesssessererrrerensenssssessess 2 95 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 2 96 12 06 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks 2 97 12 07 Text Data tor Night MOdessssssecasiasnninnen a 2 98 12 08 lt Night Mode Service RANGE eicecien ataei 2 99 Program 13 Ab reviated Dial nicnssinsinsan aaa 2 100 13 01 Speed Dialing Option Setup ccccccccceccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeess 2 100 13 02 Group Speed Dialing Bins iscisiscisisaialinulicarinsansausnanaaudeainanaaus 2 101 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions 2e 2 102 13 04 Speed Dialing Number and Name siisiirisiririrrissssssssssirisiessssssssesesss 2 103 13 05 Speed Dial Trunk Group cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaeeaaeeneeeseeeeeess 2 105 13 06 Speed Dial Number and Name ccccccccccccceecseneseeesseessenseeeseeeeees 2 106 13 11 Abbreviated Dial Group Name ccccccccccceececeeeeeeesseeeseeneeeeseeeeees 2 107 Frogram 14 7 Trunk Basie SSDs aaia AnA aS SE aaan Ea esini 2 108 14 01 Basic Trun
350. i aiinscssscisivisvevsvearssaissiarriasiniaasiaaviedenvads 2 31 10 30 SIP Authentication Information Setup cccccccceccecseeeeteeeteeeeeeeeees 2 33 10 31 Network Keep Alive Setup cceceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaaeasneeseeeneees 2 34 10 33 SIP Registrar Proxy Information Basic Setup cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 35 10 36 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup 2 36 103r EAP SOU an ae RR Eaa 2 37 10 39 Fractional SUG sssini ENER 2 38 1040P Trink Avala eene 2 39 10 42 Virtual Loop Back Port SO ciaiiciensisiscissasipicigciaisiasmenndvasiensintiais 2 40 10 45 IF Routing Table ss se a eee EA 2 41 10 46 DR700 Server Information Setup eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeees 2 42 10 47 Terminal License Server Information Setup cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 44 1046 License ACI TOUCH iaisiitiiaainanmeihani aa bikie ss 2 45 10 49 License File Activation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaaeeaaeaeeeneeeeses 2 46 10 50 License Intormalon iisissiinsrmusaunwisnneneainisisicuaseanisnuds 2 47 10 51 PRITI Selection of PP asa ee csescaen sche tea peicanatonietbanedibeaveraeseansebneideceieis 2 48 10 52 Free Demo License MOMMANON sisi sissresscnninsiesssissinicrerssiaresisienaenens 2 49 Programming Manual i SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 10 54 License Configuration for Each Package c ccsssssesesereereeseseeeess 2 50 1008 TON PE NON ic gc ee ee esac as 8 ee ee eec
351. ic settings for each extension Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Extension Name Up to 12 Characters Define the extension virtual exten Ext 101 212 sion name No Setting V3 5 Changed 02 Outgoing Trunk 0 Off Use this option to set the extension 0 14 06 Line Preference 1 On outgoing Trunk Line Preference If 21 02 enabled the extension user re ceives trunk dial tone when they lift the handset The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map programming Pro grams 14 07 and 15 06 Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details 03 SMDR Printout 0 None Station will Use this option to include or exclude 1 not be reported in the the extension in the SMDR report SMDR print out 1 Yes Station will be reported in the SMDR print out 04 ISDN Caller ID 0 Disabled CPN is If both Program 15 01 04 and 1 10 03 05 NOT sent 10 03 05 are enabled the system 20 08 13 1 Enabled CPN is includes Caller ID in the Setup mes sent sage as Presentation Allowed If these options are disabled it is Pre sentation Restricted 05 Restriction for 0 Supervise dial de Enable or disable supervised dial 0 21 01 15 Outgoing Disable tection detection for an extension 21 01 16 on Incoming Line 1 Not supervise dial 21 01 17 detection 80 03 01 07 Do Not Call 0 Off 0 21 01
352. ice Prompt Language 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 4 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian V3 0 Added Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 419 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 07 InMail Routing Mailbox Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 07 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 Routing Mailbox Type 0 None Mailbox Type Mailboxes 01 1 Call Routing Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox 08 1 Call 2 Announcement type Routing 3 Directory Mailboxes 09 4 Distribution 32 2 An nouncement 03 Prompt Language Refer to Ta 1 ble 2 11 47 07 03 De fault Table on page 2 421 04 Telephone User Inter 0 Numeric interface 0 face 1 Mnemonic interface 2 Octel future
353. id 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation tern Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Modulation Pattern 6 High 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation Alarm Sensor Pattern Mid 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation Low 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation Pattern 7 High 1400Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation Trunk Incoming V3 0 Middle 760Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation Added Low 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation Pattern 8 High 1400Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation Trunk Incoming V3 0 Middle 760Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation Added Low 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation Pattern 9 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 16Hz Modulation Trunk Incoming V3 0 Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation Added Low 1100Hz 760Hz 16Hz Modulation Pattern 10 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 8Hz Modulation Trunk Incoming V3 0 Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation Added Low 1100Hz 760Hz 8Hz Modulation Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns e Selectable Ring Tones 2 478 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 04 ASTU Initial Data Setup Level MF Description Program Use Program 82 04 ASTU Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the SLT Input Data 8 2 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Companding Method Type 0 p law 0 1 A law 02 Ringing Frequency 0 25 Hz 1 20 Hz 1 20 Hz 2 16 Hz 03 Minimum Break Time 1 255 5 ms 1275 ms 2
354. ients 1 0 255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 35 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 32 Conditions e This is used if Program 82 07 is set to 4 Specified data 2 486 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference None Program 82 Programming Manual 2 487 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 11 SLIU Initial Data Setup Level IN Program Description Use Program 82 11 SLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various timers for SLIU 8 2 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Bounce Protect Time 0 No setting Specify a time for detection of a valid off 3 1 15 100 ms 1 5 Hook indication that is long enough to pre 300 ms sec vent an unintentional bounce of the receiv er from being detected as a new Off Hook indication from a Single Line Telephone 02 HookFlash Start Time 0 40 ms Specify the minimum hookflash time from 5 1 15 90 ms 790 ms a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice 290 ms Mail system before it is detected as the be ginning of a valid hookflash 03 HookFlash End Time 0 HST 0ms Specify the maximum hookflash duration 7 1 15 HST 100ms_ froma Single Line Telephone to receive a 990 ms HST 1500 ms second dial tone HST Hookflash Start Time Conditions None Featur
355. if an extension outgoing calls 0 for Outgoing Calls 1 On should be automatically recorded Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 152 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 13 Loop Keys Level IN Description Use Program 15 13 Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal Loop Keys Program can be incoming outgoing or both ways Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1 Incoming Loop Keys use the entry in item 2 Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2 Input Data 1 5 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01 24 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Outgoing Option 0 25 0 Programming Func 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS 1 25 As tion Key No 01 24 signs the Loop Key to the trunk group specified 02 Incoming Option 0 25 0 Programming Func 0 Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups tion Key No 01 24 1 25 Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group specified Conditions e Please set Loop Key at Program 15 07 before setting Program 15 13 Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 153 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys Level SB Description Use Program 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys to define the One Touch key data for each multili
356. ignal Tone 1 1 6 10 32 0 dB 36 External audible ring tone 0 2 10 10 32 0 dB 8 0 0 30 32 0 dB 37 External reorder tone 0 2 0 2 32 0 dB 11 3 32 0 dB 38 External busy tone 0 2 0 5 32 0 dB 11 5 32 0 dB 39 Special audible ring busy 0 6 0 5 32 0 dB tone 11 5 32 0 dB 0 5 32 0 dB 11 5 32 0 dB 10 10 32 0 dB 0 20 32 0 dB 40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 1 12 2 32 0 dB Transfer Call Waiting Tone 41 Intrusion tone 1 1 12 5 32 0 dB 42 Conference tone 0 0 0 0 32 0 dB 43 Intrusion tone 2 0 0 0 0 32 0 dB 44 External Dial Tone 0 1 9 1 26 3 dB DUD DISA Dial Tone 45 External Ring Back Tone 0 2 10 10 32 0 dB Ring Tone DDI 0 30 32 0 dB 46 External Busy Tone 0 2 0 5 32 0 dB Busy Tone DDI 11 5 32 0 dB 47 Number unobtainable tone 0 1 11 0 32 0 dB 48 VM message indication 0 2 9 1 32 0 dB tone 0 1 32 0 dB 50 External special audible ring 0 3 10 10 32 0 dB tone 12 2 32 0 dB 0 30 32 0 dB 51 External intercept tone 0 2 12 3 32 0 dB 4 2 32 0 dB 52 External call waiting tone 1 1 12 3 32 0 dB 53 External executive override 1 1 12 10 32 0 dB tone 54 Progress Tone V4 0 Add 0 2 0 6 32 0 dB ed 1 1 32 0 dB 55 Generate tone for TAPI2 1 0 1 3 0 32 0 dB 56 Warning Beep Tone Signal 1 1 2 8 32 0 dB ing Programming Manual 2 451 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Serv Service Tone Name Repeat U
357. ilable for V4 0 or higher Description Program 21 Use Program 21 27 HNPA Exceptions Setup to set the dial number sent Order to use this program PRG 21 01 20 needs to set as 2 Automatic Call Back Input Data Index 1 96 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 HNPA Excep Up to 6 digits 0 9 Itis a 6 digits starting with Area None 21 01 20 tions Wild Card Code which you want to have an ex 21 01 21 ception to it 21 01 22 21 26 01 If using wild card x make sure 21 28 01 it is 6 digits Example 123 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 252 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 28 Foreign NPA Locals Setup Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Podam Use Program 21 28 Foreign NPA Locals Setup to set the dial number sent Order to use this program PRG 21 01 20 needs to set as 2 Automatic Call Back 2 4 Input Data System Number 1 96 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Foreign NPA Ex Up to 6 digits 0 9 Foreign NPA Locals this is used to None 21 01 20 ceptions x Wild Card make exceptions of some area code 21 01 21 office code combinations that are 21 01 22 not within your home area code but 21 26 01 may be dialed as a local call Such 21 27 01 as Metro Lines If u
358. ilable program options Section 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN CAPACITIES The following table provides the capacities for the SL1100 system Table 1 4 System Number Plan Capacities System Number Plan Capacities Note System Type Related Pro gram Number Plan Capacities Trunk Port Number Analog Caller ID Detector detec 96 channels ted by DSP Classes of Service 15 20 06 Day Night Mode Numbers 8 12 07 Day Night Service Patterns 4 12 07 Dial Tone Detector 96 DTMF Receiver Toll Restriction Classes 15 Verifiable Account Code Table 800 35 06 84 Programming Manual SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Telephone Extension Ports e Multiline Terminals Single Line Phones Analog Devices VoIPDB Extensions SIP MLT Std VoIPDB amp MEMDB is re quired Need license to be Max SIP Std 112 V3 5 Changed 96 V3 5 Changed 80 V3 5 Changed 32 System Number Plan Capacities Note System Type Number Plan Capacities Related Pro gram Trunk Ports Total 76 Analog Trunks 36 T1 PRI Trunk Ports 48 e VoIPDB Trunk Ports 16 VoIPDB amp MEMDB is re quired Need license to be Max DID Translation Tables 20 22 10 DID Translation Table Entries 800 22 10 DISA e Classes of Service 15 20 14 e Users 15 25 09 Ring Groups 25 22 04 Trunk Access Maps 84 14 07 Trunk Group Numbers 25 14 05 Trunk Routes 25 14 06 Digital Extension Ports
359. imer 180 2 562 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 21 03 01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 1 All trunks All modes Group1 22 01 03 Incoming ring no answer alarm start Timer 30 22 01 04 Normal DIL incoming no answer Timer 30 22 01 08 DID DDI Pilot Call No answer timer 30 22 08 01 Second IRG Setup for unanswered 1 All trunks All modes IRG1 25 03 01 DUD DISA Transfer Ring Group at Wrong dialing 1 All trunks All modes IRG1 25 04 01 DUD DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer 1 Busy All trunks All modes IRG1 25 07 07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer 180 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment 101 Console No 1 101 80 04 06 ON min time Busy Tone for Trunk 9 80 04 07 ON max time Busy Tone for Trunk 12 80 04 08 OFF min time Busy Tone for Trunk 9 80 04 09 OFF max time Busy Tone for Trunk 12 80 04 12 Frequency No 1 Busy Tone for Trunk 2 80 04 14 Twit Level Rev1 Rev2 Rev3 1 80 05 01 Date Format 1 yy mm dd 80 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup 45 Table2 81 01 09 Time ringing signal stop detection time 70 4 5 s 82 04 08 Maximum hook flash time 132 660 ms 15 03 09 Caller ID Function 1 15 03 14 Forwarded Caller ID display mode 1 40 07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 15 47 02 16 Voice Pr
360. ing per trunk when DISA is being used After the user enters the 6 digit DISA password if the user dials 0 this command will decide which operator to route the call to Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 214 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 37 Operator Extension Group Setup Level Description Use Program 20 37 Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator s in the operator Program group Input Data 2 0 Operator Group 1 15 Operator Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Operator Extension Group Setup Up to eight digits No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 215 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 38 Operator Group Setting Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 38 Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone 2 0 Input Data Operator Group 1 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Operator Access 0 Step Assign if the operator is called starting 0 Mode 1 Circular with the first operator every time 0 ora different operator is tried first 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 216 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 42 Night Mode for each pac
361. ing Manual 2 269 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group Level IN Description For each DID Translation Table use Program 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first destination group for DID calls Depending on the entry in Programs 22 09 02 and 22 11 04 the incoming calls route to the first destination group by the following e Vacant number intercept vacant number means that no phone is connected no station unit is installed or the extension number is not defined in Program 11 02 e Busy intercept e Ring no answer intercept If the destination is 0 the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22 11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk If Programs 22 11 05 and 22 11 06 are set the priority of transferring is in this order Program 22 11 05 Program 22 11 06 Program 22 12 For busy and no answer calls if the first and third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first destination If the first and second destinations are not defined but the third destination is the call goes directly to the third destination Input Data Conversion Table Area Number 01 20 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Incoming Group Number V1 5 0 No setting 1 Changed 01 25 Incoming Ring grou
362. ion Default No 01 ACD Group No 0 2 Designate for each incoming trunk wheth 0 0 No Setting er or not Night Announcement Service is assigned Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 364 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program 41 In Program 41 03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group for each incoming trunk group set up in Program 22 05 designate which ACD Group 01 02 the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal Use Program 41 06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks Use Program 41 07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 01 25 ACD Work Period Mode Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 ACD Group Number 0 2 For each incoming trunk group set up in 0 0 No Setting Program 22 05 designate which ACD Group 1 2 the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods 02 Night Announcement 0 No Designate for each incoming trunk wheth 0 Service 1 Yes er or not Night Announcement Service is assigned 03 Priority Data 0 1 7 Determine whether or not an incoming call 0 0 No P
363. ion in the time between pack ets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed 10 G 729 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the average G 729 Jitter Buffer 40 fer Standard 11 G 729 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the maximum G 729 Jitter Buf 80 fer Maximum fer 12 Number of G 723 1 30 msec Maximum number of the G 723 Au 1 Audio Frame 2 60 msec dio Frame 14 G 723 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the minimum value of the G 723 30 fer Minimum Jitter Buffer Programming Manual 2 499 Program 84 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 15 G 723 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the average value of the G 723 60 fer Standard Jitter Buffer 16 G 723 Jitter Buf 0 300 ms Set the maximum value of the G 120 fer Maximum 723 Jitter Buffer 17 Jitter Buffer 1 static Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer 3 Mode 3 adaptive immedi 1 Size set to the fixed amount for ately the codec 2 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used 3 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used and adjusts at any time regardless of silence 18 Silence Com 1 30 Set the voice level judged to be si 20 pression VAD self adjustment and lence Change value based 30 Threshold 19 dB 10dB This entry is ignored if silence com 1 19 dB 49 dBm pression is disabled in 84 01 03 with G 711 or 84 01 06 wi
364. iption Program Use Program 34 07 E amp M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers 3 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 First Digit Pause E amp M Immediate 0 64800 seconds 3 seconds Start 02 First Digit Pause E amp M Wink Start 0 64800 seconds 0 03 First Digit Pause LD Trunk 0 64800 seconds 3 seconds 04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0 64800 seconds 0 05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for 0 64800 seconds 30 seconds E amp M Conditions e If Program 34 07 05 is left at default 30 the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the transfer when not answered Feature Cross Reference None 2 342 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 08 Toll Restriction Data for E amp M Tie Lines Level IN Description Use Program 34 08 Toll Restriction Data for E amp M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for Program E amp M Tie Lines This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21 05 13 Input Data 34 Class of Service 01 15 Table No 01 20 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Dial Data Up to 10 Digits 0 9 x No Setting 21 05 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 343 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 09 ANI DNIS Service Options Level Program 3 4 Input Data Class of Servic
365. is Table Number 252 Item Item Input Data Default No 04 Next Table Area Number 0 4 0 Programming Manual 2 391 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Program 44 2 392 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule Level IN Description Use Program 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS F Route Selection number to an ARS F Route table number for each ARS F Route time mode There are eight time modes for ARS F Route Access Input Data ARS F Route Selection Number 001 100 ARS F Route Time Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 ARS F Route Table Number 0 100 0 0 No Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual 2 393 Program 44 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 05 ARS F Route Table Level Program 44 IN Description Use Program 44 05 ARS F Route Table to set the ARS F Route table There are four kinds of order If the higher priority trunk groups are busy the next order group is used If a lower priority route is selected the caller may be notified with a beep tone Input
366. is option is 9 seconds When placing a digital pager notification the sys tem Seizes the trunk specified Dials the user entered notification number in Mes sage OP N Waits the 47 01 08 Delay in Dialing Digi tal Pager Callback Number interval Dials the number entered in 47 01 07 Digital Pager Callback Number The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure This means that by default the Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after trunk seizure 30 seconds 09 Wait Between Digital Pager Callout At tempts 1 255 minutes Notify Pager Intvl Use this option to set the minimum time 1 255 minutes between unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager Message No tification callouts A subscriber acknowl edges a digital pager notification by log ging onto their mailbox After this time expires InMail tries the cal lout again for up to the number of times set in 47 01 14 Number of Callout At tempts If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy it retries the number in one minute 15 minutes 2 408 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 10 Wait Between Non Pager Callout At tempts 1 255 minutes Notify N Pgr Intvl Use this option to set the minimum time 1
367. it tension Group 33 Dial Block 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 600 8 digit 34 Temporary Toll 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 775 21 07 Restriction Over 8 digit ride 2 74 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 35 Pilot Group With 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 650 drawing 8 digit 36 Toll Restriction 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 663 21 14 Override 8 digit 37 Ring Volume Set 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 729 8 digit 38 Programmable 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 752 15 07 Function Key 8 digit 11 11 17 Programming 2 Digit Service Co des 39 Station Speed Di 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 755 al Number Entry 8 digit 41 Tandem Ringing 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT No Setting 15 07 8 digit 30 03 42 Transfer Dial Set 0 9 Maximum of 689 13 06 ting for Out of 8 digit Range 43 Headset Mode 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 688 Switching 8 digit 45 Set Cancel Call 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 682 24 09 Forward All 8 digit Split 46 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 683 24 09 Forward Busy 8 digit Split 47 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 684 24 09 Forward No An 8 digit swer Split 48 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum
368. its 0 This program is used to assign a calling No Setting Data 9 party number per station Most Telco s will only ac If CPN information is programmed on both cept 10 digits the trunk and station when a call is made the CPN from the station will be sent to the Telco Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e ISDN Compatibility 2 242 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 14 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Level SA Description Use Program 21 14 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction Each code has six digits using any combination of 0 9 and x Input Data ID Table Number 1 100 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 User ID Dial Six digits No Setting 02 Walking Toll Restriction Class 1 15 1 Number Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Code Restriction Toll Restriction Programming Manual 2 243 Program 21 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Refer to Program 11 09 Trunk Access Code on page 2 68 when setting up alternat
369. its Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Route Table Number 0 25 1 14 06 0 No Setting Calls will not route 14 01 07 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 229 Program 21 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Level IN Description Use Program 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic External Call Forward The Route Table is set in Program 14 06 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Route Table Number 0 25 1 14 06 0 No Setting 14 07 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Trunk Group Routing 2 230 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Level IN Description Use Program 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an Program 21 extension The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21 05 and 21 06 A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class The higher class applies for outgoing calls Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No
370. k Data Setup cccccccccceccceecceeaeeeaeeeaeeesesseseeeeeneeeeseeeees 2 108 14 02 Analog Trunk Data Set arscaiciccicisciatisneiiceaciedaostisirsiationasaaleiguaioue 2 112 Wod Benna PEX SOUD ece ee eeraenea ees eevee ae este eee 2 115 PEOS TN O Laskin ivan aneninewinincavies 2 116 14 06 Trunk Group Routing eeeeeeeeeseessssereererrrrrrrrrrnrnssssssssstrrtttnrrnrnrrennns 2 117 14 07 lt Trunk Access Map SOU po ncuniincunubwnticinninnimniununcanaens 2 119 14 08 FSI on Hold Source for Teese rascatsee cities se siecectvectcrcecixescecnreeceeeld 2 121 14 09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks 2 122 14 11 lt 1D Setup Tor IP TRUNK creien 2 123 14 12 SIP Register ID Setup for IP TUM Kisississstistsssssssccistsssianatiaralicncinsesnaons 2 124 Program 15 7 Extension Basic SetuP ssa ei ae a EnEn 2 125 15 01 Basic Extension Data SQtup wisissscisssaieisiersiassiccrvasviveisiersianaiisiennis 2 125 15 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup cccccsccesseesteeeeteeeeeeeees 2 127 Programming Manual ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup c cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 133 15 05 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setuf eeeeeeeeeeees 2 136 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeneeeenees 2 139 15 07 agcole ect aye s Rg pie eld Beene ee eee nen ree eres ee 2 140 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension
371. kage Level IN Description Use Program 20 42 Night Mode for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package Program This Program uses ecology function Program 20 43 Input Data 2 0 PKG Number 02 15 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Ecology Mode 1 4 Assign Night mode group number 1 12 02 group No per each package slot Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 217 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 43 Power supply for each package Level IN Description Use Program 20 43 Power supply for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package This Program uses ecology function Program 20 43 Input Data PKG Number 02 15 V3 5 Changed Operation Mode 01 08 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Ecology Mode 0 Cut the power Assigns the power supply mode to each 1 1 Power Supply package base Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 218 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 44 Watch Mode Setup Level IN Description Use Program 20 44 Watch Mode Setup to defines the watch mode Program Input Data 2 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Internal Paging Group 0 3
372. l options while listening to a Subscriber Routing Mailbox Mailbox recorded or default greeting The numbers are 01 digits the caller can dial depends on the 16 setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options 13 Directory List Number 0 None Specify the Directory List number to which 0 1 8 List Number the Group Mailbox belongs All 14 Voice Prompt Lan Refer to Ta 1 guage ble 2 10 47 06 14 De fault Table on page 2 419 15 Enable Paging 0 No 0 1 Yes 16 Paging Option 0 RNA 0 1 Immediate 17 Telephone User Inter 0 Numeric interface 0 face 1 Mnemonic interface 2 Octel future 18 Enable Email Notifica 0 No 0 tion 1 Yes 19 Email Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 20 Include Msg as At 0 No 1 tachment 1 Yes 21 All Message Notifica 0 No 1 tion Enabled 1 Yes 22 All Find Me Follow 0 No 0 Me Enabled 1 Yes 23 Security Code Option 0 Always 0 1 Remote Logon only 24 Auto Play V1 5 Add 0 Disabled 0 ed 1 Enabled 25 Email message Save 0 No Change 0 Delete Option V1 5 1 Save Added 2 Delete 26 Queuing V3 0 Added 0 Disabled Use this option to enable or disable Mes 0 1 Enabled sage Notification Queuing If enabled Message Notification is stored in queue when there is no active notification desti nation 2 418 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Table 2 10 47 06 14 Default Table Item Name Input Data 47 06 14 Vo
373. l 2 195 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Number Message 5 BUSY CALL AFTER 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK 7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK 8 BUSINESS TRIP HHHHHH 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL 11 MESSAGE 11 12 MESSAGE 12 Program 13 MESSAGE 13 14 MESSAGE 14 15 MESSAGE 15 2 0 16 MESSAGE 16 17 MESSAGE 17 18 MESSAGE 18 19 MESSAGE 19 20 MESSAGE 20 Conditions Time value must be followed by two spaces Feature Cross Reference e Selectable Display Messages 2 196 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 17 Operator Extension Level IN Description Use Program 20 17 Operator Extension to designate an operator When an extension user dials 0 Program defined by Program 11 01 Type 5 calls go to the operator selected in this program If you do not assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option 2 0 Input Data Operator Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Operator s Ex Up to eight digits Define the extension numbers which 101 11 01 tension Number are to be used by operators 20 01 01 02 Operator Con 0 Normal Key Set Determines an operator console 0 sole 1 Special Operator type when any extension user dials Console 0 the as
374. l calls 170 14 01 15 tion Alarm 1 sounds after this time 02 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds After the initial long toll call warning 180 14 01 15 tion Alarm 2 tone additional warning tones sound after this time 03 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds This timer determines how long the 0 14 01 14 tion Cutoff for In system waits before disconnecting coming Call an incoming call 04 Long Conversa 0 64800 seconds This timer determines how long the 0 14 01 14 tion Cutoff for system waits before disconnecting Outgoing Call an outgoing call 05 Conversation 0 64800 seconds 180 cutoff for remote monitor Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Long Conversation Cutoff Programming Manual 2 201 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 23 System Options for CTI Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 23 System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delayed ring timer for 0 64800 seconds 30 seconds CTI 02 ALERT replay time 0 64800 seconds 8 seconds CTI 03 Trunk Virtual Bridge 0 Disable No Enable or disable the system to send trunk 0 TSP Driver 1 Enable Yes or virtual extension information to the TSP driver 04 The Timer that waits 0 64800 seconds 30 seconds for an off hook for Single Line Tele phone 06 3rd Party CTI IP Ad 0 0 0 0 Rea
375. l or on the ex Mode tension CO appearance 2 This is assigned for the Virtual Extension Key not the extension it resides on 02 Display mode 0 Secondary Exten Defines if calls to or from a Virtual 1 when placing a sion Name Extension Key display the Virtual call on Virtual 1 Actual Station Extension Key name or the name of Extension Key Name the extension it resides on 03 Show CLI V3 0 0 No CLI info When set to a 0 the caller ID of a 0 15 09 01 Added 1 Show CLI info trunk call station call pointed to a vir tual extension will not be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring When set to a 1 the caller ID of a trunk call pointed to a virtual ex tension will be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring Station calls to a virtual that is not assigned to ring will display the station name or number if PRG 15 18 04 is set to al 04 Show Internal 0 Do Not Show When set to a 0 internal calls to the 0 15 09 01 Caller Informa 1 Show virtual extension will not show the 15 18 03 tion V3 0 Added name or number of the extension that is calling When set to 1 internal calls to the virtual extension will show the name or number of the extension that is calling if the virtual is assigned to ring or if PRG 15 18 03 is set to a 1 05 One Ring V3 0 0 Normal Ring Cycle When set to a 0 the virtual exten 0 15 09 01 Added 1 One Ring sion follows the normal ring cycle When set t
376. lash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Section 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING Each Display telephone with Softkeys provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access The options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system programming Simply press the Softkey located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 CO OO O QJ Pressing the Cursor key Up or Down will scroll between the menus 1 4 Introduction ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program Mode Hard Mtnance O O O Section 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN When using a display telephone in programming mode various Softkey options are displayed These keys will allow you to easily select scan or move through the programs Table 1 3 Softkey Display Prompts Softkey Display Prompts If you press this Soft The system will key back Go back one step in the program display You can press Cursor Key UP or Cursor Key Down to scroll forward or backward through a list of programs M Scroll down through the available programs Vv Scroll up through the available programs select Select the currently displayed program lt Move the cursor to the left gt Move the cursor to the right 1 Move back through the available program options 1 Move forward through the ava
377. ld Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk Program as COI port Input Data 1 4 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 MOH Type 0 Internal External Select whether the system will use the 0 MOH built in Music on Hold External Music on 1 BGM Source Hold or a Customer provided source con nected to the BGM port Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Music on Hold Programming Manual 2 121 Program 14 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks Level IN Description Use Program 14 09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation Recording destination for each trunk If both Programs 14 09 and 15 12 define a destination the destination in Program 15 12 is followed Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Recording Destina Maximum eight digits Enter the extension number where the No Setting tion Extension Num trunk calls should be recorded ber 02 Automatic Recording 0 Off Determine if incoming trunk calls should 0 for Incoming Calls 1 On be automatically recorded 04 Automatic Recording 0 Off 0 for Outgoing Call 1 0n Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 122 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 11
378. le 2 14 Frequency 1 2 Table Refer below on page 2 461 03 Ring Cycle 00 No setting 01 14 Refer to Table 2 15 Ring Cycle Table on Refer below page 2 462 2 When a single tone is sent Frequency 1 2 is set to the same value Table 2 14 Frequency 1 2 Table Data Frequency Hz 01 392 02 440 03 494 04 523 05 587 06 659 07 698 08 784 09 880 10 988 11 1046 12 1175 13 1318 14 1397 15 1568 Programming Manual 2 461 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Table 2 15 Ring Cycle Table Data Ring Cycle ms 01 125 On Off 02 125 On 125 Off 125 On Off 03 125 On 125 Off 125 On 125 Off 125 On Off 04 125 On 125 Off 125 On 125 Off 125 On 125 Off 125 On Off 05 250 On Off 06 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off 07 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off Program 08 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off 09 325 On Off 10 325 On 325 Off 325 On Off 8 0 ji 325 On 325 Off 325 On 325 Off 325 On Off 12 500 On Off 13 500 On 500 Off 500 On Off 14 1000 On Off Table 2 16 Default Table Short Ring No Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle 1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1 2 Error Tone 8 8 14 3
379. le Messages 100 40 10 02 VRS Ports 16 RTP Ports 0 65534 RTCP Ports 0 65535 DSP Resources 16 and Specifications Manual Level 1 MF KK KK PCPro WebPro User Name necam Level 2 IN 12345678 PCPro WebPro User Name sltech Level 3 SA 0000 PCPro WebPro User Name ADMIN1 Level 4 SB 9999 PCPro WebPro User Name ADMIN2 Programming Password Users 8 Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the SL1100 Features Programming Manual 1 N SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Section 10 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER Each unit installed to the system has a slot number assigned Some of slot number are fixed to a unit that be installed Other slots are not fixed to unit but fixed to location where it is installed Below chart shows the slot and its number Main KSU Expansion KSU 1 3 Slot 0 Base Unit Slot 10 4th Unit Slot 11 12 4th Unit Slot 3 3rd Unit Slot 6 9 15 3rd Unit Slot 2 2nd Unit Slot 5 8 14 2nd Unit Slot 1 Base Unit Slot 4 7 13 Base Unit Note Lot D or higher Main KSU or FPGA Version 0100 and V3 5 or higher System Software required FPGA version can be found in PC Pro Web Pro and Lot is on side of Chassis To verify if your Chassis is D or higher check the lot e g 118DCA G The 4th Character needs to be D or higher To verify the FPGA version connect with PC Pro Web Pro and check version information in the blade config
380. lementary Service to define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Long Conversa 0 Off Turns off or on the Warning Tone for COS 01 15 0 tion Alarm 1 On Long Conversation not for single line telephones 02 Long Conversa 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 0 tion Cutoff In 1 On to use Long Conversation Cutoff for coming incoming calls 03 Long Conversa 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 0 tion Cutoff Out 1 On to use Long Conversation Cutoff for going outgoing calls 04 Call 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 1 Forward DND 1 On to use Call Forwarding DND Over Override Bypass ride Call 05 Intercom Off 0 Off ICM off hook Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 1 Hook Signaling signaling disabled to receive off hook signals 1 On ICM off hook signaling enabled 06 Automatic Off 0 Off manually Allows a busy extension ability to COS 01 15 1 Hook Signaling 1 On automatically manually 0 or automatically 1 re Automatic Over ceive off hook signals ride 07 Message Waiting 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 1 1 On to leave Message Waiting 08 Conference 0 Off Turns off or on an extensi
381. ler ID 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 647 20 07 25 Refuse 8 digit 34 Set Caller ID Re 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 748 14 01 27 fuse 8 digit 20 07 25 35 Dial In Mode 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 609 20 07 26 Switching 8 digit 41 Date Setting 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 789 20 07 30 8 digit 42 Maintenance 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 643 Service 8 digit 43 VRS Incoming 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 778 13 04 8 digit 15 02 55 44 Cutting the tele 0 9 Maximum of Sets the Service Code for power 731 phone power 8 digit cutting for Administrator 45 Room Monitor 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 610 Permit 8 digit Sets Service Code SC for Room monitor on off to terminal SC 1 Extension Number Room Monitor enable SC 0 Extension Number Room Monitor disable Programming Manual 2 71 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 46 Watch Message 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 614 Setting 8 digit Service Code setting for Watching message recording to VRS 47 Warning Mes 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 615 sage Setting 8 digit Service Code setting for Warning message recording to VRS 48 Auto Dial Setting 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 617 for Security Sen 8 digit Service Code setting for destination sor number when Warning mode detec ted 49 Auto
382. les disabled the 0 Name notifica the system will not ability to send calling party name in tion ISDN Trunk send any outbound formation on a per trunk basis calling party informa tion 1 On when set to ON the system will send calling party informa tion 38 Outgoing CLI se 0 Contract Number Shows what number to show 0 21 13 01 lection V3 0 Add 1 Extension Number 21 18 01 ed 2 Extended Table 21 19 01 3 PRG21 13 21 25 01 4 PRG21 18 5 PRG21 19 6 No Digits 39 CLI composition 0 Prefer extension If the flag has the default value 0 0 V3 0 Added 1 Combine trunk prefer extension the extension s extension CLI is sent out if it is not empty If it is empty the trunk s CLI is sent in stead If the flag has the value 1 combine trunk extension the trunk s CLI is stored in the sending buffer padded with the extension s CLI 2 110 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 40 ISDN Queue an 0 send CONNECT When a VRS queue message is to 0 22 14 nouncement 1 send PROGRESS be played back configured in PRG 22 15 connect mode 8 22 14 PRG 22 15 PRG 41 11 or 41 11 V2 0 Added PRG 41 19 the system shall in 41 19 stead of a CONNECT message send a PROGRESS message in cluding a ProgresslE 8 in band tones and announcements availa ble 41 Inco
383. lies should be e mailed 10 From Address Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e mailed No Setting set this e mail address for the sta tion sending the report 11 DNS Primary Ad 0 0 0 0 When alarm reports are e mailed 0 0 0 0 dress 255 255 255 255 set the DNS primary address 12 DNS Secondary 0 0 0 0 When alarm reports are e mailed 0 0 0 0 Address 255 255 255 255 set the DNS secondary address 13 Customer Name Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e mailed No Setting enter a name to identify the particu lar system 14 Use Standard 0 No In case of YES uses a PRG47 18 0 90 11 08 SMTP Settings 1 Yes SMTP client MEMDB CF mounting 90 25 01 V2 0 Added is required 47 18 To Address PRG 90 11 08 CC 90 11 Mail Address PRG 90 25 01 Up to 48 characters In case of No uses a PRG 90 11 SMTP client 2 546 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 15 DIMLOG Notifica 0 No PRG 90 11 14 YES PRG 47 18 0 90 11 14 tion V2 0 Added 1 Yes SMTP Client uses and CF mount are necessary In the case of System Fault Dim last gz and Dimdump gz are noti fied Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 9 0 None Programming Manual 2 547 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 12 System Alarm Output Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 12 System Alarm Output to s
384. ling done Remote Surveil lance 50 1 0 System The system The system was No action needed Start Noti started started fication 51 0 0 System CPU Upgrade is No action needed Data performed or change Programming change is made 54 2 0 License A new TCP IP Maximum 512 li Please delete li WAR Manage terminal and the cense information cense information ment Ta DSP board were on the TCP IP ter on an unnecessary ble Full not able to be minal is registered TCP IP terminal added to the ap and a new terminal with Program plication license cannot be regis 90 44 management ta tered ble The license management table is regis tering full 55 2 0 Regular The regular The regular Please do the The excess ERR mainte maintenance maintenance ex maintenance ex on the regular REC nance ex exchange day change day that changes of perti maintenance change has passed had been set nent parts and set exchange notifica with Program the next regular day is can tion 90 51 exceeded maintenance ex celed by it change day with changing Program 90 51 Program 90 51 or when the function is in validated the error is recov ered 2 542 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Alarm Re Content of Alarm No Type port Name Alarm Cause Action Recovery Status 57 2 0 IP Colli Check the IP Collision IP Ad Check the IP Ad Recover th
385. lt No 01 Treatment Code Maximum 36 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual 2 307 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 26 ARS Service 26 04 ARS Class of Service Level IN Description Program Use Program 26 04 ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls 2 6 Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Class 0 16 0 0 No Class Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route 2 308 Program 26 ARS Service ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 26 ARS Service 26 11 Transit Network ID Table Level IN Description Use Program 26 11 Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier access which is referred from Program 26 03 Input Data 2 6 Program Transit Network ID Table 1 4 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Transit Network ID Carrier ID 0000 9999 Table No 1 4 No Fixed four digits or No Setting Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 309 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 26 ARS Service 26 12 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS Level
386. m 81 07 is set to 4 Specified data Feature Cross Reference None 2 476 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 01 Incoming Ring Tone Level MF Description Program Use Program 82 01 Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones which are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges 1 4 also called patterns that consist of a combination of frequencies You assign a specific Range to trunks in 8 2 Program 22 03 and to extensions in Program 15 02 Within each range there are three frequency Types High Middle and Low Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 see below In this program you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type for each of the four Ranges The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range Input Data Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 Pattern 1 Trunk Incoming 2 Pattern 2 Trunk Incoming 3 Pattern 3 Trunk Incoming 4 Pattern 4 Trunk Incoming 5 Intercom Incoming Pattern 6 Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern 7 Pattern 5 Trunk Incoming V3 0 Added 8
387. m Configuration Setup 10 08 Pre Ringing Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 08 Pre Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre ringing for trunk calls This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone With pre ringing a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED flashes The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle Without pre ringing the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs This may cause a ring delay depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Pre Ringing 0 No 0 1 Yes Conditions e Used with Analog Trunks only Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering 2 10 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 09 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 09 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU for Program either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection The CPU has 16 circuits initially and an additional 16 circuits are added when a VMDB is installed By Adding EXIFE system can have up to 128 V3 5 or higher These are used as follows Extension DTMF receiver for single line telephone 1 0 Trunk DTMF receiver for analog trunks dial tone amp busy tone detection for analog trunks Input Data Circuit Resour
388. m Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of Calls in 0 84 Define the maximum number of calls al 0 Queue 0 No Limitation lowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs 02 Operation Mode for 0 The last waiting call Define how the system should handle calls 0 ACD Queue is transferred when the number of calls in queue ex 1 The longest waiting ceeds the threshold call is transferred 2 Send Busy Tone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 378 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 19 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 19 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail Master Mailboxes Program 47 03 as ACD Delay Announcement Mailboxes Input Data ACD Group Number 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Delay Message Start 0 64800 seconds Determine the time the system waits be 0 Timer fore playing the Delay Message 02 Mailbox Number for Dial up to eight digits Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement No Setting 1st Announcement Mailbox as the message source for the 1st Message Announcement Message 03 1st Delay Message 1 255 Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending 0 Sending Count 0 No message is Count This entry must be set to 1 or high played er for the message
389. m report to print Input Data 9 0 Program Notification Number 1 12 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Month 00 12 0 Not Set 00 02 Day 00 31 0 Not Set 00 03 Hour 00 23 00 04 Minute 00 59 00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 557 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 25 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 25 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup 9 0 Input Data CC Number 1 5 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 558 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 26 Program Access Level Setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 26 Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to change a system program Input Data Program Numbers 1001 9903 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Maintenance Level Level 1 MF Level Refer to the Level indi Level 2 IN Level cation for each individ Level 3 SA Level ual program located in Level 4 SB Level the upper left corner at the beginning of each program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None
390. mber 159 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161 Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 169 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172 Dial Analysis Table number 173 Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178 Dial Analysis Table number 179 Dial Analysis Table number 180 Dial Analysis Table number 181 Dial Analysis Table number 182 Dial Analysis Table number 183 Dial Analysis Table number 184 Dial Analysis Table number 185 Dial Analysis Table number 186 Dial Analysis Table number 187 Dial Analysis Table number 188 Dial Analysis Table number 189 Dial Analysis Table number 190 Dial Analysis Table number 191 Dial Analysis Table number 192 Dial Analysis Table number 193 Dial Analysis Table number 194 Dial Analysis Table number 195 Program 90 Maintenance Program
391. minal MLT SLT 744 Busy No Answer 8 digit 05 Call Forward 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 745 Both Ring 8 digit 07 Call Forwarding 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 746 Follow Me 8 digit 08 Do Not Disturb 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 747 8 digit 09 Answer Message 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 0 11 10 16 Waiting 8 digit 10 Cancel All Mes 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 773 sages Waiting 8 digit 11 Cancel Message 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 771 Waiting 8 digit 12 Alarm Clock 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 727 20 01 06 8 digit 13 Display Lan 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 678 15 02 guage Selection 8 digit for Multiline Ter minal 14 Text Message 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting Setting 8 digit Programming Manual 2 73 Program 11 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 15 Enable Hands 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 721 20 09 05 free Incoming In 8 digit 20 02 12 tercom Calls 16 Force Ringing of 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 723 20 09 05 Incoming Inter 8 digit 20 02 12 com Calls 17 Programmable 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 751 15 07 Function Key 8 digit 11 11 38 Programming 3 Digit Service Co des 18 BGM On Off 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT
392. ming Caller 0 Use This program will determines that 0 Name Usage 1 Ignore the caller name information from the V2 0 Added network is valid or not If the pro gram is set to 1 the caller name in Program formation the network provides is ig nored 46 Collect Call 0 Disable Can block the Collect only when 0 20 09 09 Blocking V4 0 1 Enable ISDN line is in use Added Default Item01 Trunk Name Trunk Port Number Name 1 Line 001 2 Line 002 84 Line 84 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 111 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 02 Analog Trunk Data Setup Level Program 1 4 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Signaling Type 0 Dial Pulse 10 PPS This option sets the signaling type 2 DP DTMF 2 DTMF for the trunk 02 Ring Detect Type 0 Normal delayed This option sets Extended Ring De 1 1 Immediate Ringing tect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk For T1 loop ground start trunks this option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light cor rectly 03 Flash Type 0 Open Loop Flash This option selects the flash type 0 1 Ground open loop flash or ground Always set this option for open loop flash 04 Hooking Type 0 Timed Flash Hook This option lets you use Flash for 0 81 01 14 ing Timed Flash Program 81 01 14 or 81 01 15 1 Disconnect Cut Dis
393. ming Server address Input Data 9 0 Program Server Information 1 13 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Server Address Type 0 IPv4 0 1 IPv6 02 Server Address IPv4 form XXX XXX XXX XXX None IPv6 form XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 03 Port Number 0 65535 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 587 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 42 DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 42 DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and firmware version of the DR700 MLT Terminal 9 0 Input Data Terminal Type 1 3 Not used 4 IP4WW 24TIXH Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Software Version 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 02 Hardware Version 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 588 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 43 Deleting Terminal License of DR700 Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 43 Deleting Terminal License of DR700 to delete the terminal license information delivered to the DR700 terminal 9 0 Input Data Extension Number Up to eight di
394. month No Setting 03 Day 01 31 Enter 2 digits 01 31 for the day No Setting 04 Week 1 7 Sun Sat Enter digit for the day of the week 1 No Setting Sunday 7 Saturday 05 Hour 00 23 Enter 2 digits for the hour 00 23 No Setting 06 Minute 00 59 Enter 2 digits for the minute 00 59 No Setting 07 Second 00 59 Enter 2 digits for the second 00 59 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Clock Calendar Display Time and Date Programming Manual 2 3 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 02 Location Setup Level SA Description Program Use Program 10 02 Location Setup to define the location of the installed system 4 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Country Code Dial up to four digits Enter the country code 1 0 9 02 International Access Dial up to four digits Enter the international access code No Setting Code 0 9 x 03 Other Area Access Dial up to two digits Enter the other area access code 9 Code 0 9 04 Area Code Dial up to six digits Enter the local area code No Setting 0 9 05 Trunk Access Code Dial up to eight dig Enter the trunk access code digits required No Setting its 0 9 x to place an outgoing call Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 4 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 P
395. n Use Program 20 16 Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages There are 20 alphanumeric messages with up to 48 characters Use the following chart when programming messages Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 1 gt lt A O 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G l g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 amp 66uUaaeOUGEOB Enter characters x lt gt TIGOQ E Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Input Data Selectable Display Message Number 01 20 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Selectable Display Messages 48 characters Refer below Default Number Message 1 IN MEETING UNTIL 2 MEETING ROOM HHHHHHHH 3 COME BACK 4 PLEASE CALL 4444HHHHHH Programming Manua
396. n Numbering 11 07 Extension Department Group Pilot Number 11 17 ACD Group Pilot Number V1 5 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 617 Program 92 Program 92 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 92 Copy Program 92 07 Delete Command Level IN Description Use Program 92 07 Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data 01 Destination Number From Each extension port 001 128 V3 5 Changed Program a 11 02 Destination Number To Each virtual extension port 01 50 Program 11 04 Each extension group 1 32 Program 11 07 Each ACD Group 1 2 V1 5 Added The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbering 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering 11 07 Extension Department Group Pilot Number 11 17 ACD Group Pilot Number V1 5 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 618 Program 92 Copy Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 93 System Information 93 01 Day Night Mode Information Level SA This Program is available for V3 0 or higher Description Program Use Program 93 01 Day Night Mode Information to display day night mode for night mode service a 93
397. n an extension user COS 01 15 1 abling 1 On ability to use Live Monitor 45 Mute Key Mode 0 Off Set per class of service when in COS 01 15 1 20 13 10 while Call Moni 1 On Call Monitoring Mode determines if toring the monitored parties receive the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled 46 Remote Confer 0 Off COS 01 15 1 11 19 ence 1 On 20 34 47 Station Number 0 Off Determine if a station Number will COS 01 15 1 Display 1 On be displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state 48 Station Name 0 Off Determine if a station Number will COS 01 15 1 Display 1 On be displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state Programming Manual 2 189 Program 20 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 49 BLF Indication 0 Off Disabled Determine if a BLF of the station will COS 01 15 0 on CO Incoming 1 On Enabled light when a Normal CO call is ring State ing the phone 51 Number and 0 Off Determine if an extension name and COS 01 15 1 Name appearin 1 On number will be listed On or unlis the Directory ted Off in the directory 52 VoIPDB All DSP 0 Disable Set whether All DSP Busy alarm COS 01 15 1 Busy Display 1 Enable displays on LCD when the caller makes an IP call and there is no VoIPDB DSP resource
398. n does not occur Program 24 01 01 also affects this option 17 Trunk to Trunk 0 Disable No Use this option to enable or disable 0 Warning Tone for 1 Enable Yes the Warning Tone for Long Conver Long Conversa sation feature for DISA callers tion Alarm 18 Warning Beep 0 Disable No 0 Tone Signaling 1 Enable Yes 19 Privacy Mode 0 Disable No Use this option to enable or disable 0 Toggle Option 1 Enable Yes a trunk ability to be switched from private to non private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Re lease function key 20 Block Outgoing 0 Prevent No Allow 1 or prevent 0 the system 0 14 01 21 Caller ID 1 Allow Yes from automatically blocking outgoing 20 08 15 Caller ID information when a user places a call If allowed i e block enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code de fined in 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits 21 Caller ID Block Dial up to eight dig Enter the code up to 8 digits that 67 14 01 20 Code its should be used as the Caller ID 20 08 15 Block Code This code is automati cally inserted before dialed digits if Program 14 01 20 is set to 1 22 Caller ID to Voice 0 Disable Caller ID Enable or disable the system ability 0 Mail not sent to VM to send the Caller ID digits Remote 1 Enable Caller ID is Log On Protocol to voice mail sent to VM Programming Manual 2 109 Program 14 Program 14
399. nce e Call Forwarding Off Premise Program 24 2 288 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup Level IN Description Use Program 25 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS DISA line Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 VRS DISA Dial In Mode 0 Extension Number Service Code Specify In 0 22 11 tercom 1 Use Dial Conversion Table 02 DISA User ID 0 Off 1 25 08 1 On 03 VRS DISA Transfer Alarm 0 Normal Off 0 1 Alarm On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 289 Program 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 02 DID DISA VRS Message Level IN Description Program Use Program 25 02 DID DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS DISA 2 5 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item 2G No Item Input Data Additional Data Default 01 Message Talkie Source 0 No Talkie 1 01 100 VRS Message Number Talkie Type 1 1 VRS 3 01 32 Station Group Number Additional Data 1 3 SLT Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inwar
400. ne 2 8 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 04 Music On Hold Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 04 Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold MOH source For internal Music on Hold the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized selections Input Data 1 0 Program Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Music on Hold Source 0 Internal MOH Tone Internal Music Tune The tune is set by 1 V1 5 Selection set by PRG 10 04 02 Program 10 04 02 Changed 1 External MOH Tone External Source ACI input via audio set by PRG 10 60 01 connector J421 Program10 60 01 Audio Port No 2 e Silence Callers on hold hear silence 2 Service Tone Tone set by PRG 80 01 tone 64 3 VMDB Tone set by PRG 10 04 02 02 Music on Hold Tone In case Item 1 is 0 Download File1 Farewell Song by Cho 1 Selection 1 Download File1 pin 2 Download File2 Download File2 Die Forelle by F Schu 3 Download File3 bert In case Item 1 is 1 2 or Download File3 Plaisir d amour by 3 J P E Martini 1 100 VRS Message Number 03 Audio Gain Setup 1 63 15 5 15 5 32 0 dB dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Background Music e Music on Hold Programming Manual 2 9 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 Syste
401. ne Telephone to define the Handset Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Handset Headset Transmit Gain 0 Fixed 0 level 9 12 5 dB 1 32 LR value 3 5 58 5 dB 02 Handset Headset Receive Gain lev 0 Fixed 0 el 13 0 dB 1 32 LR value 24 38 0 dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 490 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 21 Sensor Setup Level IN Description Use Program 82 21 Sensor Setup to setup the Sensor for SL1100 Input Data Sensor Number 1 6 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Sensor Type 0 Close Detect Set sensor type 0 1 Open Detect 02 Sensor Alarm Detect 1 255 5 ms 1275 Set minimum level for Alarm detection 24 120 ms Minimum Level ms 03 Sensor Idle Detect 1 255 5 ms 1275 Set minimum level for Idle detection 24 120 ms Minimum Level ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 491 Program 82 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 02 H 225 and H 245 Information Basic Setup Level Program 8 4 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 H 225 Alerting Time 0 255 seconds 180 02 H 225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0
402. ne terminal For each SL1100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature enter the destination number up to 36 digits and name up to 12 characters into One Touch bin 10 Make sure to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers If this bin information is changed either through 15 14 01 or through user programming the destination for the transferred calls is also changed Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01 10 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Dial Data Maximum of 36 digits 0 If PRG 15 02 60 is set to a 0 then the No Setting 9 x P R stations personal speed dial entries are Wait for Answer Su programmed here pervision ISDN trunks Per key number 1 10 assign the tele only phone number that is to be called when P Pause Analog the bin is accessed Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only 02 Name Maximum of 12 charac Per key number 1 10 assign a name to No Setting ters be used when searching through the direc tory If a name is not assigned for a speed dial bin the speed dial entry will not be listed in the directory Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 154 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 16 SIP Register ID Setup for Extension Level IN Description Use Program 15 16 SIP Register ID Se
403. ne the filter setting data when Program Program 81 07 is set to 4 Input Data 8 1 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 B1 Filter Setup 1 0 255 43 02 B1 Filter Setup 2 0 255 102 03 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 228 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 58 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 75 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 189 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 58 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 194 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 45 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 194 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 219 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 45 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 178 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 208 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 178 16 B2 Filter Setup 2 0 255 208 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0 255 17 18 Z Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 250 19 Z Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 173 20 Z Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 50 21 Z Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 165 22 Z Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 59 23 Z Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 70 24 Z Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 106 25 Z Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 175 26 Z Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 163 27 Z Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 79 28 Z Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 179 29 Z Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 83 Programming Manual 2 475 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0
404. nect to a conference Input Data 1 1 Conference Group Number 1 4 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Remote Conference Group Dial Up to 8 digits 20 13 46 Pilot Number 20e 20 34 No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group 1 4 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Conference Remote Programming Manual 2 89 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table Level IN Description Program Use Program 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more digits This program is relevant only if digits in 11 01 01 are set to 9 Dial Extension Analyze 1 1 Input Data Dial Extension Analyze Table 001 128 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Dial Up to eight digits 0 1 9 No Setting 11 01 02 Dial Extension Analyze Table Type of Dials 0 11 01 0 Not used 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 5 Operator Access 6 F Route Access Conditions e When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type the lower table has priority For example if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined Table 1 is used to determine the dial type Feature Cross Reference None 2 90 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Progr
405. ng 0 3600 Calling continue time when making emer 0 Time gency call 09 Interval of Auto Dial 0 3600 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 220 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 46 Security Sensor Setup Level IN Description Use Program 20 46 Security Sensor Setup to defines the security sensor Program Input Data 2 0 Security Sensor Number 1 6 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Sensor Mode 0 Off Define door port 084M 3 4 to use as 0 1 On Sensor 02 Internal Paging Group 0 32 Define Internal paging group number for 0 for Warning Message Warning message 03 Ring Timer 0 8 Define External paging group number for 0 Warning message 04 VRS Message for 0 100 Define VRS number used for Warning 0 Warning message 05 Auto Dial Number 0 999 Define Speed dial number when sensor 0 Area Setting detects warning 06 VRS Message for An 0 100 Define VRS message number when emer 0 swer gency call destination answered 07 Auto Dial Wait Timer 0 64800 Define wait time before making emergency 30 auto dial 08 Time of Repeat Auto 0 255 Define repeat number for making emer 3 Dial gency call 09 Auto Dial Calling 0 1 3600 Define calling continue time when making 30 Time 0 No Auto Dial emergency call 10 Monitored Terminal Extension Number Up Define extension number
406. ng 0 No Switch to Speak 0 11 11 62 Duration er Ring 15 02 41 1 10 sec 15 02 42 2 20 sec 3 30 sec 4 40 sec 5 50 sec 6 1 minute 46 Backlight LCD 0 Continuous on Set how long the Backlight LCD 2 duration 1 5 seconds stays on 2 10 seconds 3 15 seconds 4 30 seconds 5 60 seconds 48 Short Ring Setup 0 Disable 0 80 09 01 1 Enable 80 09 02 80 09 03 50 Mute Lamp Sta 0 normal 0 tus Change 1 Lamp Status Change 52 Voice Mail Mes O Light the VM F Key This program is not followed if one 0 15 07 01 sage Waiting only of the F keys is assigned as a VM Lamp Setup 1 Light the MW lamp key of some other mailbox only 2 Light both MW Lamp and VM Key 54 Menu Operation 0 Automatic Close 0 Mode 1 Manual Close 55 VRS Message 0 100 0 Number 57 Caller Log on 0 Off 1 15 02 34 busy 1 On 2 130 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 58 Display mode of 0 Caller ID 0 13 04 08 trunk incoming 1 Memo Information 13 04 09 V1 5 Deleted 13 04 10 60 Soft Key Naviga 0 Standard Mode 2 tion key Mode 1 Advanced Mode1 2 Advanced Mode2 61 Backlight Max 0 8 6 Brightness 62 Backlight Min 0 8 0 Brightness 63 Auto Backlight 0 Off 0 15 02 64 1 On 64 Auto Backlight 0 13 13 15 02 63 bound threshold auto setting 65 Auto Backlight
407. ng chart for a description of each option its range and default setting Program 39 Input Data SMDR Port Number 1 2 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Toll Restricted Call 0 Not Displayed SMDR can include or exclude calls 1 1 Displayed blocked by Toll Restriction 02 PBX Calls 0 Not Displayed When the system is behind a PBX SMDR 1 1 Displayed can include all calls 1 or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code 0 03 Trunk Number or 0 Name Select whether the system should display 1 Name 1 Number the trunk name 0 or the number 1 on SMDR reports If this option is set to 1 Program 35 02 14 must be set to 0 04 Summary Daily 0 Not Displayed Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR re 1 1 Displayed port provides a daily summary at midnight every night 05 Summary Weekly 0 Not Displayed Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR re 1 1 Displayed port provides a weekly summary every Saturday at midnight 06 Summary Monthly 0 Not Displayed Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR re 1 1 Displayed port provides a monthly summary at mid night on the last day of the month 07 Toll Charge Cost 0 Not Displayed Set this option to 1 have the SMDR re 1 1 Displayed port include toll charges 08 Incoming Call 0 Not Displayed Enable this option 1 to have the SMDR 1 1 Displayed report include incoming calls If you disa
408. nged Order out or oldest messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newest messages first box message playback order When a sub scriber listens to their messages InMail can play the oldest messages first first in first out or FIFO or the newest messag es first last in first out or LIFO 03 Number of Messages 0 99 messages Use this option to set the maximum num Mailbox 1 99 To conserve storage ber of messages that can be left in the Mailbox 2 20 space enter 0 for all un Subscriber Mailbox If a caller tries to used mailboxes leave a message after this limit is reached they hear That mailbox is full InMail then hangs up 04 Message Playback 0 FIFO first in first Use this option to set the Subscriber Mail 0 Programming Manual 2 411 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 05 Auto Erase Save of Messages 0 Erase After the subscriber lis tens to the entire new message and hangs up InMail erases the mes sage 1 Save After the subscriber lis tens to the entire new message and hangs up InMail saves the mes sage Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user complete ly listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving SA or erasing E the message Depending on the setting of this option
409. nging Send Time OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 10 1000 ms 66 Single Between Ringing Send Time 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms OPX 67 Guard Time 1 LOOP 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms 68 Guard Time 1 GROUND 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms 69 Guard Time 1 DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms 70 Guard Time 1 E amp M 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms 71 Guard Time 1 OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 9 900 ms 72 Guard Time 2 ALL 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 3 12 ms 73 Dial Sending Complete Time 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 20 2000 ms 74 ON HOOK bit Send Time 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 40 4000 ms 75 Open Loop Time LOOP 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 76 Open Loop Time GROUND 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 77 Open Loop Time DID 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 78 Open Loop Time E amp M 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 79 Open Loop Time OPX 1 255 100 ms 25500 ms 6 600 ms 80 Close Loop Time LOOP 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 13 52 ms 81 Close Loop Time DID 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 13 52 ms 82 Ring GND Time GROUND 1 250 4 ms 1000 ms 13 52 ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 474 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 09 COT CODEC QSLAC Filter Setting Level IN Description Use Program 81 09 COT CODEC QSLAC Filter Setting to defi
410. nien 2 454 80 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ssesrsrsrreseseseserrerrrereeernnserssenseee 2 456 80 05 Date Format for SMDR and System 02 cc cccseeteeeeeneieneeenneee 2 458 80 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup 4 2 459 BOS MEG Tone SE MPs sie irises 2 460 80 09 Shot Ring Setup csaa oa a hed A a 2 461 80 10 MF Tone Receiver SetuP rsrsrsr RE 2 463 80 12 Caller ID Receiver Setup ccccccccceeecceceeenneeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 2 465 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for WU Riisisisssccsssciscssissacissanisisarsisaigseersiasisive 2 466 81 01 CO Intal Data SU seana EEO 2 466 81 05 ISDN PRI Layer 2 T Point Initial Data Setup 000 ee 2 468 81 06 ISDN PRI Layer 3 T Point Timer Setup eceeeeeeereeeeeeeee 2 469 81 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port 2 471 81 08 T1 Trunk Timer Setup cccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeeaaaaeaaeaeaaeees 2 472 81 09 COT CODEC OSLACG Filter SQtING sicciissicccasiccncusrmenexasciae 2 475 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ccccccceceneeeeseeeeeeeseeee 2 477 2 01 incoming RNG TOME danna aaa 2 477 82 04 ASTU Initial Data Setup eee ccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaaeeaaeasaeeees 2 479 82 05 ISDN PRI Layer2 S Point Initial Data Setup 2 480 82 06 ISDN PRI Layer3 S point Timer Setup 2 481 82 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog St
411. nit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level dB ice Count No Tone No 57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing 0 5 0 2 32 0 dB Tone 2 1 32 0 dB 0 1 32 0 dB 2 1 32 0 dB 0 20 32 0 dB 58 Opening Chime tone 1 8 2 2 32 0 dB 2 2 26 3 dB 14 2 32 0 dB 14 2 26 3 dB 15 2 32 0 dB 15 2 26 3 dB 16 6 32 0 dB 16 4 26 3 dB 59 Ending Chime tone 1 8 20 2 32 0 dB 20 2 26 3 dB 19 2 32 0 dB 19 2 26 3 dB 18 2 32 0 dB 18 2 26 3 dB 17 6 32 0 dB 17 4 26 3 dB 60 Splash tone 1 Mute 1 2 0 8 12dB 6 8 12 dB 61 Splash tone 2 Mute 2 2 0 1 8 12dB 6 1 8 12 dB 62 Splash tone 3 Mute 3 2 0 1 8 12dB 6 1 8 12 dB 63 EXT SPK Ring back Tone 0 2 10 10 32 0 dB 0 30 32 0 dB 64 Special Hold Tone 0 4 11 2 35 1 5 dB 0 3 32 0 dB 11 2 35 1 5 dB 0 12 32 0 dB Conditions The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect Feature Cross Reference e Selectable Ring Tones 2 452 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 02 DTMF Tone Setup Level MF Description Use Program 80 02 DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration On time and pause Off time for Program DTMF dialing This option affects all trunk line calls system wide Make separate entries for duration and pause It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone Inp
412. nk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT 1 25 02 01 DID DISA Talkie to assign the VRS message num Trunks 1 27 Talkie 1 ber Mode 1 data 1 Day Mode Mode 2 data 2 Night Mode 2 566 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 25 05 01 VRS DISA Error Message Assignment 4 Trunks 1 27 Mode 1 2 40 10 08 Call Attendant Message when Busy 8 40 10 09 Call Attendant Message when No Answer 9 25 06 02 DID DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup MSG 1 2 4 8 9 Recv 9 data 101 14 01 13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1 Trunks 1 27 21 03 01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 1 Trunks 1 27 Mode 1 2 20 11 12 Call Forwarding Off Premise 1 Class 1 only 25 07 07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time 0 12 02 01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 02 set to 08 30 Mode Group 1 only 12 02 01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 01 set to 08 30 Mode Group 1 only 12 02 01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 03 set to 17 30 Mode Group 1 only 12 02 01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 02 set to 17 30 Mode Group 1 only 10 02 01 Country Code 886 80 01 01 Repeat count 6 Korea Program No Name Default 10 02 01 Country Code 82 11 01 01 Dial Digit 1 11 09 02 2nd TRK Access 6 11 10 20 Ope VRS Msg 716 11 12 27 Call Pickup 12 02 01 Automatic night service Patterns Start of time ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pat
413. nnounce 0 64800 seconds This timer sets the maximum length 1200 seconds ment Duration of Page announcements Affects External Paging only Programming Manual 2 321 Program 31 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 04 Privacy Release 0 64800 seconds Once the user initiates a Meet Me 90 seconds Time Conference or Voice Call Confer ence the system waits this time for the Paged party to join the call Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 3 1 e Paging External Paging Internal 2 322 Program 31 Paging Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging The system can have up to 32 paging groups An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Internal Paging Group 0 32 Assign extensions to Internal Paging Port 1 16 1 Number 0 No setting Groups i e Page Zones The system al Group 1 lows up to 32 Internal Paging Groups An Port 17 0 extension
414. ns Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Operator Access 0 Step Call Use this program to set up priority of 0 20 17 Mode 1 Circular a call when calling an operator tele phone 02 Text Message 0 Call mode Use this program to select the mode 1 11 11 14 Mode 1 No Answer Busy when calling the telephone which 15 07 08 mode set up the text message 04 Interval timer for 0 64800 While on Networking Operation It 0 BLF Data V1 5 0 6480 seconds sends a BLF message to other sys Added tem interval of per 100s 05 DTMF Receive 0 64800 seconds For OPXs analog telephones and 10 25 07 01 Active Time certain analog trunks like DISA the system attaches a DTMF receiv er to the port for this time The sys tem releases the receiver after the time expires 06 Alarm Duration 0 64800 seconds This time sets the duration of the 30 11 11 12 alarm signal 07 Callback Ring 0 64800 seconds Callback rings an extension for this 15 11 12 05 Duration Time time 15 07 35 08 Trunk Queuing 0 64800 seconds Trunk Queuing callback rings an ex 15 11 12 05 Callback Time tension for this time 15 07 35 09 Callback Trunk 0 64800 seconds The system cancels an extension 64800 11 12 05 Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queuing request 15 07 35 Time after this time 10 Trunk Guard 0 64800 seconds The amount of time the system 1 Timer waits to seize the ne
415. ns Input Data 47 Group Mailbox Number 01 32 Index Number 1 3 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Find Me Follow Me 0 Off 0 1 On 02 Find Me Follow Me Begin Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 03 Find Me Follow Me End Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 04 Find Me Follow Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 05 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Sunday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 06 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Monday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 07 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Tuesday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 08 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Wednesday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 09 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Thursday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 10 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Friday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 11 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Saturday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 447 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 01 Service Tone Setup Level IN Description Use Program 80 01 Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones
416. ns open 03 Off Premise Call For 0 64800 seconds Define the conversation period for an Off 60 seconds ward by Door Box Premise Call Forward by Door Box call Disconnect Timer When this timer expires the caller hears busy tone for three seconds fixed time and the call is then disconnected Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box 2 332 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignment Level SA Description Use Program 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller Program presses the associated Door Box call button The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal 3 2 Input Data Door Box Number 1 6 Day Night Mode 1 8 Door Box Ring Group Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Door Box Ringing Member 1 101 Other No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box Programming Manual 2 333 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 03 Door Box Basic Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 32 03 Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door Box There are six distinctive chime patterns The chime tones are defined in 80 01 Service Tone Setup
417. nsole Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 05 DSS Console Lamp Table Description Use Program 30 05 DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS consoles Input Data o Item Input Data Default 01 Idle Extension 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 0 02 Busy Extension 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 7 03 DND Extension 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 04 ACD Agent Busy V1 5 Added 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 7 05 Out of Schedule ACD DSS V1 5 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 0 Added 06 ACD Agent log Out ACD DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 V1 5 Added 07 ACD Agent Log In ACD DSS V1 5 1 7 Lamp Pattern Data 4 Added 09 Hotel Status Code 1 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 7 10 Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 1 11 Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 2 12 Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 13 Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 14 Hotel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 15 Hotel Status Code 7 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 6 16 Hotel Status Code 8 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 4 17 Hotel Status Code 9 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 18 Hotel Status Code 0 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 0 19 Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 4 20 Hotel Statu
418. nswer mode is set to No Transfer calls will only be delivered to the Target Number speci fied in PRG 22 11 02 If set to one of the three other modes it will follow that mode through all assigned transfer destinations 05 Transfer Destination 0 No setting 0 Number 1 01 25 Incoming Ring Group 102 VM 103 Centralized VM V1 5 Added 201 232 Department Group 400 VRS 401 DISA 501 599 Valid Exten sion Number VRS Mes sage V2 0 Change VRS Message No 1000 1999 Common ABB Dial 000 999 06 Transfer Destination 0 No setting 400 Allow the outside party to dial a dif 0 Number 2 01 25 Incoming Ring ferent extension number in the translation Group table for example ring no answer to a di 102 VM aled number the caller then hears a dial 103 Centralized VM tone allowing them to enter another Valid V1 5 Added Extension Number 201 232 Department 401 Provide the caller with DISA dialing Group options requires using the DISA pass 400 VRS word 401 DISA 501 599 Valid Exten This applies to 22 11 05 and 22 11 06 sion Number VRS Mes sage V2 0 Change VRS Message No 1000 1999 Common ABB Dial 000 999 07 Call Waiting 0 Disable No Program 20 09 07 overrides this setting 0 1 Enable Yes 08 Maximum Number of 0 084 0 No limit Per DID translation table a DID can be 0 DID Calls 0 No Limit Can re limited to only accept a certain amount of ceive as m
419. nt Extension Group Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Description 01 Secondary Extension Num 1 16 This program is set up when placing tele ber phones in two or more groups Extension Number Maximum 8 digits Priority Order 0 999 Default e All extension groups No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Calling Programming Manual 2 165 Program 16 Program 16 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 04 Call Restriction Between Department Groups Level IN Description Use Program 16 04 Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between members of different Department Station groups that can be restricted on a per group basis Each department group can restrict calls to up to 8 department groups in Department Group Departmental Call Restriction Input Data Extension Department Group Number 1 32 Restricted Group Index 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Restrict Department 0 32 Calls between members of different De 0 Group Number partment Station groups can be restricted on a per group basis Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 166 Program 16 Department Group Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 01 System Options Description Use Program 20 01 System Options to set various system optio
420. nt Number 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 01 MAC Address MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF IP Address 1 0 0 0 The IP address should be 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 assigned out of the scope 128 0 0 1 range set up in Program 191 255255 254 10 14 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 18 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup Level SA Description 10 16 Option Information Setup Use Program 10 16 Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to each client The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Router Code number 0 255 Set the Router IP ad 3 Fixed dress IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 02 DNS Server Code number 0 255 Set IP address of DNS 6 Fixed Server IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 03 TFTP Server Code number 0 255 Set the name for the 66 Fixed TFTP Server R Maximum 64 character strings No setting 05 MGC Code number 0 255 129 Fixed IP a
421. ny Sener eee Pee reer 2 461 PS Ce TADE sisikii Aa 2 462 Peral Toe a a herr nie rm ee ee a 2 462 er STAN PU ssc atscoaucooutccnsencegnanepnsugienonteaeianatcetaianigtamiodsleialemnendane 2 478 Uc Tes 8 9 Ono 2 g 95 Neeser eeeen ime E E rE 2 539 Programming Manual Introduction Section 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs By changing a program you change the way the feature associated with that program works In this chapter you find out about each program the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory This Manual is created for System SL1100 Section 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This section lists each program in numerical order For example Program 10 01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92 01 is at the end The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings Description describes what the program options control The Default Settings for each program are also included When you first install the system it uses the Default Setting for all programs Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program The program access level is just above the Description heading You can only use the program if your access level meets
422. o a 1 the virtual exten sion will only ring one time the virtu al extension must be first set to ring in PRG 15 08 Programming Manual 2 157 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Condition e Ifa DIL rings a Virtual Extension the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1 Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 2 158 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 22 Mobile Extension Setup Level IN Description Use Program 15 22 Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension Program feature Input Data 1 5 Extension Number Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Mobile Extension Tar 0 No Setting Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call 0 get Setup 1 999 Speed Dial when the Mobile extension is called Bin 1 999 PRG 13 04 02 Connect Confirmation 0 Always User must Per Mobile Extension assigned in PRG 0 dial when answered 11 02 select whether a confirmation is re for the call to cut through quired user dials to allow the call to cut on ALL line types through when answered 1 On Analog Line User must dial when answered for the call to cut through on Analog lines only 2 Never When the call is answered the call is immediately cuts through 03 Trunk Access Code 0 Normal Trunk Ac Select if the Normal 0 or Individ
423. o enter Ac 0 coming Calls not enter an account count Codes for incoming calls If disabled code any codes entered dial out on the connec 1 Enabled User can ted trunk enter an account code while on an incoming call 04 Hiding Account Co 0 Account Codes dis Use this option to either hide or show the 0 des played Account codes on a telephone display 1 Account Codes not displayed Conditions None Programming Manual 2 355 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference e Account Code Forced Verified Unverified Program 39 2 356 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 06 Verified Account Code Table Level IN Description Use Program 35 06 Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Program Code list You can enter up to 800 codes with 1 16 digits using the characters 0 9 or Use the LK1 to enter a wild card For example the entry 234 means the user can enter 0234 9234 Input Data 3 5 Verified Account Code Bin Number 1 800 Item No 01 Verified Account 1 9 0 Wild If PRG 35 05 01 is set to a 3 required No Setting Code card and verified this is where the verified ac Up to 16 digits count code list is created in the system Up to 800 account codes with 1 16 digits can be entered Wild cards can be entered by using the symbol For example
424. o to 47 12 InMail Answer Table Schedule 47 Input Data Answer Table Number 1 16 V3 0 Changed Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Answer Schedule Override Sched 0 No Disabled 0 ule Override 1 Yes Enabled Use this option to enable or disable Answer Schedule Override for the se lected Answer Table If enabled and you make an entry for Override Mail box below the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox 2 428 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 Override Mailbox Category Over 0 Undefined Category 0 Skip Mailbox No 0 ride MB Ctg 1 Subscriber Mailbox setting Use this option to specify the category STA Category 1 Mailbox No should of the mailbox where Automated At 2 Master Mailbox be 1 128 V3 5 Changed re tendant calls should route when you 3 Routing Mailbox fer to lt 47 02 InMail Station enable Answer Schedule Override Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt e Ifthe Override Mailbox is a Sub Category 2 Mailbox No should scriber Mailbox the outside caller be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 In hears the mailbox greeting if recor Mail Group Mailbox Options on ded and can leave a message page 2 415 gt e Ifthe Override Mailbox is a Master Category 3 Mailbox No should Mailbox the outside caller shears be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 In the rec
425. of Terminal MLT SLT 685 24 09 Forward Busy No 8 digit Answer Split 49 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 686 24 09 Forward Both 8 digit Ring Split 50 Set Message 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT No Setting Waiting Indica 8 digit tion 51 Cancel Message 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal SLT No Setting Waiting Indica 8 digit tion 52 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 790 24 09 Forward All Des 8 digit tination No Split 53 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 791 24 09 Forward Busy 8 digit Destination No Split 54 Set Cancel Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 792 24 09 Forward No An 8 digit swer Destination No Split 55 Call Forward 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 793 24 09 Busy No Answer 8 digit Destination No Split Programming Manual 2 75 Program 11 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 58 Call Forward 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 713 with Personal 8 digit Greeting 59 Call Forward to 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 696 15 01 08 Attendant except 8 digit Busy 60 Call Forward to 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 697 15 01 09 Attendant No An 8 digit swer 62 Adjust of Head 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting 11 11 37 set Ring Volume 8 digit 15 02 12 15 02 41 15 02 42 65 Heads
426. of this option InMail either au 1 Save tomatically saves or erases the message After the subscriber lis If the mailbox user hangs up before listen tens to the entire new ing to the entire new message InMail re message and hangs up tains the message as a new message InMail saves the mes sage 04 Message Retention 0 90 days Use this option to determine how long a 0 0 Indefinite Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages If a message is left in a Sub scriber Mailbox longer than this interval InMail deletes it 2 416 Program 47 InMail Subscriber Mailbox in 47 03 03 Master Mailbox Type ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 05 Recording Conversa tion Beep 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Rec Conv Beep Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep If enabled all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conver sation Record If disabled the voice prompt and beep do not occur When you disable the Conversation Record beep the following voice prompts do not occur while InMail records the conversation Recording followed by a beep That mailbox is full if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached You have reached the recording limit if the recorded message is too long Provides an additional C
427. om which the For Trunk Group Base Trunk Group data is to be copied TRE Number 01 25 Destination Number From For Extension Base Extension Num Enter the first extension trunk ber Maximum eight digits group or other number to which For Department Group Base De the information is to be copied 01 Destination Number To partment Group Number 01 32 Enter the last extension trunk For DSS DSS Console Number 01 group or other number to which 12 the information is to be copied If ae Ao a Door phone num the information is being copied er 1 only to one extension trunk group or other number enter the information entered in the Desti nation Number From entry The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs Trunk Port Base Program No Program Name 14 01 Trunk Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Trunk Name Item 01 14 02 Analog Trunk Data Setup 14 04 Behind PBX Setup 14 08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks 14 09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk 20 30 Timer Class for Trunk 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indication Programming Manual 2 609 Program 92 Program 92 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Program Name 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup
428. ompt Language All Station Mailbox Num 15 ber 47 06 14 Voice Prompt Language All Group Mailbox Num 15 ber 47 07 03 Prompt Language All Routing Mailbox Number 15 47 10 03 Voice Prompt Language All Trunk port Number 15 Chile Program No Name Default 10 01 01 Year 5 10 01 02 Month 7 10 01 03 Day 10 10 01 04 Week 1 SUN 4 10 01 05 Hour 18 10 01 06 Minute 30 10 01 07 Second 0 Programming Manual 2 563 Program 90 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 80 01 02 Basic Tone No 1 Svc Tone 2 Unit 1 12 01 02 Automatic night mode switch 0 20 02 07 Display mode of Date and Time 8 20 02 09 Disconnect Supervision 1 20 02 12 Mode setting for incoming call from extension 1 20 07 11 Force Trunk disconnection Analog trunk only 1 Class 1 15 20 07 12 Trunk port disable 1 Class 1 15 20 08 08 Dial Block 1 Class 1 15 20 09 04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0 Class 1 15 20 11 12 External Call Forward Off Premise 1 Class 1 15 20 13 01 Long conversation alarm 0 Class 1 15 20 13 15 Break In 0 Class 1 15 20 13 16 Broken in 0 Class 1 15 20 13 20 Account Code Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0 Class 1 15 20 13 26 Group listening service 1 Class 1 15 20 13 31 Connected Line identification COLP 1 Class 1
429. on 1 Enable On ty to use the speakerphone on out side calls When disabled users can hear the conversation but cannot respond handsfree 18 Power Saving 0 Normal mode 1 Mode 1 Power Saving Mode Eco Mode 2 128 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 21 Virtual Extension 0 DSS Determine whether a Virtual Exten 2 Access Mode 1 Outgoing OTG sion VE should function as a DSS when idle Virtual 2 Ignore key or a Virtual Extension When Extension key DSS 0 is selected the key func pressed tions as a DSS key to the extension and for incoming calls to that exten sion When Outgoing 1 is selected the key functions as a virtual exten sion and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls When Ignore 2 is selected the key functions can re ceive incoming calls only 22 Multiple Incom 0 Disable If enabled this affects how a Hotline 1 22 01 01 ing From Inter 1 Enable key lights based on the setting in com and Trunk Program 22 01 01 If 22 01 01 is set to 1 for trunk priority the Hotline key lights solid when a trunk call rings in If 22 01 01 is set to O for inter com priority the Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk calls but lights solid for intercom calls If 15 02 22 is disabled Hotline keys light solid for any incoming calls re gardless of the setting in Pro
430. on Basic Setup to set the registrar proxy options for SIP extensions Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Registration Expire 60 65535 After this time expires the UA s are forced 3600 Time to reregister with the CPU This allows the CPU to keep a current location of the en tire end UA s 02 Authentication Mode 0 Disable Check here if a password is desired for the 0 1 Enable IP SIP phones to register When checked 15 05 16 must have a password entered and also the SIP phone must have the same password When using Authentica tion the station number is the authoriza tion name 03 Registrar Proxy Do Up to 64 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP proxy No Setting main Name 04 Registrar Proxy Host Up to 48 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP proxy No Setting Name 05 NAT Mode V4 0 Add 0 Disable Enable this Mode if the System controls 0 ed 1 Enable the SIP Phone by the NAT router Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 35 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 36 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 36 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration information 1 0 Input Data Register ID 1 31 Item Item Input Data Description Defaul
431. on Default No 23 LDS Server 4 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 ia 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 24 Next Server IP Address IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 B 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 27 SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0 255 168 Fixed Port 1 65535 5080 Program Conditions 1 0 None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 21 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 19 VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection Level IN Description Use Program 10 19 VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource on the VoIPDB unit Input Data DSP Resource Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 VoIPDB DSP Re 0 Common use for This program is used to assign the 16 or Resource 1 1 source Selection both IP extensions and 32 resources of the VoIPDB Resource 2 32 trunks NEC recommends leaving the default set 0 1 Use for IP exten tings as system default sions 2 Use for SIP trunks 3 User for Networking V1 5 Added 5 Blocked 6 Common without unicast paging 7 Multicast paging 8 Unicast paging Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 22 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration
432. on user COS 01 15 1 1 On ability to initiate a conference or Meet Me Conference 09 Privacy Release 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 1 On ability to initiate a Voice Call Confer ence 10 Barge In Monitor 0 Speech Enables the extension Barge In COS 01 15 0 20 13 45 1 Monitor Mode to be Speech mode 0 or Monitor mode 1 11 Room Monitor 0 Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS 01 15 1 Initiating Exten 1 On to Room Monitor other extensions sion Programming Manual 2 187 Program 20 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 12 Room Monitor 0 Off Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 15 1 Extension Being 1 On be monitored by other extensions Monitored 13 Continued Dial 0 Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 ing DTMF Sig 1 On ability to use Continued Dialing nal on ICM Call which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 14 Department Call 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 ing PLT No 1 On ability to call a Department Group Called Exten Pilot sion 15 Barge tIn Initiate 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 0 1 On ability to barge in on other s calls 16 Barge In Re 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 15 0 ceive 1 On to have other extensi
433. one detection frequency 3 Trunks 1 27 14 02 20 Busy tone detection interval 10 Trunks 1 27 80 04 06 ON Minimum RCV2 time 7 80 04 08 OFF Minimum RCV2 time 7 14 02 09 Busy tone detection 1 80 04 12 TONE RCV 2 frequency 1 1 Table 1 80 04 13 TONE RCV 2 frequency 2 2 Table 2 80 07 01 Call progress TONE detector frequency TABLE 1 set to 48 TABLE 2 set to 62 14 02 04 Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect 0 Trunks 1 27 81 01 14 Flash Hooking 1 20 81 01 15 Flash Hooking 2 30 20 19 02 Caller ID Wait Timer 2 20 07 01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1 Class 1 only 25 03 01 DID DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dial 1 ing Trunks 1 27 Mode 1 25 04 01 DID DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer 1 Busy Trunks 1 27 Mode 1 25 07 02 DID DISA No Answer Time 16 25 07 11 DID DISA Answer Delay Timer 3 32 02 01 Door Box Ring Assignment Set to EXT 101 108 DOOR 1 Mode 1 2 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice 9 Mail 81 07 01 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports 0 Trunks 1 27 25 07 03 Disconnect after DID DISA re transfer to IRG 180 20 02 11 Default Setting of Microphone of Key Telephone 0 24 02 03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 16 14 02 02 Ring Detect Type This option to sets Extended 1 Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the Trunks 1 27 trunk 20 07 11 Forced Trunk Disconnect analog trunk only Ena 1 bles disables an extension s ability to use Forced Class 1 only Trunk Disconnect 20 03 04 Tru
434. one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display e The priority level highest gt lowest Alarm 55 gt Alarm 7 gt Alarm 5 gt Alarm 30 gt Alarm 8 gt Alarm 52 gt Alarm 29 gt Free Demo License Period Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Programming Manual 2 545 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 11 Alarm Report SMTP Setting Level IN Description Use Program 90 11 Alarm Report SMTP Setting to define the details of the system alarm report Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 02 Report Method 0 No Report When alarm reports are e mailed 0 1 E mail Address set this option to 1 E mail address set in 90 11 08 06 SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e mailed No Setting set the SMTP name ex smtp your isp com Contact your ISP internet service provider for the correct en try if needed 07 SMTP Host Port 0 65535 When alarm reports are e mailed 25 Number set the SMTP host port number Contact your ISP internet service provider for the correct entry if nee ded 08 To E mail Ad Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e mailed No Setting dress set this e mail address to which the report should be sent 09 Reply Address Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e mailed No Setting set the e mail address where rep
435. ong Conversation 2 ccccccisneeeeeeeeeneeee 2 201 20 24 Syslemn Options Tar CT Peer ee ee re oe ree nr er ee Pe 2 202 2a OON ORIONE ana a aa E N 2 203 20 26 Multiplier for Cruces ta so neat 2 205 20 28 Trunk to Trunk Conversatorio eE 2 206 20 29 lt Timer Class for Ex WS Wah eree a E 2 207 20 30 Timer ass tor TNR S asensnassasene eisa aiara 2 208 20 31 Timer Class Timer ASSignment 2 2 cececeeeneeteeseeeceeneneetenee 2 209 20 34 Remote Conference Group Setup ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneenseees 2 212 20 39 2 Extension s Operator Seligers 2 213 A30 Tunks Operalor SeN esnensia a Ea E 2 214 20 37 Operator Extension Group Setup ccccccccececeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 215 Programming Manual iii SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 20 39 Operator Group SeN wissinssisninnnimisananienieine 2 216 20 42 Night Mode for each package cecsceeeeeseeeeseneensneneeeneeee 2 217 20 43 Power supply for each PackagGe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 218 20 44 Watch Mode SOUND gb cracrcsecseedictee science eee ee ee 2 219 20 45 Remote Wath SUID iiss istatiercrniiensesniciclavveiierdilereisiisciiueiiersadisatiies 2 220 20 46 Security Sensor Fcc ssa hoists acetates 2 221 20 47 Time pattern setting for Watch Mode 5 ccceeeseeeseeenerenneeneeee 2 222 20 48 Time pattern setting for Security Sensor 2 223 20 49 Caller ID Shared Group
436. ons barge in on calls 17 Barge in Tone 0 Off Turns off or on the Barge In tone If COS 01 15 1 Display Intru 1 On on callers hear an alert tone and sion Tone their display indicates the Barge In when another extension barges into their conversation If off there is no alert tone or display indication 18 Programmable 0 Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS 01 15 1 Function Key 1 On to program General function keys Programming using Service Code 751 by default General Level Refer to Program 20 07 10 for Service Code 752 19 Selectable Dis 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user 1 play Messaging 1 On ability to use Selectable Display Text Messaging Messaging 20 Account Code 0 Off Call restricted Turns off or on operator alert when COS 01 15 0 Toll Restriction 1 On Call routed to an extension user improperly enters Operator Alert operator an Account Code or violates Toll Restricted Oper Restriction ation Transfer 21 Extension Name 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 1 On ability to program its name 22 Busy Status Dis 0 Off Turns off or on the ability to display COS 01 15 0 20 13 06 play Called Par 1 On the detailed state of the called party ty Status 23 Display the Rea 0 Off Select whether an extension should COS 01 15 0 son for Transfer 1 On display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forwar
437. ons only apply to the system itself 2 Input Data Room Status 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 x Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Flexible Setup for Room Status 1 Room Clean Occupied 1 None 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Hotel Motel Programming Manual 2 387 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 01 System Options for ARS F Route Level IN Description Program Use Program 44 01 System Options for ARS F Route to define the system options for the ARS F Route feature 44 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 ARS F Route Time 0 Not Used If this option is set to 0 the F Route table 0 Schedule 1 Used selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call If this option is set to 1 the system first re fers to PRG 44 10 If there is a match the pattern defined in that program is used If not the F Route pattern in PRG 44 09 and time setting in 44 08 are used 02 Dial Tone Simulation 1 digit 0 9 When first dialed digit matches with the None V2 0 Added data set in this Program system send si cant be used mutated DT to calling party after receiving first digit Numbering plan for th
438. onversation Re cord beep This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0 64800 seconds To disable Conversation Record beep en ter 0 for this option 06 Message Waiting Lamp 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Update MW Lamp Use this option to enable or disable Mes sage Waiting light at the extension associ ated with the Subscriber mailbox For Sub scriber Mailboxes you should leave this option enabled For Guest Mailboxes you should leave this option disabled 07 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Direct to VM When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox hears the greeting and is asked to leave a message A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to VM while recording their mailbox greeting 08 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Forced UTRF Use this option to enable or disable Auto mated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox If ena bled each Screened Transfer TRF to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer UTRF If disabled Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally 09 Auto Time Stamp 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled
439. oop Keys 0 Incoming None Use Programs 1 Outgoing 15 13 01 and or 2 Both 15 13 02 to as sign the loop key to a trunk group 06 Trunk Access via Network System None V1 5 Added Networking No 1 4 x07 Station Park Hold None Slow Blink Green Holding own Fast Blink Green Recall own 10 ACD Log in Log On Logged in V1 5 Added out Off Logged out 13 ACD off duty On While Setup V1 5 Added mode Rest Slow Blink Rest Mode Setup Mode 17 ACD Work wrap On While wrap up time V1 5 Added up time Slow Blink While setup wrap up time 19 ACD Queue Sta None V1 5 Added tus Display x32 Warning Mes On Red Play warning message sage Off Stop warning message x33 Sensor Mode On Red Security Sensor On Off Security Sensor Off 125msec on 125msec off 125msec on 625msec off Security Sensor Delay Timer PRG20 50 01 is starting V1 5 Added Programming Manual 2 145 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 LED Pattern 0 OFF On Off LED Pattern 1 FL On 500ms Off 500ms 1 Off LED Pattern 2 WK On 250ms Off 250ms On Off LED Pattern 3 RW On 125ms Off 125ms Program h Off 1 5 LED Pattern 4 IR On 125ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 625ms Set q LED Pattern 5 IL On 875ms Off 125ms On
440. or a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used the entries in Program 10 29 xx must be set back to their default settings Even if 10 29 01 is set to 0 off the system still checks the settings in the remaining 10 29 programs Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Default Proxy Out 0 Off This sets whether the SIP message is al 0 bound 1 0n ways sent through the Default Proxy 02 Default Proxy In 0 Off Need to be registered in registration mode 0 bound 1 0n This sets whether the SIP message is al ways received through the Default Proxy 03 Default Proxy IP Ad 0 0 0 0 This is optional and used if the provider 0 0 0 0 dress 126 255 255 254 gives you a proxy address that is different 128 0 0 1 than the registration address If the provid 191 255 255 254 er is using domain names instead of IP ad 192 0 0 1 dresses leave this at default 223 255 255 254 04 Default Proxy Port 0 65535 The port number of the Default Proxy is 5060 Number set 05 Registrar Mode 0 None The mode registered in the registration 0 1 Manual server is set 06 Registrar IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP address of the SIP registration server is 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 set 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 07 Registrar Port Num 0 65535 The port number of the SIP registration 5060 ber server is set 08 DNS Server Mode 0 Off This setting
441. or exceeds the level the program requires Refer to How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1 2 for a list of the system access levels and passwords Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did not intend Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory For example 1 Enter the programming mode 2 15 07 01 La d 7 01 TEL KY01 01 lt tells you to enter the programming mode dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad After you do you will see the message 15 07 01 TEL on the first line of the telephone display This indicates the program number 15 07 item number 01 and that the options are being set for the extension The second row of the display KY01 01 indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of x01 The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right depending on which arrow is Programming Manual 1 1 5 P O Q O O SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 pressed To learn how to enter the programming mode refer to How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1 2 Section 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE To enter programming mode 1 Goto any working display telephone In a newly installed system use extension port 1 2 Do not lif
442. or the system in tegration codes to be correct With a Single Line Telephone this must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a talk path 10 Caller ID Name 0 Disable Determine if an extension user tele 1 15 03 09 1 Enable phone should display the Caller ID name 11 Caller ID Type 0 FSK Determine whether the Caller ID 0 1 DTMF type is FSK or DTMF 12 Fixed Cadence 0 Normal 1 1 Fixed 13 MW sending type 0 Lamp 0 1 Caller ID 14 Forwarded Caller 0 Calling Extension Determine what the display shows 0 ID Display Mode Number Calling when a multiline terminal receives a 1 External Caller ID forwarded outside call Forward 15 Disconnect with 0 Normal Determine whether or not to discon 0 out dial after 1 Disconnect nect a held call when on hook with hooking hold out any dialing after hooking hold 16 Special DTMF 0 No Determine whether or not to send 0 45 01 16 Protocol Send 1 Yes the extension number of the phone forwarded to the extension when Program 15 03 04 is set to Special 1 and not in the VM group 17 Dial Tone Select 0 Normal When the function of MW has been 0 1 New DT set from another extension or VM the dial tone upon off hook is selec ted 18 Select Special 0 Fax This PRG is used for selecting Spe 0 15 03 03 Terminal Type 1 Modem cial Terminal Type Fax or Modem V2 0 Added This setting influences how to trans mit data via SIP trunk This PRG is effective at the time o
443. orded announcement De Mail Routing Mailbox Options on pending on how the Announcement page 2 420 gt Mailbox is programmed InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or pro vides additional dialing options Ifthe Override Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associ ated Dial Action Table If any of the Input Data values are entered the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selec tion below Override Mailbox Number Override Up to 3 digits using O 9 Category 0 Skip Mailbox No No setting MB Num setting Use this option to specify the mailbox Category 1 Mailbox No should where Automated Attendant calls be 1 128 V3 5 Changed re should route when you enable Answer fer to lt 47 02 InMail Station Schedule Override The mailbox num Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt ber you select in this option should Category 2 Mailbox No should match the mailbox category specified be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 In in 47 11 02 Override Mailbox Cate Mail Group Mailbox Options on gory above page 2 415 gt Category 3 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 07 In Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2 420 gt Programming Manual 2 429 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 03 Default Mailbox Category Default 0 Undefined Category 0 Skip Mailbox No Answ
444. ore Recovery ANG issiicicisccanisiniuatiaieedanubsdsierpnousenxvaninessianuaneauaieaas 2 600 90 59 lt Delete Recovery aes shec asters se cece nner ran a a es 2 601 90 60 T1 ISDN Layer Status MOF MAGN ai ciccisisiesiaieieisicrssasseisianesisieusieivind 2 602 90 62 Security ID Information ensnenoneenrrnenrrrrrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnneenreeeereerrnsennsennees 2 603 C3 DR700 Control csn Ea 2 604 90 65 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup eeeeeeeeeee 2 605 90 66 FTP Firmware Update S amp U siirsin nisinsin 2 606 90 67 Backup Data Auto save Interval Time Set ccccccessseeeeeeeeseeeeees 2 607 90 66 1 Side Tone Auto SOU Pi sarisini eie eari A 2 608 Program 2 Gopr Froga csi 2 609 gzu T Cony Proar eiT ee 2 609 92 02 Delete All Extension Numbers 2 ceeceecnceeneneneeeteenenenetenee 2 612 92 03 Copy Program by Port INU sais cisiinessenanetiassaneeneniavearbegamneasidrenae 2 613 92 04 E denson Daa GWAD erea ee p 2 614 92 05 Extension Data Swap Password c cccccccceeceeseeeeeeesnenseeenseesseeees 2 616 Be UN caa a E cscs sia 2 617 92 07 Delete GONG is isricrsiraiatocesircastncnstnsraideetaeuatecimearaseandeeaadeemussiangiane 2 618 Program Oo Systemi Merma sc ah Sn ee ieee cdc cadet eeeeirean sean 2 619 93 01 Day Night Mode TOI iinis 2 619 93 02 Trunk aa 2 Se pier ar ee ene a a iaa PrN 2 620 93 03 Extension Informat is roisam 2 621 Da RONA L enera E eee eciee eau ieee
445. ormation 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability for in COS 01 15 1 Display 1 On coming Transfer preanswer display 09 Group Hold Initiate 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini COS 01 15 1 1 On tiate a Group Hold 10 Group Hold Answer 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to pick COS 01 15 1 1 On up a call on Group Hold 11 Automatic On Hook 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 0 Transfer 1 On Automatic On Hook Transfer 12 Call Forwarding Off 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to set COS 01 15 1 Premise External 1 0n up Call Forwarding Off Premise for their Call Forwarding telephone 13 Operator Transfer Af 0 Off Turns off or on an extension ability to have COS 01 15 1 ter Hold Callback 1 On a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 14 Trunk to Trunk Trans 0 Off Turns off or on the Trunk to Trunk Trans COS 01 15 0 fer Restriction 1 On fer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 15 VRS Personal Greet 0 Off Turns off or on a Service Code to record COS 01 15 1 ing Message Greet 1 On listen to or erase the Personal Greeting ing Message 2 184 Program 20 System Option Setup Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item I
446. oss Reference None Programming Manual 2 415 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Program 4 F Input Data Group Mailbox Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of Messages 00 99 messages Use this option to set the maximum num 20 To conserve storage ber of messages that can be left in the space enter 0 for all un Subscriber Mailbox If a caller tries to used mailboxes leave a message after this limit is reached they hear That mailbox is full InMail then hangs up 02 Message Playback 0 FIFO first in first Use this option to set the Subscriber Mail 0 Order out or oldest messages box message playback order When a sub first scriber listens to their messages InMail 1 LIFO last in first can play the oldest messages first first in out or newest messages first out or FIFO or the newest messag first es first last in first out or LIFO 03 Auto Erase Save of 0 Erase Use this option to determine what happens 1 Messages After the subscriber lis when a Subscriber Mailbox user complete tens to the entire new ly listens to a new message and then exits message and hangs up the mailbox without either saving SA or InMail erases the mes erasing E the message Depending on sage the setting
447. oup for each trunk port Input Data 1 2 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Night Mode Service 1 Night Mode Group 1 Assign the trunks into one of the four Night 1 Group Number 2 Night Mode Group 2 Mode Service Groups 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 97 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 07 Text Data for Night Mode Level IN Description Program Use Program 12 07 Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode 1 2 Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 04 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Text Message Maximum 12 Characters Assign the data that will be displayed on Mode 1 No alphabetic or numeric the phones display when the system en Setting ters one of the eight different night modes Mode 2 Only phones that have manual night mode lt Night gt switching enabled in class of service PRG Mode 3 lt Mid 20 07 01 will display the text night gt Mode 4 lt Rest gt Mode 5 lt Day2 gt Mode 6 lt Night2 gt Mode 7 lt Mid night2 gt Mode 8 lt Rest2 gt Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service 2 98 Program 12 Night Mode
448. out none of the ports on the unit can be used for new calls Existing calls however are not torn down Input Data 9 0 0 Set Busy Out 1 Reset Busy Out idle Menu Number Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Trunk Control Trunk Port Number 1 001 084 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 535 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 07 Station Control Level SA Description Note This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming Use Program 90 07 Station Control for extension maintenance Input Data 1 Hardware Reset Menu Number 2 Software Reset Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Extension Control Extension Number up to eight digits Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 536 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 08 System Reset Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 08 System Reset to perform a system reset Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 System Reset Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold key only to can cel Conditions e Some of changes made to a program may need to reset the system order for the change
449. out message waiting lamps this Time is the time between intermittent ring ing If this value is set to 0 the sys tem rings once 07 Trunk to Trunk 0 64800 seconds Time starts when a trunk begins 1800 14 01 25 Transfer Release talking with another trunk for exam 20 28 01 Warning Tone ple trunk to trunk transfer outgoing 20 28 02 from trunk Tandem Trunking 20 28 03 When this time expires a warning 24 02 10 tone is heard If Program 24 02 10 is set the conversation disconnects after time expires This time is set again when the external digit timer expires One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line 08 Delayed Transfer 0 64800 seconds 10 11 11 28 Time for all De 11 11 29 partment Groups 15 07 59 2 282 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup IN ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 09 Two B Channel 0 30 seconds 10 10 03 16 Transfer Retry PRI Timer 10 Disconnect 0 64800 seconds 0 14 01 25 Trunk to Trunk 20 28 01 20 28 02 20 28 03 24 02 07 11 No Answer Step 0 64800 seconds 10 14 01 26 Transfer 12 No Answer 0 64800 seconds 0 14 01 26 P Trunk to Trunk rogram Transfer 13 Hook Flash 0 64800 seconds Time before sending the hook flash 2 Sending Timer for Call Forward Centrex When the Sys tem Answers Au tomatically 15 SIP Out of Range 0 30 seconds
450. p ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 10 Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 Assign the subnet mask for the VoIPDB 255 255 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 card 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 Program 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 1 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 11 NIC Setup 0 Auto Detect Set for VoIPDB 0 1 100 Mbps Full Du plex 3 10 Mbps Full Duplex 5 1 Gbps Full Duplex Conditions The system must be reset for these changes to take affect Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 15 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 13 In DHCP Server Setup Level SA Description Use Program 10 13 In DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 Disable Enable or disable the use of the built in 0 1 Enable DHCP Server This program cannot be enabled if PRG10 63 01 is enabled 02 Lease Time Days 0 255 Lease Time of the IP address to a cli 0 d
451. p 102 VM 103 Centralized VM Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 270 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 13 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Level IN Description Use Program 22 13 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Program Groups to DID Translation Tables DID trunks should be in their own group If you have more than one type of DID trunk put each type in a separate Trunk Group For each Trunk Group you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode 2 2 Input Data Trunk Group Number 1 25 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Conversion Table Area Number 0 20 1 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward Dialing DID Programming Manual 2 271 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 14 VRS Delayed Message for IRG Level IN Description Use Program 22 14 VRS Delayed Message for IRG Incoming Group Ring to define for each incoming ring group the timers VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message Program Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 1 25 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 1st Delayed Message 0 64800 seconds Time before the VRS Delay Message is 0 St
452. p Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 06 Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20 14 02 Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service 1 15 The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Input Data DISA User Number 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 tem Item Input Data Default No 01 Route Table Number 0 25 1 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 300 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 11 DISA Toll Restriction Class Level IN Description For systems that use Toll Restriction use Program 25 11 DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a Program Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to each DISA user 1 15 The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Programs 21 05 and 21 06 The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user which is determined by the password the caller dials 2 5 When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data DISA User Number 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Toll Res
453. ption Use Program 21 09 Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Toll Restriction Class 1 15 Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service 15 With Dial Block when the Dial Block feature is used 02 Supervisor Password 0 9 Assign a 4 digit password to be used by No Setting 4 digit fixed the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions Conditions e This function works by password and Class of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Feature Cross Reference None 2 238 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Level IN Description Use Program 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction Program Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction If this data is 0 Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21 09 01 Input Data 2 1 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Toll Restriction Class 0 1 15 0 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature
454. ption Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 57 Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the Compact Flash memory on the CPU and to make the recovery data 9 0 Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Backup Recovery Data Backup Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 599 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 58 Restore Recovery Data Level SA Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 58 Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the Compact Flash memory of the CPU After this command is executed the system restarts automatically Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Restore Recovery Data Restore amp Reset Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 600 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 59 Delete Recovery Data Level SA Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 59 Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data
455. r 61 0 0 SIP ex 1 Failed reg 1 The registered 1 Confirm wiring ERR tension istration of port is used by and the sys REC trouble in the SIP ex other exten tem data set formation tension ter sion ting minal 2 Thelicenseis 2 Confirm 2 The SIP ex insufficient whether each tension ter 3 DSP of equipment minal was VoIPDB not such as ac not ac acquired cess points quired works normal At Regist of ly the SIP exten sion terminal to SL1100 When you cannot ac quire the DSP resource when it sent Programming Manual 2 543 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Alarm Re Content of Alarm No Type port Name Rigen Cause Action Recovery Status 63 0 0 SIP MLT 1 Thetrouble 1 The packet Confirm whether WAR trouble in occurred by loss occurred each equipment formation the SIP on the network such as wirings MLT rela or the wiring and HUB is nor tion cutting occur mal 2 The DSP red resource 2 DSP of could not VoIPDB not be acquired acquired at incom ing outgo ing P 3 The nego rogram tiation with VoIPDB failed 64 1 O VoIPDB Thelinkof LAN 1 LANcableis 1 Confirm LAN When the ERR LAN Link of VoIPDB defective connector and connection REC Error came off 2 Connected wiring returns nor HUB broken 2 Check with mally the er 3 Defect CPU maker on un ror is recov certain points ered 65 0 0 VOIPDB_
456. r 1 13 8 06 Incoming Signal Type Dial In in Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 12 the E amp M Tie Line 07 Incoming Signal Type Door Box Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 8 Ringing for SLT 08 Incoming Signal Type Virtual Ex Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 8 tension Ring 09 Incoming Signal Type Callback Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 11 10 Incoming Signal Type Alarm for Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 5 SLT 11 Incoming Signal Type VRS Wait Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 6 ing Message Incoming Call Table 2 5 Ringing Cycles Number Ringing Cycle O 5 On 2 0 Off 4 0 On 1 0 Off 2 0 On 0 5 Off 0 5 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 5 Off 0 5 On 0 5 Off 1 5 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 5 25 On 0 375 Off 0 25 On 0 375 Off 2 0 On 0 25 Off 0 125 On 0 25 Off 0 125 On 0 25 Off 2 0 1 0 Off 4 0 olol s o a aA vN O 5 O 53 Programming Manual 2 193 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Number Ringing Cycle 11 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 4 25 12 On 1 0 Off 3 0 13 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 2 25 Conditions None Program 2 0 None 2 194 Feature Cross Reference Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 16 Selectable Display Messages Level SA Descriptio
457. r 0 255 seconds 5 30 LRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 31 RAS RAI Timer 0 255 seconds 3 32 RAI Retry Count 0 255 2 33 Call Signaling Port Number 0 65535 1730 0 1719 1721 65535 35 Fast Start Mode 0 Disable 1 1 Enable 36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0 65535 20001 Program 37 Terminal Type setting 0 255 60 Conditions 8 4 None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 493 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 07 Firmware Download Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 84 07 Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central Firmware Download for IP Phones 84 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Server Mode 0 TFTP 0 1 FTP 02 File Server IP Ad 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dress 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 254 254 03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters Enable only 84 07 01 is 1 None 04 Password Up to 20 Characters Enable only 84 07 01 is 1 None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 494 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 09 VLAN Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 09 VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data I F No 2 The packets send from LAN I F Program on VoIPDB is set the VLAN tag Input Data 84 Interface Number 1 2 Item Item Input D
458. r ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup to defines the function mode for each Caller ID shared group 2 0 Input Data Caller ID shared group Number 01 08 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Group Name Maximum 12 charac Caller ID shared group Name Group 1 Group 15 02 67 ters Name Group 1 Group 8 Group Name Group 8 Default Group Group Name 1 Group1 2 Group2 3 Group3 4 Group4 5 Group5 6 Group6 7 Group7 8 Group8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 224 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 55 Delay Timer for Security Sensor Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Podam Use Program 20 55 Delay Timer for Secuirty Sensor to set time for Security to be operational Once it reach the time the Security will starts if the Security sets manually 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Sensor delay timer 0 3600 seconds 60 0 Sensor will start immediately Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 225 Program 21 SL1100 Level IN ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 01 System Options for Outgoing Calls Description Use Program 21 01 System Option
459. r Target Setup 2 286 24 09 lt Call Forward Split SetlingS seiersen 2 287 Program 29 VROIA SOIUSA N ATANT EEE TEES 2 289 25 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup cccccecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 289 25 02 DID DISA VRS Message ocinnxaisccisinincnincenitimmaneausunnmaxemembenss 2 290 25 03 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing 2 291 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy 006 2 292 25 05 VRS DISA Error Message Assignment 2 293 25 06 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup cceeeeeereeeeeees 2 294 25 07 System Timers for VA oe asec sass ine seissrcrersrecu care meneeneeedees 2 296 25 0647 DISA UserID Sep inidruddosia a sete 2 298 25 09 Class of Service for DISA USGS uiisicccc cscs ccceieceneeieansncanneenensienneneess 2 299 25 10 Trunk Group Routing for DISA sis scs nicssssnntinngisasnreainseinteaiecsadeiaatnionss 2 300 25 11 DISA Toll Restriction eS eee ee nee nee erent ere reer eer 2 301 25 12 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA wicicssscissassssisssessesssassvessiarsse 2 302 Ty Be Ree ig Option 10r ie eo ee E nie er ni ee Pree melee 2 303 25 15 DISA Transfer Target SQUID icesicuiicssissscassencucadaccateisalinnsecusiacdieveisnns 2 304 Program 20 ARS SENEE eaan ee ee eee eer eer eee 2 305 26 01 Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Service cee 2 305 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for Pcie eect te 2 306 26 03
460. r an Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message it re peats the number of times specified in this option This option interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing options For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide 03 Hang Up After 0 None 1 Goodbye 2 Silent HangUp Use this option along with Next Call Rout ing Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide additional routing options to Auto mated Attendant callers For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide Conditions None 2 424 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Feature Cross Reference None Program 47 Programming Manual 2 425 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 10 InMail Trunk Options Level IN Description Program Use Program 47 10 InMail Trunk Options to assign InMail options for each trunk Currently only 47 10 01 Answer Table Assignment is available 47 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Answer Table Assign Answer Table 1 16 Answer Table 1 ment V3 0 Changed Use this option to assign an InMail Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line DIL t
461. ram SIP MLT and SIP IP stations Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 02 RTP Forwarding Mode 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 Off 1 1 0 Za By Setting PRG 10 33 05 Enable 9 this Setting will always be Off V4 0 Added 04 DR700 Peer to Peer Mode 0 Off 1 1 On Conditions e Disabling 10 26 04 results in SIP MLT Station to SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource e SIP to SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in using a DSP resource e Disabling 10 26 03 results in SIP IP Station to SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 27 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 27 IP System ID Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 10 27 IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems 1 0 Input Data Network System ID V4 0 Added 1 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 System ID is related with the System ID in 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 the Numbering Plan Program 11 01 03 128 0 0 1 When the digits are analyzed and the sys 191 255 255 254 tem ID is determined from the System data 192 0 0 1 set in the Numbering Plan the networking 223 255 255 254 call is sent to the IP Address set in this Program
462. ram 26 ARS Service ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 26 ARS Service 26 03 ARS Dial Treatments Level IN Description Use Program 26 03 ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS Program dialing translation Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers Trunk Groups in Program 26 02 The ARS Dial Treatment options are An For Alternate Carrier Access n 1 4 The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which 2 6 code in Program 26 11 will be included in the information element This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks e DNN Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows For example D041234 outdials 1234 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk e R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End of Dial Treatment All Dial Treatments must end with the E code X When ARS is enabled X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature Input Data Dial Treatment Table Number 1 15 Item Item Input Data Defau
463. ramming Manual 2 515 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 08 G 729 Silence Com 0 Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0 pression VAD Mode 1 Enable G 729 When there is silence the RTP packet is not sent When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop sending silence packets but the IP phone will continue to transmit silence packets 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 20 Minimum of G 729 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the average G 729 Jitter Buffer 40 Standard 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the maximum G 729 Jitter Buffer 80 Maximum 17 Jitter Buffer Mode Set 1 static 1 Size set to the fixed amount for the co 3 the mode of the Jitter 3 adaptive immediately dec Buffer 2 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used 3 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time re gardless of silence 18 Silence Compression 1 30 Set the voice level judged to be silence 20 VAD Threshold self adjustment and 19 Change value based 30 dB 10dB This entry is ignored if silence compres 19 dB 49 dBm sion is disabled in 84 01 03 with G 711 or 84 01 06 with G 729 20 0 dB 30 dBm 29
464. rate code or many extensions can share the same override code Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Password Four Digits Fixed No Setting 21 01 07 20 08 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 236 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 08 Repeat Dial Setup Level IN Description Use Program 21 08 Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data Program Input Data 2 1 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Repeat Redial Count 0 255 Sets how many times a Repeat Redial au 3 tomatically repeats if the call does not go through 02 Repeat Redial Interval 0 64800 seconds Set the time between Repeat Redial at 60 Time tempts 03 Repeat Dial Calling 0 64800 seconds After dialing the trunk call Repeat Redial 30 Timer maintains the call after this time After this time the system terminates the call waits the Repeat Redial Time Timer 02 and tries again 04 Time for Send Busy 0 64800 seconds Sets the time sec to send out Busy Tone 0 Tone for ISDN Trunk with an ISDN line when called party is busy Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 237 Program 21 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 09 Dial Block Setup Level IN Descri
465. re Cross Reference None 2 496 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VolPDB 84 12 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 84 12 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice RTP packet encoding parameters 84 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of G 711 Au 1 10 ms 3 dio Frames 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms 02 G 711 VAD mode 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 03 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 1 p law 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 30 min 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 60 average 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 120 max 07 Number of G 729 Au 1 10ms 3 dio Frames 2 20ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms 5 50 ms 6 60 ms 08 G 729 VAD mode 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 30 min 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 60 average 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 120 max 12 Number of G 723 Au 1 30 ms 1 dio Frames 2 60 ms 14 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 30 min 15 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 60 average 16 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms 120 max Programming Manual 2 497 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Defaul
466. reNet networking keep alive message The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination system if the response is not received the retry count will start If a response is not received within the number of retries the networking link will be taken out of service When the link is taken out of service Any calls that are in progress will be released e Park Hold orbits will be released No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Keep Alive Interval 0 65535 seconds This program is used to set the interval of 0 the Keep Alive timer The system does not send Keep Alive when this item is set to 0 02 Keep Alive Retry Tim 1 255 Set how many times the system resends 5 er Keep Alive Conditions The Keep Alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count for the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold ordits to be released Feature Cross Reference None 2 34 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 33 SIP Registrar Proxy Information Basic Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 33 SIP Registrar Proxy Informati
467. rge Ins 1 On having multiple users Barge into their conversation 34 Block Manual 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 0 Off Hook Signal 1 On ability to block off hook signals man ing ually sent from a co worker 35 Block Camp On 0 Off Camp On Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 15 0 blocked ability to block callers from dialing to 1 On Camp On al Camp On lowed 36 Call Duration 0 Off Turns off or on an extension display COS 01 15 1 Timer Display 1 On of the Call Duration Time The sys tem waits until the interdigit time Program 21 01 01 expires before beginning this timer 38 Headset Ringing 0 Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 15 0 for SLT 1 On ability to use the Headset ringing 39 ACD Queue Sta 0 Off Turn off or on the ACD Queue Sta COS 01 15 0 41 20 tus Display V1 5 1 On tus Display for an extension Class of Added Service Any extension which has this option enabled also hears the queue alarm 40 Do Not Disturb 0 Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 11 11 08 1 On ability to set or cancel Do Not Dis 15 07 03 turb 41 Voice Mail Mes 0 Off Turn off or on the Voice Mail Mes COS 01 15 0 sage Indication 1 On sage Indication for an extension on on DSS a DSS console 42 Extension Data 0 Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 15 1 11 15 12 Swap Enabling 1 On ability to use Extension Data Swap 44 Live Monitor En 0 Off Turn off or o
468. riority to a trunk ring group should follow a priori 1 Highest Priority ty assignment 7 Lowest Priority Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD e Ring Groups Programming Manual 2 365 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 05 ACD Agent Work Schedules Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 05 ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups For each ACD Work Schedule 1 4 designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods After you set up the schedules in this program assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules ACD extensions can log in only during their work period ACD extensions receive the following calls when they are logged in e ACD Call on a Trunk When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time Programs 41 03 and 41 06 ACD Pilot Number Call Any time if ACD extensions are available Input Data ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Work Period 1 8 Start 0000 Mode Number End 0000 Start Time 0000 2359 End Time 0000 2359 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 366 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 06 Trunk
469. rogram 01 Trunk Loop Key Op 0 Keep Lamp 1 eration Mode 1 Extinction Mode 0 Keep Lamp 1 LED Off Incoming 300 IPM Red blink Talking Green Lighting LED Off on Talking TEL Holding 60 IPM Green LED Off blink on holding TEL 02 Trunk Group Ac 0 Outgoing Incoming Use this option 0 cess Key Operating 1 Outgoing to set the oper Mode 2 Incoming ating mode of the extension trunk group keys The keys are for incom ing access outgoing ac cess or both 04 Retrieve the Line Af 0 Not Holding No Keep Enable 1 or 1 ter Transfer 1 Holding Keep disable 0 an extension abili ty to answer a call after it has been transfer red but before itis answered 05 Headset Busy Mode 0 No Disable Set the condi 0 20 09 07 1 Yes Enable tions under which a head set extension is busy to in coming callers 06 Pre selection Time 0 64800 seconds When a multi 5 line terminal user preselects a line key the system re members the pre selection for this time Programming Manual 2 169 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 07 Time and Date Dis 1 8 Set how the 3 play Mode Type 1 12 hour 10 MAR TUE 3 15 PM Time and Date Type 2 12 hour 3 15 PM MAR 10 TUE appear on dis Type 3 12 hour 3 10 TUE 3 15 PM play tele Type 4 12 hour 3 15 PM TUE 10 MAR phones There Type 5
470. rogram 10 System Configuration Setup 10 03 ETU Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 03 ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each unit Program When changing a defined terminal type first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the unit The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed 1 0 Input Data Slot No 00 15 V3 5 Changed For ESIU PKG Setup Physical Port Number 01 08 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Terminal Type B1 0 No setting 0 1 Multi Line Telephone 10 DSS Console 02 Logical Port Number 0 No setting 0 1 Multi Line Telephone 1 96 V3 5 Changed 10 DSS Console 1 12 10 Bottom option information 0 None 0 4 WHA 12 Multi Line Telephone Line 0 None This program can 0 12 12 Line only be change by us Terminal Type B1 ing PC Program 24 24 Line ming For SLIU PKG Setup Physical Port Number 01 08 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 112 V3 5 Changed 0 03 Transmit Gain Level S Level 1 63 15 5 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 04 Receive Gain Level R Level 1 63 15 5 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 05 Select port type 0 SLT 0 1 Door Phone Programming Manual 2 5 Program 10
471. ross Reference e Ring Groups Programming Manual 2 259 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Level IN Description Program Use Program 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups There are 25 available Ring Groups 2 2 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Group 0 No Setting Use this program to assign Normal 1 22 04 Number V1 5 01 25 Incoming Ring Trunks 22 02 to Incoming 22 06 Changed Ring group Ring Groups 22 04 102 VM 103 Centralized VM Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Ring Groups 2 260 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode Level IN Description Use Program 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring Program for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode Input Data 2 2 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Group Number 0 No Ring 1 22 04 1 Ring 22 05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering Programming Manual 2 261 Program 22 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0
472. roup Call Pickup 0 Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls COS 01 15 1 Within Group 1 On ringing an extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls Service Code 02 Group Call Pickup 0 Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls COS 01 15 1 Another Group 1 0n ringing outside a group Service Code 769 03 Group Call Pickup for 0 Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a COS 01 15 1 Specific Group 1 0n specific group Service Code 768 04 Telephone Call Pick 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to be picked COS 01 15 1 up 1 0n up by a call pickup 05 Directed Call Pickup 0 Off Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for COS 01 15 1 for Own Group 1 0n calls ringing an extension Pickup Group Service Code 756 06 Meet Me Conference 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to use Meet COS 01 15 1 and Paging 1 0n Me Conference and Paging 07 Automatic Off Hook 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to use Univer COS 01 15 0 Answer 1 0n sal Auto Answer no service code re quired 08 Virtual Extension Off 0 Off Ringing Line Turns off or on an extension to answer an COS 01 15 1 Hook Answer Preference Disabled incoming call on a Virtual Extension simply 1 On Ringing Line by lifting the handset Preference Enabled 09 Call Pickup Callback 0 Off Turn off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 15 1 1 0n Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls 10 Answer Preset 0 Off COS 01 15 0
473. rtment group 02 Department Call 0 Normal Routing Use this option to set the call routing 0 16 02 ing Cycle Priority for Department Calling Routing can 1 Easy UCD Rout be either circular cycles to all ing Circular phones in group or priority cycles to highest priority extensions first 03 Department 0 Normal Intercom Set this option to set how the sys 0 16 02 Routing when caller hears busy tone tem routes an Intercom call to a Busy Auto Step 1 Circular Intercom busy Department Group member Call caller routes to an idle Intercom callers to the extension group member can either hear busy or route to the first available department number This only occurs for calls to the ex tension directly not the department number assigned in Program 11 07 04 Hunting Mode 0 Last extension is Use this option to set the action tak 0 called and hunting is en when a call reaches the last ex stopped tension in the Department Group 0 1 Circular hunting stopped 1 hunting re peats with circular routing through the Department Group 05 Extension Group 0 Manual Ring the Determine whether calls ringing a 0 11 16 10 All Ring Mode extensions one ata Department Group should ring all Operation time when the service extensions in the group simultane code are pressed ously automatically or manually 1 Automatic Ring all when using the service code defined extensions in Program 11 12 09 When set to 1 Autom
474. runk Group Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Line Preference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 279 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Level IN Description Program Use Program 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off hook automatic 23 response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone There are 50 available Virtual Extension Ports Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Priority Order 1 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Extension Group 0 32 When an extension has a virtual ex 0 16 02 Number 0 No Setting tension assigned to a Programma ble Function Key this program de termines the priority for automatical ly answering the ringing calls when the handset is lifted If O or 00 is se lected when the user lifts the hand set the user answers a ringing call from any group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Virtual Extensions 2 280 Program 23 Answer Features Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 01 System Options for Hold Level IN Description Use Program 24 01 System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold fea
475. s None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel 2 84 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Level IN Description Use Program 11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access to customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel Motel feature You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 11 14 and 11 16 The following chart shows The number of each code 01 14 e The function of the Service Code e What type of telephones can use the Service Code e The default entry Programs that may be affected when changing the code Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Remote Mainte 0 9 x Maximum of 730 nance 8 digit 02 ACD Access in 0 9 x Maximum of 760 22 04 Dialin Conver 8 digit 22 11 sion Table V1 5 Added 05 System Program 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT x x 11 01 ming Mode Log 8 digit On 09 Transfer to In 0 9 x Maximum of No Setting coming Ring 8 digit Group 12 Extension Data 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT No Setting 92 04 Swap 8 digit 13 Remote Access 0 9 Maximum of No Setting 22 02 from DISA 8 digit 14 Modem Access 0 9 x Maximum of 740 8 digit 2 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Singl
476. s 0 64800 seconds The system waits for this time to ex 10 21 01 03 Time Trunk I D pire before placing the call in a talk Timer state Call Timer starts after time ex pires Voice Over and Barge In are not allowed until after time expires 06 Hotline Time 0 64800 seconds A Ringdown extension automatically 5 21 01 09 Start Time Hot calls the programmed destination af line Start ter this time 07 Ring No Answer 0 64800 seconds If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 60 22 01 03 Alarm Time longer than this time the system changes the ring cadence This indi cates to the user that the call has been ringing too long 08 DIL Incoming 0 64800 seconds A DIL that rings its programmed 0 22 01 04 Ring Group No destination longer than this time di Answer Time verts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group set in Program 22 08 09 DID Ring No An 0 64800 seconds In systems with DID Ring No An 20 22 01 06 swer Time swer Intercept this time sets the Ring No Answer time This time is how long a DID call rings the desti nation extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group Programming Manual 2 209 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 10 Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension 60 V1 5 24 01 01 Non Exclusive that placed it on Hold after this time Changed Hold This time works
477. s Code Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 21 VM Message Indication 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 Programming Manual 2 319 Program 30 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 LED Pattern 0 OFF On Off LED Pattern 1 FL On 500ms Off 500ms On Off LED Pattern 2 WK On 250ms Off 250ms On Off LED Pattern 3 RW On 125ms Off 125ms Program h Off On a LED Pattern 5 IL On 875ms Off 125ms On 3 0 LED Pattern 4 IR On 125ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 625ms Off LED Pattern 6 IW On 625ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 125ms A off LED Pattern 7 ON On Off LED Patterns for DSS Console Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Station Selection DSS Console 2 320 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 31 Paging Setup 31 01 System Options for Internal External Paging Level IN Description Use Program 31 01 System Options for Internal External Paging to define the system options for Internal External Paging The system shows the name you program on the telephone display Use the following chart when entering and editing text When using the keypad digits press the key once for the first ch
478. s Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 368 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level SA SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 08 ACD Overflow Options This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description For each ACD Group 01 02 use Program 41 08 ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow mode 0 9 destination and announcement message types Delay Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options The table below outlines the entry options Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Overflow Operation 0 No Overflow None Assign the overflow mode 0 9 destina 0 Mode 1 Overflow with No An tion and announcement message types nouncement Delay Announcement functions are not 2 No Overflow with available for ACD pilot number calls Each First Announcement On ACD Group can have unique overflow op ly tions 3 No Overflow with First amp Second An nouncements 4 Overflow with First Announcement Only 5 Overflow with First amp Second Announcement 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 No Overflow with Second Announcement Only 9 Overflow with Sec ond Announcement Only 02 ACD Overflow Desti 0 No Setting Assign the overflow mode 0 9 destina 0 nation 1 2 ACD Group tion and announcement message types 3 Overflow Table Pro Del
479. s for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Call Service Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Seizure Trunk 0 Priority Route Select the trunk based off the Trunk 0 14 05 Line Mode 1 Circular Route Route Priority 0 or based off the 14 06 trunk that has not been used in the longest time 1 02 Intercom Interdi 0 64800 seconds When placing Intercom calls exten 10 git Time sion users must dial each digit in this time 03 Trunk Interdigit 0 64800 seconds The system waits for this time to ex 5 14 02 08 Time External pire before placing the call in a talk state Call Timer starts after time ex pires Voice Over and Barge In is not allowed until after time expires 04 Dial Tone Detec 0 64800 seconds If dial tone detection is enabled the 5 14 02 05 tion Time system waits this time for the Telco to return dial tone When the time expires the system assumes dial tone is not present To disable this time and have the system wait con tinuously enter 0 05 Disconnect Time 0 64800 seconds If 14 02 11 is enabled the system 3 when Dial Tone skips over a trunk if dial tone is not not Detected detected This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save Num ber dialed It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls 06 Dial Pause at 0 64800 seconds 1 First Digit 07 Toll Restriction 0 64800 seconds After dialing the
480. se Program 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an Program extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15 07 You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15 01 Program Virtual 1 5 Extension keys in Program 15 07 code 03 There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01 24 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Ringing 0 No Ringing 0 1 Ring Conditions e Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 149 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Level SA Description Use Program 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority 1 4 for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15 08 When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously the tone with the highest order number e g 1 rings The other keys only flash There are 50 Virtual Extension ports Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No Item Input Data Description Relate
481. setting 02 PC Pro TCP port 1 65535 The port number of TCP of the PC pro 8000 Number gramming is set The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the PCPro to the logout of all users of the PCPro who is log ging in the system after data is changed in the setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e PC Programming 2 596 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 55 Free License Select Level IN Description Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Program Use Program 90 55 Free License Select to validate the Free License Input Data 9 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Start Free License 0 Stop 0 1 Start Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 597 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 56 NTP Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 56 NTP Setup to set the NTP 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 NTP Synchronize 0 No 0 1 Yes 02 Server Address IPv4 form No Setting XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv6 form XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 598 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 57 Backup Recovery Data Level SA Descri
482. setting of 47 01 06 Fax Extension If disabled the Automated At tendant does not detect incoming fax calls 05 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No Setting 2 422 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual SL1100 2 423 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 09 Announcement Mailbox Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 09 Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Announcement Mailboxes in 47 07 02 Routing Mailbox Type Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 01 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Number 01 32 Next Call Routing Mail box 00 32 00 Undefined Next CR Mbox If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls use this option to provide additional routing op tions to the Automated Attendant callers This option interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After below For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide 02 Repeat Count 0 10 Announcement repeats 1 10 times 0 No Repeats Enter the number of times you want the Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to callers Afte
483. signed extensions shall ring Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Intercom Programming Manual 2 197 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 18 Service Tone Timers Level IN Description Program Use Program 20 18 Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers Refer to the following chart for a description of each option its range and default setting 2 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Extension Dial 0 64800 seconds After getting Intercom dial tone a 30 Tone Time telephone user has this time to dial the first digit of the Intercom call 02 Busy Tone Timer 0 64800 seconds 15 03 Congestion Tone 0 64800 seconds A Busy Tone when system resour 10 ces run short Such as DTMF re ceiver resources 04 Call Waiting 0 64800 seconds This option sets the time between 10 Tone Timer Call Waiting tones This timer also sets the time between Off Hook Sig naling alerts 05 Multiline Confir 0 64800 seconds 10 mation Tone 06 Interval of Call 3 64800 seconds 10 Waiting Tone 07 Intrusion Tone 0 64800 seconds After a call is interrupted such as 0 Repeat Time Barge In Voice Mail Conversation Recording or Voice Over the sys tem repeats the Intrusion Tone after this time Normally you should enter 0 to disable this time 08 Conference Tone 0 64
484. signment for Extensions to set the Department Groups The system uses these groups 32 Department Groups for Department Calling Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in Program 11 07 This lets system users place calls to the departments Use Program 16 01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group When a call comes to the group the extensions ring in order of their priority Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default Description Related Program No 01 Group Num 1 32 1 xxx Set up the Department Group called 11 07 ber See 2 by the pilot number and the exten 16 01 cee sion priority when a group is called Priority 1 999 Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 2 The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Programs 11 02 and 11 04 Extension ports are I 128 V3 5 or higher Virtual extension ports are I 50 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Department Calling 2 164 Program 16 Department Group Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 03 Secondary Department Group Level IN Description Use Program 16 03 Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for extensions Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group There are 32 available Department Groups Input Data Departme
485. sing wild card x make sure it is 6 digits Example 123 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 253 Program 22 SL1100 Level IN ISSUE 4 0 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Description Use Program 22 01 System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming calls Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Incoming Call 0 Intercom Call Priori Use this option to determine if Inter 1 15 02 22 Priority ty com calls or trunk calls have answer 1 Trunk Call Priority priority when both are ringing simul taneously 02 Incoming Call 0 Disable Off If enabled an incoming call that 0 22 01 03 Ring No Answer 1 Enable On rings longer than the Ring No An 22 01 04 Alarm swer Alarm interval 22 01 03 changes to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ring ing too long If disabled this does not occur 03 Ring No Answer 0 64800 seconds If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 60 22 01 02 Alarm Time longer than this interval the system changes the ring cadence This indi cates to the user that the call has been ringing too long 04 DIL No Answer 0 64800 seconds A DIL that rings its programmed 0 Recall Time 0 No Overflow destination longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group s
486. single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting When using a third party external paging device set this option to 1 In addition set Program 20 03 04 to 1 04 Dial Sending 0 64800 seconds When ARS or an analog extension 3 20 03 03 Start Time for user accesses a trunk and dials an SLT or ARS outside call the system waits this time before outdialing the first digit When using a third party external paging device set this option to 1 In addition set Program 20 03 03 to 1 05 SLT Operation 0 Normal Mode 0 Mode 1 Extended Mode 1 2 Extended Mode 2 2 172 Program 20 System Option Setup IN Description Use Program 20 03 System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for single line telephones ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 06 Headset Ringing 0 64800 seconds Define the headset ringing start 5 20 13 38 Start Time for time After this time expires from the SLT time when a single line telephone is off hook the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode 07 Trunk Call Dial 0 64800 seconds 0 20 03 03 Forced Sending 20 03 04 Start Time Forced Dial Program Conditions None 2 0 Feature Cross Reference e Single Line Telephones Pro
487. ss Reference None 2 512 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 23 DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup Description Use Program 84 23 DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the DR700 Multiline Terminal Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Registration Expire 60 65535 seconds The Expires value of the REGISTER mes 180 seconds Timer sage which received from DR700 terminal is out of range or when the Expire value is not set up in case it assigns the effective time to the DR700 terminal The timer for supervising whether DR700 terminal is connected or not 02 Subscribe Expire 60 65535 seconds The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and 3600 seconds Timer receive the terminal operation instructions between the Main Device and DR700 ter minal 03 Session Expire Timer 60 65535 seconds Set effective time for supervising the Voice 180 seconds Path 04 Minimum Session Ex 60 65535 seconds Set minimum value of effective time for su 180 seconds pire Timer pervising the Voice Path 05 Invite Expire Timer 60 65535 seconds Set effective time for Incoming Outgoing 180 seconds call when the Expire value is not set in the INVITE message received from DR700 terminal 06 Signal Type of Serv 0x00 OxFF Set Type of Service
488. ss of FTP Server ftp necii com Name Use XxXX XXX XXX xxx format in case of IP Address 04 FTP Server TCP Port 0 65535 21 05 DNS Primary Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 06 DNS Secondly Ad 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dress 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 606 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 67 Backup Data Auto save Interval Time Set Level IN Description Use Program 90 67 Backup Data Auto save Interval Time Set to set time interval D RAM data Program that is saved in F ROM memory D RAM memory Configuration information such as call transfer and Do Not Disturb 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Interval time 0 255 48 24 hr 0 Do not Auto save 1 30 min 2 60 min 3 90 min 255 30 min 127 hr Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 607 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 68 Side Tone Auto Setup Level IN Description Program Note This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Use Program 90 68 Side Tone Auto Setup to setup the volume level of Side Tone for each Analog Trunk Port 9 0 This program will change the setting of PRG 81 07 CODEC Filter S
489. ssages This program also is used to define additional DISA call options Input Data 2 5 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 VRS Message Access 1 9 0 Enter the password DISA callers must dial No Setting Password Fixed six digits before the system allows them to record listen to and or erase the VRS messages Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Voice Response System VRS Programming Manual 2 303 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 15 DISA Transfer Target Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 25 15 DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone times out or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy 2 5 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 DISA Transfer Target Area At Speed Dial bin number 0 999 999 25 03 01 Wrong Dial 02 DISA Transfer Target Area At Speed Dial bin number 0 999 999 25 04 01 No Answer or Busy Conditions e Related to Programs 25 03 01 25 04 01 Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Voice Response System VRS 2 304 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 26 ARS Service 26 01 Automatic Route Selection AR
490. sssssrrrrrrrenerenerrnrnrnrnnnnnnnreseneeeseeseeeese 2 372 41 12 Night Announcement SetuP wisccsacicaticsesianccisucecuviinuasisvinavebaduisiceuones 2 374 41 13 VRS Message Number for Night Announcement 2 375 1A 7 ACD OPTS CBB scisaisiivieatirindisineinn ansiosi enis ei aerisire 2 376 41 16 ACD Threshold OverfloW snesrsrsrrrrerrrnrnereronennrnnnnnnnnnnnneeseeeeeeeeeeens 2 378 41 19 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement seeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeere 2 379 41 20 ACD Queue Display Seu s sia vcicencecctciicxcidc reads eadivneesnceiaceasscianscenexd 2 380 FPrograma2 No GoU aeeai aa 2 381 42 01 System Options for Hotel Motel sseeeeseeeesesererersernrennnesesesssseoreeereess 2 381 42 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesesenenneaaaaaees 2 382 42 03 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel 2 eccececeeeeeeeeeee 2 383 42 04 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes cccceseeeeseeteeeteeeeeeeeee 2 385 42 05 Hotel Room Status PNM sce te enacted 2 386 42 09 Flexible Setup for Room StatuS ccccccececceecseeccesssesseeeseesereeeseees 2 387 Program 44 ARS F Route SetU perrera 2 388 44 01 System Options for ARS F ROute ccccccceeeseseneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 388 44 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route ACCESS ccccceccecetsteeeeees 2 389 44 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table cccc sccecsceeeseseeseeteeee
491. t No 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 Static 3 3 Adaptive Immediate ly 18 VAD Threshold 01 30 19 db 10 db 20 19 dB 49 dBm 20 0 dB 30 dBm 29 9 dBm 21 dBm 30 10 dBm 20 dBm 28 Audio Capability Pri 0 G 711_PT 0 ority 1 G 723_PT 2 G 729_PT 3 G 722_PT 30 Echo Auto Gain Con 0 5 0 trol 31 DTMF Relay Mode 0 Disable If VoIPU the systems refers to PRG 1 V2 0 1 RFC2833 84 06 10 setting Changed 2 VoIPU 32 Fax Relay 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 2 Each Port Mode 33 Number of G 722 Au 1 10ms 3 dio Frame 2 20ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms 35 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 30 min 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 60 average 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 255 ms 120 max 38 RTP Filter 0 Disable To avoid incorrect voice pass connection 1 1 Enable this Program checks the sending side ad dress from received RTP packet at VoIPDB 39 DTMF Level Mode 0 VoIPU default value Used only by VoIPDB 0 1 Main soft value 40 DTMF Level High 0 Disable Used only by VoIPDB 28 1 33 dBm 28 6 dBm 41 DTMF Level Low 0 Disable Used only by VoIPDB 28 1 33 dBm 28 6 dBm Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP 2 498 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 Level IN SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84 13 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Description Use Program 84 13 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic S
492. t No 01 Registration 0 Disable This setting determines if the SIP trunk in 0 1 Enable formation is registered 02 User ID Up to 32 Characters This sets the SIP trunk User ID No Setting 03 Authentication User Up to 64 Characters This sets the SIP trunk Authentication No Setting ID User ID 04 Authentication Pass Up to 32 Characters This sets the SIP trunk authentication No Setting word password Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 36 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 37 UPnP Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 37 UPnP Setup to set the UPnP Universal Plug and Play options for SIP trunks Program Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 UPnP Mode 0 Disable If the system controls the SIP phone 0 1 Enable through the NAT Router this program should be 1 Enable V4 0 Added Router must support UPnP 02 Retry Time 0 60 3600 Set interval time to re check the Router for 60 1 59 cannot be input the WAN IP address When this set as 0 it will not retry Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 37 Program 10 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 39 Fractional Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 39 Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI
493. t Time Pattern 1 Program Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0800 2 1 2 02 0800 1700 1 03 1700 0000 2 04 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Time Pattern 2 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 2 02 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Time Pattern 3 10 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service Programming Manual 2 93 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching Level SA Description Program Use Program 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night switch settings 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 1 2 Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 04 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Day of the Week 01 Sunday Refer below 02 Monday 03 Tuesday 04 Wednesday 05 Thursday 06 Friday 07 Saturday Time Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 Default Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 Sunday 2 02 Monday 1 03 Tuesday 1 04 Wednesday 1 05 Thursday 1 06 Friday 1 07 Saturday 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Night Service 2 94 Program 12 Night Mode Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 04 Holiday Night Service Switching Level SA Description Use Program 12 04 Holiday Night Service Switc
494. t Lan Refer to Ta Station Mailbox guage ble 2 9 47 02 16 Default Number Table on page 2 414 1 17 Enable Paging 0 No Disabled 0 1 Yes Enabled 18 Paging Option 0 RNA 0 1 Immediately 19 Telephone User Inter 0 Numeric 0 face Type 1 Mnemonic 20 Enable E mail Notifi 0 No 0 cation 1 Yes 21 E mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 22 Include Message as 0 No 1 Attachment 1 Yes 23 All Message Notifica 0 No 1 tion Enabled 1 Yes Programming Manual 2 413 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 24 All Find Me Follow 0 No 0 Me Enabled 1 Yes 25 Security Code Option 0 Always 0 1 Remote Logon only 26 Auto Play V1 5 Add 0 Disabled 0 ed 1 Enable 27 Email message Save 0 No Change 0 Delete Option V1 5 1 Save Added 2 Delete 28 Queuing V3 0 Added 0 Disabled Use this option to enable or disable Mes 0 Program 1 Enable sage Notification Queuing If enabled Message Notification is stored in queue when there is no active notification desti nation 47 Table 2 9 47 02 16 Default Table Item Name Input Data 47 02 16 Voice Prompt Language 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portug
495. t SMDR output on off Output is SAD Se curity auto dialing 23 Watch Auto Dialing 0 No Output Emergency call from Remote Inspection 1 1 Output Define SMDR output on off Output is WAD Watch auto dialing 25 Call Waiting V4 0 0 No Output Define Call Waiting output on off 1 Added 1 Output Conditions None Programming Manual 2 351 Program 39 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Feature Cross Reference e Station Message Detail Recording Program 39 2 352 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Level IN Description Use Program 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group For each Trunk Group select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information should be sent Input Data Trunk Group Number 01 25 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 SMDR Port No 12 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Station Message Detail Recording e Trunk Group Routing Programming Manual 2 353 Program 39 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups Level IN Description Program Use Program 35 04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for each Department Group For each Department Group select the SMDR port where the outgoing SMDR information
496. t the handset Press Speaker 4 x X g 5 Dial the system password Hold Refer to the following table for the default system passwords To change the passwords use 90 02 Programming Password Setup on page 2 530 Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 Password User Name Level Programs at this Level KKK KK necam 1 MF Manufacture Level MF 80 02 80 03 80 04 80 05 80 07 80 10 81 04 81 05 82 01 82 04 82 05 82 08 12345678 sltech 2 IN Installation IN All programs in this section not listed for MF SA amp SB 0000 ADMIN1 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 SA 10 01 10 02 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 28 10 29 10 45 12 02 12 03 12 04 12 08 15 01 15 07 15 09 15 10 15 11 20 16 20 34 21 07 21 14 22 04 22 11 22 17 25 08 30 03 30 04 32 02 45 02 84 22 90 03 90 04 90 06 90 07 90 19 90 57 90 58 90 59 90 65 9999 ADMIN2 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 SB 13 04 13 05 13 06 13 11 15 14 21 20 Section 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE To exit the programming mode When you are done programming you must be out of a program option to exit pressing the Mute key will exit the program option 1 Press Mute key to exit the program options if needed Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 2 Press Speaker If changes were to the system programming Saving System Data is displayed
497. ta Station Mailbox Number 001 128 V3 5 Changed Index Number 1 3 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Find Me Follow Me 0 Off 0 1 On 02 Find Me Follow Me Begin Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 03 Find Me Follow Me End Hour 00 23 00 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 04 Find Me Follow Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 05 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Sunday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 06 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Monday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 07 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Tuesday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 08 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Wednesday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 09 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Thursday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 10 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Friday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled 11 Find Me Follow Me Day of week 0 Disabled 1 Saturday V1 5 Added 1 Enabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2444 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 22 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 22 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Input Data Group Mailbox Number 01 32 Index Number L
498. tem Input Data Description Default No 16 Call Redirect 0 Off Turns off or on a multiline terminal user COS 01 15 1 1 0n ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without an swering the call 17 Department Group 0 Off Turns off or on an extension user ability to COS 01 15 1 Trunk to Trunk Trans 1 On set Trunk to Trunk Forwarding for a De fer Each Telephone partment Group Group Transfer 18 No Recall 0 Off No Recall set to Allow 1 will not stop COS 01 15 0 1 0n transferred calls from recalling from a virtu al extension 19 Hold Extended Park 0 Off Determine if an extension Class of Service COS 01 15 0 1 On should allow either a normal or extended Park 20 No Callback 0 Off Turns off or on an extension to receive COS 01 15 0 1 On callbacks 21 Restriction for Tan 0 Allow Allow 0 or Deny 1 an extension user COS 01 15 0 dem Trunking on 1 Deny ability to set up a tandem conference call Hang Up automatically when they hang up 22 Restricted Unsuper 0 Allow Allow 0 or Deny 1 an extension ability COS 01 15 0 vised Conference 1 Deny to initiate an unsupervised conference 23 VE Call Forward Set 0 Off Turn on or off an extension ability to set or COS 01 15 1 Cancel 1 On cancel call forwarding for a virtual exten sion 24 Trunk Park Hold 0 Non Exclusive Hold Set the hold type when a trunk call is put COS 01
499. tern 01 Set Time 01 00 00 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 02 09 00 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 03 18 00 12 02 02 Automatic night service Patterns End of time ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 01 09 00 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 02 18 00 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 03 00 00 12 02 03 Automatic night service Patterns Mode No ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 01 Mode3 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 02 Mode1 ModeGrp 1 4 Time Pattern 01 Set Time 03 Mode2 12 03 01 Night mode week setting sun Pttrn 3 sat Pttrn 2 Mode Group 1 4 14 01 13 TRK TRK Transfer 1 14 02 04 Flash for timed Flash or Disconnect 0 14 02 05 DTD Manual DI 0 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 1 14 02 10 Caller ID 1 Programming Manual 2 567 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program No Name Default 14 02 18 Busy Tone Detection Talking 1 15 01 01 Extension Name 15 03 09 Extension Display 1 15 03 15 Hook disconnect mode 1 16 01 03 Auto Step Call 1 16 01 04 Hunting Mode 1 16 01 08 Max Queue No 32 20 02 04 Transfer Retrieve 1 Program 20 02 11 Microphone of Key telephone 0 20 02 12 ICM Call Type 1 20 03 03 SLT DTMF Dial 0 9 0 20 03 04 Dial Start 1 20 03 07 Forced Dial 0 20 07 01 Manual night Service Enabled 1 20 08 09 Hotline 1 20 08 20 Hot ke
500. th CFW FL ME Fast Blink Red DND Intercom DND All CFW Imm 02 Microphone On Red Mic On Mute Key ON Off Mic Off OFF 03 DND Key On Red DND Setup 04 BGM ON OFF On Red Active 05 Headset On Red Headset Operating 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key On Red Conference Operating 08 Incoming Call Fast Blink Red Existing New CID Log On Red Existing Checked CID Off No CID 09 Day Night Mode Mode number 1 On While each mode Switch 8 0 toggle 10 Call Forward On Red Setup Immediate 11 Call Forward On Red Setup Busy 12 Call Forward No On Red Setup Answer 13 Call Forward On Red Setup Busy No Answer 14 Call Forward On Red Setup Both Ring 15 Call Forward Fast Blink Red Setup Follow Me Slow Blink To be setup 18 Text Message Selectable Display On Red Setup Setup Message Numbers 01 20 19 External Group External Paging On Red Active Paging Number 1 6 20 External All Call On Red Active Paging 21 Internal Group Internal Paging On Red Active Paging Number 01 32 22 Internal All Call None Paging 23 Privacy Release None 24 Call Pickup for None own group 25 Call Pickup for None Another Group 26 Call Pickup for Call Pickup Group None Specified Group Number 01 32 Programming Manual 2 141 Program 15 Program 15 SL
501. th G 729 20 OdB 30 dBm 29 9 dBm 21 dBm 30 10dBm 20 dBm 28 Priority Codec 0 G 711 PT The option selected here deter 0 Setting 1 G 723 PT mines what other codec options are 2 G 729 PT applied by priority 3 G 722 PT 4 G 726 PT 5 iLBC PT 6 G 711 Only V1 5 Added 7 G 729 Only V1 5 Added 30 EchoAuto Gain 0 5 Define the Auto Gain Control 0 Control 31 DTMF Payload 96 127 Define the DTMF Payload Number 110 Number 32 DTMF Relay 0 Disable Determine the DTMF setup 0 Mode 1 RFC2833 33 G 722 Audio 1 10ms Maximum number of G 722 Audio 3 Frame 2 20 ms Frames G 722 assumes the audio 3 30 ms signal made by a specimen by 16 4 40 ms kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as sumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method 35 G 722 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 30 fer Minimum Buffer of G 722 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between pack ets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed 36 G 722 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the average G 722 Jitter Buffer 60 fer Standard 37 G 722 Jitter Buf 0 255 ms Set the maximum G 722 Jitter Buf 120 fer Maximum fer 38 G 726 Audio 1 10 ms Maximum number of G 726 Audio 3 Frame 2 20 ms Frames G 726 assumes the audio 3 30 ms signal made by a specimen by 16 4 40 ms kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as sumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method 39 G 726 Silence 0 Dis
502. the pack supply voltage must use an PKGs age is broken it of the system other power recognizes it as is outside rat supply when is a communica ings in the range of tion fault 3 The equip ratings or ment that gen measuring erates the with the volt noise in the meter and de same power viating from supply system the rated as the power range supply origin 3 Please use the of the system power supply is connected besides the and it malfunc equipment tions because with the possi of the power bility of the supply noise noise source 4 The equip 4 Please sepa ment to which rate as much it is adjacent as possible to of a main and use a device and main device has put out from the the radiation equipment by noise exists which you and it malfunc seem may tions because generate the of the radia radiation tion noise noise 5 The chassis is 5 Please ground not properly the chassis grounded correctly 4 2 0 PKG S W The unit pro 1 The package 1 Delete slotin Please ex ERR Download gram could not software is not formation that change units REC Error be downloaded stored in the corresponds though it is normally downloaded by Program likely to re The unit could USB memory 90 05 01 to store by not able to be 2 The stored delete pack mounting the started normal package soft age informa unit again ly ware is illegal tion that was When the unit Package infor installed be program is mation that
503. the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site Caution Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding If you must change the standard numbering use the chart for Table 2 1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2 59 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes Before changing your numbering plan use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps Step 1 Enter the digit s you want to change You can make either single or two digit entries In the Dialed Number column in the Table 2 1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2 59 the nX rows e g 1X are for single digit codes The remaining rows e g 11 12 etc are for two digit codes e Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit For example entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6 The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6 For example if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected are 600 699 If you enter 4 in step 2 below the entries affected are 6000 6999 e Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials For example entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60
504. tions Level IN Description Use Program 47 17 Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47 07 02 is set to 4 Distribution Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01 32 Entry Number 01 20 jon Item Input Data Description Default 01 Distribution Mailbox Category 0 Undefined Category 1 Mailbox No should be 1 128 V3 5 0 Use Undefined 0 to skip Mailbox 1 Station Changed refer to lt 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox Number setting Mailbox Options on page 2 411 gt Use Station Mailbox 1 for setting 2 Group Category 2 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer Mailbox Number to 1 128 V3 5 Mailbox to lt 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options on Changed page 2 415 gt Program 47 02 Use Group Number 2 for setting Group Mailbox 1 32 Program 47 03 Distribution Mailbox Number Up to 3 digits Category 1 Mailbox No should be 1 128 V3 5 No Set Changed refer to lt 47 02 InMail Station Mailbox ting Options on page 2 411 gt Category 2 Mailbox No should be 1 32 refer to lt 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2 415 gt Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 439 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 18 SMTP Setup Level IN Description Use Program 47 18 SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e mail notification
505. to Telephone Programming Change Program Number Soft Key3 Change Index Number Move Cursor to Right Cursor Key Right Soft Key4 Section 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES Several programs e g Program 20 16 Selectable Display Messages require you to enter text Use the following chart when entering and editing text When using the keypad digits press the key once for the first character twice for the second character etc For example to enter a C press the key 2 three times Press the key six times to display the lower case letter The name can be up to 12 digits long Table 1 2 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ gt lt AAAAAAGEEio0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G l g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 amp 66uUaae6UaE0B Enter characters x lt gt TLOQ E Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey in stead to accept and or add a space Clear Back Clear the character entry one character at a time F
506. to 1 45 01 12 1 On process the Voice Mail Park and Page commands You should normally enable this option 05 Message Wait 0 Off Enable disable the system ability to 1 45 01 13 1 On process the Voice Mail Message Wait commands You should normally enable this option If ena bled be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings don t contain the code for trunk access 06 Record Alert 0 64800 seconds This time sets the interval between 30 Tone Interval Voice Mail Conversation Record Time alerts 07 Centralized Dial Up to 8 digits Assign this number the same as the No Setting Voice mail Pilot extension number or pilot number No V1 5 Added 08 Centralized 0 32 Assign which Extension Depart 0 Voice Mail De 0 No Voice Mail As ment Group Number is used as the partment Group signed Centralized Voice Mail group Number V1 5 Added 09 Centralized Up to 12 characters Assign the Centralized Voice Mail C V M Voice Mail mas Master Name ter Name V1 5 Added 2 402 Program 45 Voice Mail Integration ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 10 New NSL Proto 0 Off Disable 0 col support 1 On Enable 11 Prefix for Call Dial One digit 1 45 01 03 Screening 12 Prefix for Park Dial One digit 45 01 04 and Page 13 Prefix for Mes Dial One digit 45 01 05 sage Wait 15 Analog Voice 0 Fixed Assigns w
507. to play 04 Mailbox Number for Dial up to eight digits Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement No Setting 2nd Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the Message 2nd Announcement Message 05 2nd Delay Message 1 255 Determine the 2nd Delay Message Send 0 Sending Count 0 No message is ing Count This entry must be set to 1 or played higher for the message to play 06 Wait Tone Type at 0 Ring Back Tone Determine what the caller hears between 0 Message Interval 1 Music On Hold Tone the messages 2 Background Music Source 07 ACD Forced Discon 0 64800 seconds Assign the time the system should wait af 0 nect Time after 2nd ter the end of the ACD Delay Message be Announcement fore disconnecting 08 Delay Message Inter 0 64800 seconds Set the time for the interval between the 20 val Time Delay Messages Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 379 Program 41 Program 41 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 20 ACD Queue Display Settings Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 41 20 ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD Queue Status Display feature This program allows the Queue Status Display and causes an alarm to sound when the parameters in this program are met Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default
508. to update the firmware us ule Time Year 0 99 ing a compact flash card Month 0 12 Time registration fails if an expired Day 00 31 time is registered Hour 00 23 Minute 00 59 02 Update mode Read Only 0 Activate the Firmware Update feature 0 Non Active If this setting is 1 new firmware on the 1 Activated compact flash card updates according to the setting at 90 36 01 03 Update Report Read Only Output a report when the update is Maximum 256 charac ters executed and saves one copy on the system If a new update occurs the new report overwrites the old report Refer to the Sample Report on page 2 581 shown Sample Report Result Report Display Update Success Update Success Update Fail Update is fail Since A drive is not available Update Fail Update is fail Since main up is not exist on A drive Update Fail Update is fail Since Time is expired Programming Manual 2 581 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 2 582 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 37 Set Temporary License Level IN This Program is available for V4 0 or higher Description Program Use Program 90 37 Set Temporary License to set the effective days of the temporary license Input Data 9 0 pe
509. triction Class 1715 2 Conditions e Program 21 05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Manual 2 301 Program 25 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 12 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level IN Description Use Program 25 12 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code The route selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Use Program 11 09 02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code Use Program 14 06 to set trunk routes Input Data DISA User Number 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Route Table Number 0 25 1 0 No Setting Conditions e You cannot use Program 21 15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Trunk Group Routing 2 302 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 13 System Option for DISA Level IN Description Use Program 25 13 System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before Program the system allows them to record listen to and or erase the VRS me
510. ts Carrie LCR Tabela 1 Carrie LCR Tabela 2 3 34 01 05 System Toll Restriction 1 All Trunk 35 01 01 Output Port Type 1 Port 1 only 35 01 04 Omit Digits 0 Port 1 only 35 02 09 Extension Number or Name 1 Port 1 only 35 02 14 Date data 1 Port 1 only 2 576 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 35 02 16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number 2 Port 1 only 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 9 40 08 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 9 80 04 04 No Tone Time Type 2 BT 7 80 04 06 On Minimum Time Type 2 BT 6 80 04 07 On Maximum Time Type 2 BT 8 80 04 08 Off Minimum Time Type 2 BT 6 80 04 09 Off Maximum Time Type 2 BY 8 80 07 01 Frequency Table 1 42 Program 80 08 01 Duration 200 82 04 04 Maximum Break Time 14 9 0 82 04 06 Maximum Make Time 14 82 04 07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 16 82 04 08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 70 10 02 01 Country Code 55 15 02 01 Display Language Selection 1 47 02 16 Voice Prompt Language 13 47 06 14 Voice Prompt Language 13 47 07 03 Prompt Language 13 47 10 03 Voice Prompt Language 13 Brazil PRG80 01 Service Tone Setup Service Tone Setup Unit 80 01 01 80 01 02 80 01 03 80 01 04 Internal Dial Tone TONE 2 1 0 0 1 32 2 1 10
511. ts 2 51 10 80 Audio Port GEU sisirin TR E OAA 2 53 Toei RER PON SeN E 2 54 19027 NAIBIOS SENO niidina EEE EREE EE 2 55 10 63 lt DHCP Client icc ates ek 2 56 10 65 NTP Server SUING nic iicinannicinoninuumanmmemasenanmiananets 2 57 Program TI Systemi TN erraien E 2 58 1101 System NUMREN isiin 2 58 11 02 Extension NUMmDErNg isse a 2 65 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering iiicccssiisiecisecntssasesunsesabiaastudesenenigoeieiens 2 66 11 07 Department Group Pilot NUMDELS cccccccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesenereees 2 67 T0 PTV eee COGE EES 2 68 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator eee 2 70 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation ccceeeeeeeeeees 2 73 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service AcceSS 2 c ccceesseeeeercereeeeeeeees 2 77 11 13 Service Code Setup for AUD issiasisisstsisrissisisssasisissisisssssasissasioiaaiaivass 2 81 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel 2222 ccceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneneneeeeneeeess 2 83 11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access 2 85 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup sserorisrrrrurrerererrnrnnnrrneneseereseennssees 2 87 TAr ACD Group Pilot NUmMDeETsrsoisnsnnsidni a ani 2 88 11 19 Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 89 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table ssisiiriinisirasirniisinsneisirssieknieriidani 2 90 Program 12 Nig
512. tting 03 Day 01 31 00 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 529 Program 90 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 02 Programming Password Setup Level IN Description Use Program 90 02 Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords For password entry the system allows eight users to be defined Each user can have a e Unique alphanumeric name up to 10 alphanumeric characters e Password entry of up to eight digits using 0 9 and e Password level The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming The SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs The reverse type white on black just beneath the Description heading is the program access level You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires SA level password can access to SA or SB programs and SB level password can access to SB programs only It is NOT recommended to change these data If you must change these Data make sure you keep the ID Password or you will never be able to enter the program unless you clear all the System Data Setting 5 Input Data User Number 1 8 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 User Name Maximum 10 characters Refer below 02 Password Up to eight digits Refer below 03 User Level 0 Prohibited User Refer below 2
513. tty Item Input Data Default 01 Set Number of Days for Temporary 00 10 days 0 License 00 Temporary license is invalid Conditions e Switch reset is required for changes to take effect Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 583 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 38 User Programming Data Level Setup Level IN Description Program Use Program 90 38 User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on off each User Programming Feature 9 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Time setting 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 10 01 1 Turn On 11 10 03 02 Change of music on hold 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 10 04 tone 1 Turn On 11 10 02 03 Automatic Night Service Pat 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 12 02 tern 1 Turn On 04 Weekly Night Service Switch 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 12 03 ing 1 Turn On 05 Text Data for Night Mode 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 12 07 1 Turn On 06 Holiday Night Service 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 12 04 Switching 1 Turn On 07 DISA User ID Setup 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 25 08 1 Turn On 08 Mail Box Setup 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 40 02 1 Turn On 09 Text Messages Setup 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 20 16 1 Turn On 10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 22 04 1 Turn On 11 Abbreviated Dial Number 0 Turn Off 1 Turn On 11 10 04 and Name 1 Turn
514. tup 22 20 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup Level IN Description Use Program 22 20 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer Program pattern mode Input Data 2 2 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Day Night Mode 01 08 Item Item Input Data Default Related No Program 01 Flexible Ringing 0 Disable 1 13 04 1 Enable 14 01 30 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 277 Program 23 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 02 Call Pickup Groups Level IN Description Use Program 23 02 Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first There are 32 available Call Pickup Groups Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Group Number 1 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Priority Group No Priority Or Use this program to assign exten 1 xxx 11 12 26 der sions to Call Pickup Groups other Note default 11 12 27 1 32 1 999 than the extension group set up by a value follows the 11 12 28 Program 16 02 port order of 15 07 24 PRG11 02 or 15 07 25 PRG11 04 15 07
515. tup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for Extensions Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Register ID None 0 31 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 155 Program 15 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 17 CO Message Waiting Indication Level IN Description Use Program 15 17 CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash assignment on each CO line Input Data Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 LED Flash Assignment 0 LED Off 0 1 LED On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 156 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Level IN Description Use Program 15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a Program Virtual Extension Key is pressed Input Data 1 5 Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Virtual Extension 0 Release Define if calls to a Virtual Extension 1 20 04 01 Key Operation 1 Land on the key Key land on the Virtua
516. ture Program Input Data 2 4 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 01 Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension 60 V1 5 that placed it on Hold after this time Changed This time works with the Hold Recall Callback Time Item 2 02 Hold Recall Call 0 64800 seconds A trunk recalling from Hold or Park 30 back Time rings an extension for this time This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time After this time the system invokes the Hold recall time again Cycling between time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call 03 Exclusive Hold 0 64800 seconds A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls 90 Recall Time the extension that placed it on Hold after this time 04 Exclusive Hold 0 64800 seconds An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an 30 Recall Callback extension for this time If not picked Time up the call goes back on System Hold 05 Forced Release 0 64800 seconds Depending on the setting of Pro 1800 14 01 16 of Held Call gram 14 01 16 the system discon nects calls on Hold longer than this time 06 Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 60 V1 5 20 31 14 Normal time recalls the extension that initial Changed ly parked it 07 Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 300 Extended Re time recalls the extension that initial call ly parked it Conditions None Feature Cross Referenc
517. ual 1 0 cess PRG 11 09 01 Trunk access is used when making the call 1 Individual Trunk Ac to the mobile number cess PRG 11 09 02 04 Call Back 0 Disable 0 1 Enable Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 159 Program 15 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 24 Registration of Standard SIP Terminal Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Use Program 15 24 Registration of Standard SIP Terminal to register data in the standard SIP terminal where Register is not used Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Using IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Address of the standard SIP terminal 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 that is used as the SIP extension When Program 15 24 03 is set to 1 this Program cannot be changed from 0 0 0 0 except using PCProgramming 02 Call Procedure Port 0 65535 Call procedure port of the standard SIP 5060 terminal that is used as SIP extension 03 Registration Setting 0 Disable Enables or disables the Registration meth 0 when REGISTER isn t 1 Enable od An error will occur if Program 15 24 01 used is 0 0 0 0 and this Program is set to 1 ex cept using PCProgramming Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 160 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 28
518. uese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian V3 0 Added Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 414 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options Level IN Description Use Program 47 03 InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes 01 32 A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing Program Input Data 4 Group Mailbox Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 02 Mailbox Number Up to eight digits Mailbox Number Group Mailbox No Setting entered by pressing Hold The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master pilot number Use this option to select the De partment Group master pilot number as sociated with the Group Mailbox you are programming 1 31 3101 3131 V3 5 Changed Group Mailbox 32 No Setting V3 5 Changed 03 Mailbox Type 0 None Mailbox Type 1 1 Subscriber Use this option to set the Group Mailbox 2 Routing type There are three types of InMail mail boxes None 0 Subscriber 1 and Rout ing 2 03 Routing Mailbox 01 32 1 Number Conditions None Feature Cr
519. ules below 0 UND none 1 TRF dial data any X I N or P 2 UTRF dial data any X I N or P 3 REC1 mailbox number subscriber or group 4 REC2 mailbox number subscriber or group 5 LOGON mailbox number subscriber or group 6 HANGUP none 7 GOTO routing mailbox number index 1 32 Otherwise it will not be routed properly Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 437 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 47 InMail 47 15 Routing Directory Mailbox Options Level IN Description Program Use Program 47 15 Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox Options This data is referred if Program 47 07 02 Routing Master Mailbox Type was set to Type 4 Directory 47 Input Data Master Mailbox Number 01 32 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Minimum Number of Letters Re Le3 1 quired 02 Directory List Number to Use 1 8 1 03 Name Match 0 First 0 1 Last 04 Transfer Option 0 TRF 0 1 UTRF 05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0 255 15 06 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0 99 5 07 Fax Detection 0 Disable 0 1 Enable 08 Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 32 0 09 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 438 Program 47 InMail ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 47 InMail 47 17 Routing Distribution Mailbox Op
520. unk 9 e 11 01 Code access code This is the code exten System sion users dial to access Automatic Num Route Selection ARS F Route bering 14 01 07 Ba sic Trunk Data Setup 14 05 Trunk Group 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Ex tensions 2 68 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 02 2nd Trunk Route Dial Up to four digits Use this program to define addition No Setting e 11 01 Access Code al trunk access codes System When a user dials the Alternate Num Trunk Route Access Code the sys bering tem routes their call to the Alternate 14 01 Trunk Route 07 Ba sic Trunk Data Setup 14 05 Trunk Group 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 21 02 1 1 Trunk Group Routing for Ex tensions 21 15 Individu al Trunk Group Routing for Ex tensions Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route e Central Office Calls Placing e Trunk Group Routing Programming Manual 2 69 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 11 System Numbering 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Level IN Description Use Program 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator to customize the Service Codes for the System Administrator You can customize
521. up Level IN Description Use Program 10 61 Relay Port Setup to defines the relay port type on the 084M Input Data Relay Port No 1 6 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Relay Type 0 No Setting 0 1 External MOH 2 BGM resource 3 External Speaker 4 Door Phone 02 Destination Selection 10 61 01 1 or 2 Not Use 0 Not Used 10 61 01 3 1 3 External Speaker Message No 10 61 01 4 1 6 Door Phone No Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 54 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 62 NetBIOS Setting Level Description Use Program 10 62 NetBIOS Setting to set the data of NetBIOS Program Input Data 1 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 NetBIOS Mode 0 Disabled 1 1 Enabled 02 NetBIOS Name Maximum 15 characters Please avoid using Space between the SL1100 words Also when you create name please use all upper letters Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 55 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 63 DHCP Client Setting Level IN Description Program Use Program 10 63 DHCP Client Setting to set the data of DHCP Client 4 0 Input Data Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 DHCP Client Mode 0 Disabled If you are using IP phones trunks it is rec 1 1 Enabl
522. up for Analog Station Port Level Description Program Use Program 82 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the CODEC QSLAC filter of each analog port 8 2 Input Data Station Port Number 001 128 V3 5 Changed Item Item Input Data Default No 01 CODEC Filter Type 0 Type 0 2 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 6 Type 6 7 Type 7 8 Type 8 9 Type 9 10 Type 10 11 Type 11 12 Type 12 13 Type 13 14 Type 14 15 Type 15 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Direct Station Selection DSS Programming Manual 2 483 Program 82 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 08 Sidetone Volume Setup Level MF Description Use Program 82 08 Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume There are two levels based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk Input Data Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Sidetone Volume Input Data Digital Sidetone Level Analog Side 6 tone Level 0 54dB 54dB 1 48dB 54dB 2 42dB 54dB 3 36dB 48dB 4 30dB 42 dB 5 24dB 36dB 6 18dB 30dB 7 12dB 24dB 8 12dB 18dB 9 12dB 12dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Central Office Calls Answering e Central Office Calls Placing 2 484 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension IS
523. uration screen However the maximum trunk port will be limited to 84 ports even though the expansion Trunk card is fully mounted into the four KSUs Please see the hardware manual for further information 1 8 Introduction Programming the SL1100 Section 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your system The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes Program Number Program Name Program 10 System Configuration Setup on page 2 3 Program 11 System Numbering on page 2 58 Program 12 Night Mode Setup on page 2 91 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing on page 2 100 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup on page 2 108 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup on page 2 125 Program 16 Department Group Setup on page 2 162 Program 20 System Option Setup on page 2 167 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup on page 2 226 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup on page 2 254 Program 23 Answer Features Setup on page 2 278 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup on page 2 281 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup on page 2 289 Program 26 ARS Service on page 2 305 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup on page 2 311 Program 31 Paging Setup on page 2 321 Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup on page 2 332 Program 34 Tie Line Setup on page 2 336 Program 35 SMDR Account Cod
524. ut Data ACD Group Number 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 03 ACD Night Announce 0 64800 seconds Define the time the ACD night Announce 30 Sending Time ment plays Night announcement availabil ity depends on the setting in Program 41 03 02 Conditions e The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD 2 374 Program 41 ACD Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 13 VRS Message Number for Night Announcement Level SA This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 41 13 VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS message number to use as the night announcement This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41 12 01 4 1 Input Data ACD Group No 01 02 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 VRS Message Num 0 100 Input the VRS message number to be 0 ber 0 No Message used as the night announcement 02 Tone Kind at Mes 0 Ring Back Tone Input what is heard between the Night An 0 sage Interval 1 MOH Tone nouncements 2 BGM Source Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Call Distribution ACD Programming Manual 2 375 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 41 ACD Setup 41 14 ACD Options Setup Level Program 41 SA This
525. ut Data 8 0 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Duration 1 255 5 100 ms 02 Pause 1 255 5 100 ms 03 Tone Level Low dB 1 97 65 13 dB 45 0 0 3 04 Tone Level High 1 97 69 11 dB 45 0 0 3 Duration Pause Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Programming Manual 2 453 Program 80 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Level MF Description Use Program 80 03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver DTMF Tone Receiver Type 1 DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 DTMF Receiver for Trunk e 3 5 Reserved Input Data DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 DTMF Receiver for Trunk Reserved Reserved 5 Reserved Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Detect Level 0 0 dBm 25 dBm Used to select the systems DTMF tone de Refer below 1 5dBm 30dBm _ tection levels 2 10 dBm 35 dBm 3 15 dBm 40 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 30 dBm 55 dBm 02 Start Delay Time 0 255 0 25 ms 64 Refer below ms 03 Min Detect Level 0 15 Refer below DTMF Tone 0 10 dBm 0 to 25 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 1 15 dBm 0 to 30 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 2 20 dBm 0 to 35 dBm 15
526. vailable via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming Use Program 90 05 Slot Control to reset or delete uninstall units slots 0 15 V3 5 or higher Delete allows you to completely uninstall the unit You should do this if you want to remove a unit and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments If a different type of interface unit is being installed in a slot previously used the slot should be deleted option 1 first before installing the new interface unit Reset allows you to send a reset code Input Data 1 Delete 2 Reset 3 Set Busy Out 4 Reset Busy Out Menu Number Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Slot Control Slot Number 0 15 V3 5 Changed Conditions e When you delete or reset a unit you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90 05 When reusing the slot for another unit you must plug the unit in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again When you delete or reset a unit all related programming in Program 10 03 01 is set back to default Feature Cross Reference None 2 534 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 06 Trunk Control Level SA Description Use Program 90 06 Trunk Control for trunk maintenance Busy Out lets you block a unit from Program placing outgoing calls just like placing the unit switch down Once busied
527. value of the Jitter Buffer 20 Minimum of G 729 is set Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buf fer allows this variation to be absorbed 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the average G 729 Jitter Buffer 40 Standard 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the maximum G 729 Jitter Buffer 80 Maximum 12 Number of G 723 Au 1 30 msec Maximum number of the G 723 Audio 1 dio Frame 2 60 msec Frame 14 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the minimum value of the G 723 Jitter 30 Minimum Buffer 15 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the average value of the G 723 Jitter 60 Standard Buffer 2 508 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB IN Description Use Program 84 19 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC information for the SIP extensions ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 16 G 723 Jitter Buffer 0 300 ms Set the maximum value of the G 723 Jitter 120 Maximum Buffer 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 static Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer 3 3 adaptive immediately 1 Size set to the fixed amount for the co dec 2 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used 3 The minimum maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time re gardless of silence 18 Silence Compression 1 30 Set the voi
528. value which applied to 00 ice 0 9 A F send SIP Message Packet from DR700 terminal to Main Device 07 Error Display Timer 0 65535 seconds 0 08 Digest Authorization 0 4294967295 sec 0 Registration Expire onds Timer 09 Temporally Password Read Only None V3 5 Deleted Maximum 16 characters 0 9 a f A F 10 Number of Password 0 255 Input the number of times an incorrect 0 Retries 0 No Limit password can be entered when the securi ty key is pressed 11 Password Lock Time 0 120 0 0 No Limit 12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits No Setting 0 9 x P R 13 Media Type of Service 0x00 OxFF 00 0 9 A F Programming Manual 2 513 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 14 Refer Expire Timer 0 65535 seconds 60 seconds Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Program 84 None 2 514 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIPDB ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VolPDB 84 24 DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup Level IN Description Use Program 84 24 DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each Program type of DR700 Multiline Telephone Input Data 84 Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 Item Item Input Data Description Default No 01 Number of G 711 Au 1 10ms Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames 2 dio Frame 2 20ms Wh
529. ve tery placed 10 0 0 ISDN Link Layer1 link of Check Con 1 Confirm the When the ERR Error ISDN lines nection be data of Pro connection REC came off tween main gram 10 03 returns nor device and 2 Confirm wiring mally the er ISDN line and the instal ror is recov DSU Break lation of DSU ered down 3 Check with the The setting of manufacturer Program if the problem 10 03 does occurs again not corre spond to an actual line 11 0 0 CTI Link The link with the LAN cable de 1 Confirm the When the ERR Error CTI server fective CTI server connection REC came off Connected wiring and the returns nor HUB broken connection mally the er The CTI serv 2 Check the ror is recov er doesn t manufacturer ered start normally if the problem occurs again 14 0 0 LAN Link The link with LAN cable de Confirm the opera When the ERR Error LAN on CPU fective tion of LAN con connection REC came off Connected nector LAN cable returns nor HUB broken and HUB again mally the er Defective ror is recov CPU ered 15 0 0 Network 1 The net LAN cable is 1 Confirm that When the ERR Keep work con defective the defect is connection REC Alive nection has Net side trou on the Net returns nor WAR V1 5 been cut ble work side mally the er Added 2 Network Packet 2 Confirm the ror is recov Keep Alive blocked by settings of ered restoration firewall HUB and the 3 Response Repetition of router
530. ve when PRG 84 31 01 1 04 TDM Echo Can 0 15 12 celler NLP Threshold 05 TDM Echo Can 0 89 0 ms 890 ms Do not change the setting unless 0 84 31 01 celler Tail Dis asked to change by engineer placement V2 0 Effective when PRG 84 31 01 1 Added 06 TDM Echo can 1 32 ms Do not change the setting unless 7 84 31 01 celler tail length 2 48 ms asked to change by engineer V2 0 Added 3 64 ms Select length of echo Effective 4 80 ms when PRG 84 31 01 1 5 96 ms 6 112 ms 7 128 ms Programming Manual 2 523 Program o4 Program 84 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 07 TDM Echo Can 0 6 9 db 9 db Do not change the setting unless 5 84 31 01 celler Default 9 db asked to change by engineer ERL Level V2 0 1 6db Select length of echo Effective Added 2 3db when PRG 84 31 01 1 5 6 db 6 9db 19 RTP Echo Can 0 Disable 0 celler mode 1 Enable 20 RTP Echo Can 0 Disable 0 celler NLP mode 1 Enable 21 RTP Echo Can 0 Disable Do not change the setting unless 1 84 31 19 celler Com 1 Enable asked to change by engineer fortNoise mode Select comfort noise as background V2 0 Added noise on or off Effective when PRG 84 31 19 1 22 RTP Echo Can 0 15 12 celler NLP Threshold 23 RTP Echo Can 0 89 0 ms 890 ms Do not change the setting unless 0 84 31 19 c
531. vice Code Setup Administrative for Special Access on page 2 85 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup on page 2 87 lyze 2 Extension Number 11 02 Extension Numbering on page 2 65 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering on page 2 66 11 07 Department Group Pilot Numbers on page 2 67 3 Trunk Access Code 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code 4 Special Trunk Access 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 5 Operator Access 20 17 Operator Extension on page 2 197 6 F Route Access 44 xx 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added Network ID 0 4 9 Dial Extension Ana 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table on page 2 90 7 Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates Assume for example the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 399 To make extension numbers correspond to room numbers you should use Program 11 02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399 Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11 10 11 16 Default See the following tables for default settings Table 2 1 System Numbering Default Settings Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking Access V1 5 Added 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 Not Used Dialed Number of Digits
532. vings should adjust for daylight savings time 03 Start of Month Sum 1 12 Enter the month when the system should 3 mer Time Jan 1 2 Feb etc adjust the time for daylight savings time 01 12 04 Start of Week 0 Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the sys 2 0 5 tem should adjust the time for daylight sav ings time The week will start on the day listed in 10 24 05 05 Start of Week Day 1 7 Enter the day of the week when the sys 1 Sun 1 Mon 2 etc tem should adjust the time for daylight sav ings time 01 Sunday 02 Monday etc 06 End of Month 1 12 Enter the month when the system should 11 Jan 1 2 Feb etc adjust the time for standard time 01 12 07 End of Week 0 Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the sys 1 0 5 tem should adjust the time for standard time The week will start on the Day listed in 10 24 08 08 End of Week Day 1 7 Enter the day of the week when the sys 1 Sun 1 Mon 2 etc tem should adjust the time for daylight sav ings time 01 Sunday 02 Monday etc Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Clock Calendar Display Time and Date 2 26 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 26 IP System Operation Setup Level IN Description Use Program 10 26 IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for Prog
533. voltage is less than the 2 Level 2 setting in 10 03 13 the 3 Level 3 system considers this as 4 Level 4 Loss Of Signal and the 5 Level 5 PRI does not come up 6 Level 6 Note that there are differ 7 Level 7 highest sensitivity ent values based on the setting in 10 03 12 for the PRI 2 6 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 14 Service Protocol for S point 0 Keypad facility 1 Specified Protocol for Aspire sys tem 0 15 Call Busy Mode for S point 0 Alerting 1 Disconnect 16 Two B Channel Transfer for PRI Service 18 Type of Number 0 Unknown 1 International number 2 National number 3 Network Specific number 4 Subscriber number 5 Abbreviated number ISDN Protocol definition Select the number type for the ISDN circuit 19 Numbering Plan Identifica tion 0 Unknown 1 ISDN numbering plan 2 Data numbering plan 3 Telex numbering plan 4 National standard numbering plan 5 Private numbering plan ISDN Protocol definition Select the Numbering Plan used for the ISDN circuit 20 Network Exchange Selec tion 0 Standard same as NI 2 1 reserved 2 reserved 3 DMS A211 4 5ESS 5 DMS A233 6 4ESS 7 NI 2 Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit 21 Number of Ports 0 Auto 1 4 Ports 2 8
534. volume 30 minutes 13 Number of RNA rings V1 5 Changed 1 99 rings If a non pager callout rings the destination longer than this interval 1 99 rings In Mail marks the call as unanswered Ring No Answer and hangs up 5 rings 14 Number of Cascading Attempts V1 5 Changed 1 99 rings Use this option to set how many times 1 99 rings InMail retries an incomplete Mes sage Notification callout This total includes unacknowledged cal louts callouts to a busy destination and callouts to an unanswered destination This option applies to pager and non pag er callouts 1 ring 15 Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled Retry Until Ack When this option is enabled 1 InMail continues to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged If this option is disabled 0 InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47 01 14 Number of Callout Attempts This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient logs on to the mailbox 16 Name Format 0 First Last 1 Last First Specify if names are displayed in First Last format or Last First Programming Manual 2 409 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISS
535. waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit In addition the user can dial to switch a DP trunk 1 4 to DTMF dialing Manual Users can dial to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing Program 08 Answering Con 0 Polarity Reversing 1 21 01 03 dition Polarity 1 Polarity Reversing or Timer Int Digit 09 Busy Tone De 0 Disable No 0 tection 1 Enable Yes 10 Caller ID 0 Off Caller ID not Enable or disable a trunk ability to 1 V1 5 displayed receive Caller ID information Changed 1 On Caller ID is displayed 11 Next Trunk in 0 Disable No Use this option to enable disable the 0 Rotary if No Dial 1 Enable Yes system ability to skip over a trunk if Tone dial tone is not detected This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls 12 Detect Network 0 Disable No 1 Disconnect Sig 1 Enable Yes nal 13 Trunk to Trunk 0 Disable No 0 Limitation 1 Enable Yes 18 Busy Tone De 0 Disable 0 tection on Talk 1 Enable ing 19 Busy Tone De 1 255 1 14 02 18 tection Frequen cy 20 Busy Tone De 0 64800 x 100 ms 0 14 02 18 tection Interval 23 Caller ID Receiv 0 Wait Caller ID Rings extension before receiving 1 ing Method 1 Immediate Ring Caller ID 1 or after receiving Caller ID 0 24 Use Call Waiting 0 Off
536. when RES is sent This timer is valid for user side use only 17 T319 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second of the timer to be started when SUSPEND is sent This timer is valid for user side use only 18 T320 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 30 second when B channel access connec tion is received or D channel access DL ESTABLISH confirmation or indication is received 19 T321 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 30 second of the timer to be started when STATUS ENQ is received 20 T322 1 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1 100ths of a 4 second upon D channel failure Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility 2 470 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port Level IN Description Use Program 81 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC QSLAC Filter for each analog trunk port Input Data 8 1 Trunk Port Number 001 084 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 CODEC Filter Type 0 Type 0 2 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 6 Type 6 7 Type 7 8 Type 8 9 Type 9 10 Type 10 11 Type 11 12 Type 12 13 Type 13 14 Type 14 15 Type 15 Program Conditions
537. with the Hold Recall Callback Time Program 24 01 02 11 Hold Recall Call 0 64800 seconds A trunk recalling from Hold or Park 30 24 01 02 Back Time Non rings an extension for this time This Exclusive Hold time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time After this time the system invokes the Hold Recall Time again Cycling between time Program 24 01 01 and 24 01 02 and Program 24 01 06 and 24 01 07 continues until a user an swers the call 12 Exclusive Hold 0 64800 seconds A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls 90 24 01 03 Recall Time the extension that placed it on Hold after this time 13 Exclusive Hold 0 64800 seconds An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an 30 24 01 04 Recall Callback extension for this time If not picked Time up the call goes back on System Hold 14 Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 60 V1 5 24 01 06 Normal time interval recalls the extension Changed that initially parked it 15 Delayed Call For 0 64800 seconds If activated at an extension Delayed 10 24 02 03 warding Time Call Forwarding occurs after this Call Forward No time This also sets how long a Answer Transferred call waits at an exten sion forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mail box 16 Transfer Recall 0 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call re 20 V1 5 24 02 04 Time calls after this time to the extension Changed that initially transferred it 17 DID DISA No An
538. work Specified Pa 0 16 Enter a table number from Program 26 12 0 rameter Table 2 394 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Programming Manual SL1100 2 395 Program 44 Program 44 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 06 Additional Dial Table Level IN Description Use Program 44 06 Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS F Route number The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44 05 03 Input Data Additional Dial Table Number 001 100 Item Item Input Data Default No 01 Additional Dial Up to 36 digits No Setting Enter 1 9 0 x Pause press LK 1 to enter a pause Conditions None Feature Cross Reference e Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route 2 396 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Level IN Description Use Program 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access to set the gain PAD table If an extension Program dials ARS F Route number e The Extension Dial Gain Table assigned in Program 44 05 is activated e The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings 44 If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS F Route e The Tandem
539. ximum length of recorded messages for Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message e Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox e Outside Automated Attendant callers ac cessing a mailbox via a GOTO com mand and then dialing RS to record and send a message Subscriber Mailbox Greetings e Announcement Messages e Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus The length of a Conversation Record is 10 times the Subscriber Message Length Since the Conversation Re cord time cannot exceed 4095 sec onds any setting in Subscriber Mes sage Length larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded con versations 04 Non Subscriber Mes 1 4095 seconds Mbox Msg Length 120 seconds sage Length Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for e Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Sub scriber Mailbox e Outside callers transferred by an exten sion user to a Subscriber Mailbox Programming Manual 2 407 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item No Item Input Data Description Default 05 Message Backup Go Ahead Time 1 6015 seconds Msg Bkup Adv Time Use this option to set the backup go ahead time This time sets how far InMail backs up when a user dials B while listen ing to a message This interval also sets how far InMail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening
540. xt outside line after the system releases an outside line 12 Telephone Web_ 1 86400 The system automatically logs out of 900 Pro Logout Time 86400 seconds 1 a Telephone Web Pro session after 15 min day inactivity lasting this time 16 Mobile Extension 1 64800 seconds The amount of time the system 15 15 22 04 Callback time waits to until system ends the call back 17 Day Night 0 Toggle Will follow This program sets the operation 0 V4 0 15 07 Change Key PRG 12 08 01 mode for the Night Mode Key PRG Changed Mode 1 Skip When press 15 07 key 09 ed the system will step to the next night mode time period in PRG 12 02 Programming Manual 2 167 Program 20 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 20 ProgressTone 0 Disable Enable Disable the Progressive 1 for Mobile Exten 1 Enable Tone when calling a Mobile Exten sion Setting sion V4 0 Added Conditions None Program Feature Cross Reference 20 2 168 Program 20 System Option Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones Level IN Description Use Program 20 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for multiline telephones Program Input Data 2 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No P
541. y All Other Answer Answer Schedules use this 4 Wednesday Schedules 1 option to select the day of the 5 Thursday week the Answer Schedule 6 Friday should end 7 Saturday Programming Manual 2 433 Program 47 Program 47 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Default Description No 06 Date MMDD All Schedule 0000 Entryxx Date For example For Date Type 3 Answer 0101 January 1 Schedules use this option to 1231 December 31 select the date the Answer 0000 Undefined Schedule should be active 07 Schedule Start Time HHMM 24 hour clock Answer Table 1 Entryxx Start Time For example Schedule 1 0830 Use this option to specify the 0130 1 30 AM All other schedules time the Answer Schedule 1700 5 00 PM are 0000 should start It applies to Day 0000 Undefined of the Week Type 1 Range of Days Type 2 and Date Type 3 schedules To make a schedule run continuously make the same entry for 47 12 07 Schedule Start Time and 47 12 08 Schedule End Time 08 Schedule End Time HHMM 24 hour clock Answer Table 1 Entryxx End Time For example Schedule 1 1700 Use this option to specify the 0130 1 30 AM All Other Schedules time the Answer Schedule 1700 5 00 PM 0000 should end It applies to Day 0000 Undefined of the Week Type 1 Range of Days Type 2 and Date Type 3 schedules To make a s
542. y Pad 1 20 13 01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 20 13 22 Call Party Status 1 20 17 01 Attendant 101 20 19 02 Caller ID wait timer 0 21 01 06 1st Digit P 1 21 01 09 Hotline Start 3 21 04 01 T R Class for Extension 1 21 05 07 Permit code table Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 21 06 06 Permit code table PmitTBL 1 None PmitTBL 2 119 112 113 080 21 05 08 Restriction Table Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 21 15 01 2nd TRK Ace Route TBL 2 22 01 11 Msg Interval 10 22 14 01 Message Start Time 1 22 14 03 MSG1 Count 1 22 14 05 MSG2 Count 1 22 14 07 Disconnect Time 1 22 15 01 Message Start Time 1 22 15 03 MSG1 Count 1 22 15 05 MSG2 Count 1 22 15 07 Disconnect Time 1 24 02 03 CFW not answer Time 15 24 02 04 TRF Recall time 15 25 01 02 without Password 0 2 568 Program 90 Maintenance Program ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Program No Name Default 25 07 01 VRS Dial Time 5 25 07 02 DISA No Answer Time 60 25 07 03 DISA Disconnect Retransfer to IRG 30 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group 1 31 02 02 Internal all Paging Group 1 32 01 02 Door Box Lock Cancel 1 35 01 04 SMDR Omit Digits 0 35 02 09 SMDR Extension Number or Name 1 35 02 14 SMDR Date 1 80 04 06 ON Minimum RCV2 Time 7 80 04 08 OFF Minimum RCV2 Time 7 80 04 12 TONE RCV 2 Frequency 1 2 80 04 13 TONE RCV 2
543. y Sensor 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 716 Reset 8 digit Service Code setting for cancel Warning message sending and emergency call Programming Manual 2 79 Program 11 SL1100 ISSUE 4 0 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 63 Watch Mode 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 717 Start 8 digit Service Code SC setting for on off watch mode SC 1 Watch mode start SC 0 Watch mode end 64 Security Sensor 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 719 Mode Start 8 digit Service Code SC setting for on off security sensor SC 1 Start sensor detection SC 0 Ignore sensor detection Program 2 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone 1 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 80 Program 11 System Numbering ISSUE 4 0 L1100 Program 11 System Numbering 11 13 Service Code Setup for ACD Level IN This Program is available for V1 5 or higher Description Program Use Program 11 13 Service Code Setup for ACD to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11 10 11 12 and 11 14 11 16 The following chart shows 1 1 The number of each code 01 06 e The function of the Service Code The type of telephones that can use the Service Code e The default entry
544. ystem None or Speed Dial None Private Number 00 99 or 000 999 28 Speed Dial Group None or Speed Dial None Number 00 99 or 000 999 29 Repeat Redial On Red Repeat Dialing 30 Saved Number Redial None 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet me Conference None 33 Override Off Hook Sig None naling 34 Barge In None 35 Camp On On Red Active 36 Department Step Call None 37 DND FWD Override Call None 38 Message Waiting None 39 Room Monitoring Slow Blink Red Monitoring Fast Blink Red To be monitored 2 314 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note Number 41 Secretary Buzzer Extension Number 8 On Red Calling party digits Fast Blink Called party 42 Boss Secretary Call Extension Number 8 On Red Active Pickup digits 43 Series Call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive Hold None 46 Department Group Log On Red Withdrawing Out 49 Call Redirect Extension Number or None Voice Mail Number 8 digits 50 Account Code None 52 Automatic Answer with Incoming Group Num On Red Setup Delay Message Setup ber 01 25 53 Automatic Answer with On Red Delay Message Answering Delay Message Starting 54 External Call Forward On Red Setup by Door Box Setup 55 Extension Name Edit None 56 General Purpose LED 001 100 Red On lt gt
545. ystem Numbering ISSUE 4 0 SL1100 Item Item Input Data Description Default Related No Program 16 Leaving Message 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 626 11 11 09 Waiting Re 8 digit quires CPU to be licensed for Ho tel Motel 17 Dial Block by Su 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 601 90 19 pervisor 8 digit 18 Off Premise Call 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 722 13 05 Forward by Door 8 digit Box 20 VRS Record 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 616 20 07 13 P Erase Message 8 digit Define Service Code for VRS mes rogram sage recording or erasing 21 VRS General 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 611 20 07 14 Message Play 8 digit back 22 VRS Record or 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 612 20 07 15 Erase General 8 digit Message 23 SMDR Exten 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 621 20 07 18 sion Accumula 8 digit ted Printout Code 24 SMDR Group 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT 622 20 07 19 Accumulated 8 digit Printout Code 25 Account Code 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT 623 20 07 20 Accumulated 8 digit Printout Code 26 Forced Trunk 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT No Setting 20 07 11 Disconnect 8 digit 27 Trunk Port Disa 0 9 Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 645 20 07 12 ble for Outgoing 8 digit Calls 32 Set Private Call 0 9 x Maximum of Terminal MLT SLT 646 14 01 27 Refuse 8 digit 20 07 24 33 Entry Cal

SL1100 Programming Manual - Comm

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents